Home

Q-Logic 5600 User's Manual

1. Tree Targetinitia Switch Port Address Type WWNN WWPI Unknown SWi 1 130101 NL Portt 20 0000 20 377313 69 21 00 00 20 37 Unknown 8W2 1 130102 NL Port 20 00 00 20 3773 12 9b 21 00 00 20 37 Data Unknown sw3 1 1301e4 NL Pot 20 0000 20 3773 0526 21 00 00 20 37 Initiator Swi 13 130000 N Port 20 01 00 e0 8b 27 a7 bc _ 21 01 00 e0 8b Window Devices Active Zoneset Data Window Tabs Working Status Indicator F I t Faceplate acep ate File Fabric Switch Port Zoning Wizards View Help Display H a amp e mmo o A Add Open Save Refresh Events Zoning Security Help Switch 9 Fabric SW um SW2 um Sw3 Switch Type FC Switch First Port Address 620000 World Wide Name 10 00 00 c0 dd 03 d5 cb Serial Number 0426a07850 Reason for Status Normal User Name admin Login Level Super user User Authentication Enabled True _ Vendor QLogic Firmware Version W5 2 0 2 1 Thu Jul 1 23 24 24 2004 1 warns sn ci Devices Switch PortStats Portin Figure 2 6 SANsurfer Switch Manager Display Elements 2 18 59097 02 B XKX 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager QLOGIC SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface aan 2 11 1 Menu Bars The menus and the options offered in them vary depending on the display For example the Port menu and many of the Switch menu selections are available only in the faceplate
2. Figure 4 16 Restore Dialogs Full and Selective 59097 02 B XKX 4 Managing Switches QLOGIC Restoring a Switch A aaa 3 Enterthe archive file name or browse for the file This archive file must be one that was produced by the SANsurfer Switch Manager Archive function Configuration backup files created with the Config Backup command are not compatible with the SANsurfer Switch Manager Restore function 4 To restore all configuration settings click the Full Restore tab then click the Restore button To restore selected configuration settings click the Selective Restore tab and check one or more of the following boxes then click the Restore button B Network Properties Restores all settings presented in the Network properties dialog except the IP address Refer to Network Properties on page 4 29 BM IP Address Restores switch IP address in addition to the other network properties WB Switch Properties Restores all settings presented in the Switch properties dialog except the domain ID Refer to Switch Properties on page 4 19 B Domain ID Restores switch domain ID in addition to the other switch properties B Port Properties Restores all settings presented in the Port properties dialog Refer to Configuring Ports on page 5 10 B Configured Zoning Restores all configured zone sets zones and aliases in the switch s zoning database excluding the active zone set WB Configured Sec
3. 4 20 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 4 Managing Switches Configuring a Switch ls 4 7 2 3 Domain ID and Domain ID Lock 59097 02 B The domain ID is a unique Fibre Channel identifier for the switch The Fibre Channel address consists of the domain ID port ID and the Arbitrated Loop Physical Address ALPA The maximum number of switches within a fabric is 239 with each switch having a unique domain ID Switches come from the factory with the domain IDs unlocked This means that if there is a domain ID conflict in the fabric the switch with the highest principal priority or the principal switch will reassign any domain ID conflicts and establish the fabric If you lock the domain ID on a switch and a domain ID conflict occurs one of the switches will isolate as a separate fabric and the Logged In LEDs on both switches will flash to show the affected ports Refer to the Set Config Command on page A 64 for information about the Switch keyword and the Domain ID Lock and Principal Priority parameters If you connect a new switch to an existing fabric with its domain ID unlocked and a domain conflict occurs the new switch will isolate as a separate fabric However you can remedy this by resetting the new switch or taking it offline then back online The principal switch will reassign the domain ID and the switch will join the fabric NOTE Domain ID reassignment is not reflected in zoning that is defined by domain I
4. A 49 A Command Line Interface Reset Command XX QLOGIC AA NN Enter Show Config Threshold command to display threshold alarm configuration values Table A 11 Port Threshold Alarm Configuration Defaults Parameter Default ThresholdMonitoringEnabled CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled RisingTrigger Falling Trigger SampleWindow DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled RisingTrigger Falling Trigger SampleWindow ISLMonitoringEnabled RisingTrigger FallingTrigger SampleWindow LoginMonitoringEnabled RisingTrigger FallingTrigger SampleWindow LogoutMonitoringEnabled RisingTrigger FallingTrigger SampleWindow LOSMonitoringEnabled RisingTrigger FallingTrigger SampleWindow False True 25 10 True 200 0 10 True 2 0 10 True 5 1 10 True 5 1 10 True 100 5 10 Enter the Show Config Zoning command to display zoning configuration values A 50 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC A Command Line Interface Reset Command o 9 9 7 aaa Table A 12 Zoning Configuration Defaults Parameter Default InteropAutoSave True DefaultVisibility All DiscardInactive False Enter the Show Setup SNMP command to display SNMP configuration values Table A 13 SNMP Configuration Defaults Parameter Default SNMPEnabled True Contact lt syscontact undefined gt Location lt sysLocation undefined gt Description SANbox 5600 Series FC Switch Trap 1 5
5. Timeout 1 10 seconds 10 Retries 0 3 0 Sign Packets jmi password12345678 Figure 3 3 Edit Server Information To edit information of a RADIUS server do the following 1 59097 02 B Open the faceplate display open the Switch menu and select Radius Servers In the Radius Server Information dialog shown in Figure 3 3 click the Edit Server tab In server list at the top of the dialog select the server to be edited Make changes to the IP Address UDP Port Timeout Retries and Secret fields Select or unselect the server type Device User Account and Sign Packet check boxes Click the Edit Server button to save the changes and click the Close button to exit the dialog 3 5 3 Managing Fabrics XX RADIUS Servers QLOGIC AA NY 3 1 4 Modifying Authentication Order RADIUS Server Information Editing information of a RADIUS server involves changing the configuration of a RADIUS server Radius Server Information UDP Port Server Type 1812 Device User Modify Authentication Order Device Authentication Order User Authentication Order Modify Order Add Server l Remove Server Edit Server q Modify Authentication Order Close Help Figure 3 4 Modify Authentication Order RADIUS Server Information To modify the authentication order information of a RADIUS server do the followi
6. Account Login ho selection CJ Admin Authority Enabled Account Expiration Date Permanent account no expiration date Account will expirein days max of 2000 days Modify Account Add Account Remove Account Change Password l Modify Account Close Help Figure 4 4 User Account Administration Dialog Modify Account 4 6 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 4 Managing Switches Displaying Switch Information aaa 4 2 Displaying Switch Information 59097 02 B The faceplate display and data windows provide the following switch information Device and HBA information Switch specifications and addresses Configuration parameters Port performance statistics Port information Configured zone sets Figure 4 5 shows the faceplate display for the SANbox 5600 Series switch Faceplate File Fabric Switch Port Zoning Wizards View Help H a m dcm Add Open Save Refresh Events Zoning Security Help Switch Fabric Sw sw2 SW3 Em Type FC Switch First Port Address 660000 World Wide Name 10 00 00 c0 dd 03 d5 cb Serial Number 0426207850 Reason for Status jNormal User Name admin Login Level Super user User Authentication Enabled True vendor QLogic ae Version ps 2 0 2 1 Thu Jul 1 23 2 ae wot inactiva Kimawaraiinreion JI 0 47 Aiad lun 22 switcn Part Sta ried Zonaoots Configured Socurty Mts Sea Figure 4 5
7. Command Line Interface XX Working with Switch Configurations QLOGIC AA NY A 3 2 Backing up and Restoring Switch Configurations Backing up and restoring a configuration is useful to protect your work or for use as a template in configuring other switches The Config Backup command creates a file on the switch named configdata This file can be used to restore a switch configuration only from the command line interface it cannot be used to restore a switch using SANsurfer Switch Manager SANbox xxxx 5 admin start SANbox xxxx admin 4 config backup The configdata file contains all of the switch configuration information including the following m All named switch configurations including the default configuration This includes port switch port threshold alarm and zoning configuration components WB AI SNMP and network information defined with the Set Setup command m The zoning database included all zone sets zones and aliases You use FTP to download the configdata file to your workstation for safe keeping and to upload the file back to the switch for the restore function To download the configdata file open an FTP session on the switch and login with the account name images and password images Transfer the file in binary mode with the Get command as shown gt ftp ip_address user images password images ftp gt bin ftp gt get configdata xxxxx bytes sent in xx secs ftp gt quit You should rename the config
8. To reset a switch using SANsurfer Switch Manager do the following 1 Select the switch to be reset and open the faceplate display 2 Open the Switch menu and select the Reset Switch pull down menu B Select Hot Reset to perform a hot reset m Select Reset to perform a standard reset WB Select Hard Reset to perform a hard reset 59097 02 B 4 17 4 Managing Switches XX Configuring a Switch QLOGIC NENNEN 4 7 Configuring a Switch 4 7 1 Switch configuration is divided into three areas chassis configuration network configuration and SNMP configuration Chassis configuration specifies switch wide Fibre Channel settings Network configuration specifies IP settings remote logging and the NTP client SNMP configuration specifies SNMP settings and traps You can configure a switch explicitly or you can use the Configuration Wizard The Configuration Wizard is a series of dialogs that guide you through the chassis network and SNMP configuration steps on new or replacement switches Using the Configuration Wizard The Configuration Wizard is a series of dialogs you can use to configure the IP address and other basic parameters on new or replacement switches SANsurfer Switch Manager will detect the first time use and present the Initial Start dialog from which the Configuration Wizard can be launched You can also launch the Configuration Wizard from the Wizards menu in either the topology display or the faceplate
9. 4 Click the OK button to open the view 28 Setting SANsurfer Switch Manager Preferences Using the preferences settings you can W Change the location of the working directory in which to save files W Change the location of the browser used to view the online help The Browser Location field is not supported displayed for Macintosh OS X W Choose the fabric discovery interval The fabric discovery interval is how often the SANsurfer Switch Manager application receives information from the fabric Choose 30 default 45 or 60 seconds The smaller the interval the more often the application talks to the switch and thus the greater impact to performance W Enable default or disable the view file auto save and load feature Refer to Exiting SANsurfer Switch Manager on page 2 12 for more information on the default fabric view file W X Enable default or disable the use of the Initial Start Dialog at the beginning of a SANsurfer Switch Manager session Refer to Starting SANsurfer Switch Manager on page 2 9 for information about the Initial Start Dialog After a default fabric view file is created this setting has no effect m Enable default or disable the Event Browser Refer to Displaying the Event Browser on page 3 30 If the Event Browser is enabled using the Preferences dialog as shown in Figure 2 5 the next time SANsurfer Switch Manager is started all events will be displayed If the Event Browser is disabled when S
10. B MD5 hash 16 byte WB SHA 1 hash 20 byte Domain ID of the switch to which to bind the ISL group member worldwide name This option is available only if FabricBindingEnabled is set to True using the Set Config Security command Refer to the Set Config Command on page A 64 0 zero specifies no binding 59097 02 B A 27 A Command Line Interface XX Group Command QLOGIC EEE V VkV O w Ww A Table A 6 Port Group Member Attributes Attribute Description Member Port worldwide name for the N Port device that would attach to the Switch A member cannot belong to more than one group Authentication Enables CHAP or disables None authentication using the Chal lenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP The default is None Primary Hash The preferred hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Pri mary Secret sent by the Port group member The hash functions are MD5 or SHA 1 If the Port group member does not support the Pri mary Hash the switch will use the Secondary Hash Primary Secret Hexadecimal string that is encrypted by the Primary Hash for authentication with the Port group member The string has the fol lowing lengths depending on the Primary Hash function W MD5 hash 16 byte m SHA 1 hash 20 byte Secondary Hash Hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Secondary Secret sent by the Port group member Hash values are MD5 or SHA 1 The Secondary Hash is used when the Pri
11. Port Type NL Port Operating System Data Unavailable FC Address 03039d OS Device Name Data Unavailable Targetinitiator Target HBA WYN Data Unavailable Host Name Data Unavailable Node WWN 20 00 00 04 cf 92 b6 d9 Active Zones group1 serveri Symbolic Node Name Data navailable FC 4 Types FCP Symbolic Port Name Data Unavailable Vendor Information Vendor SEAGATE ST318452FC Rev 0003 Firmware Serial Data Unavailable Driver Hardware Data Model Data Unavailable Model Description Data Figure 3 14 Detailed Devices Display Dialog 3 36 59097 02 B XKX 3 Managing Fabrics QLOGIC Working with Device Information and Nicknames o 9 9 9 7 aaa 3 6 2 Exporting Device Information to a File To save device information to a file open the topology display and do the following 1 Select one or more switches If no switches are selected Devices information is gathered for all switches 2 Open the Switch menu and select Export Devices Information 3 In the Save dialog enter a file name 4 Click the Save button 3 6 3 Managing Device Port Nicknames You can assign a nickname to a device port World Wide Name A nickname is a user definable meaningful name that can be used in place of the World Wide Name Assigning a nickname makes it easier to recognize device ports when zoning your fabric or when viewing the Devices data window SANsurfer Switch Manager maintains nickname
12. This LIP is used to reinitialize the loop An L port identified by AL PS may have noticed a performance degradation and is trying to restore the loop A loop initialization primitive frame used to acquire an AL PA 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 5 Managing Ports Displaying Port Information ls 59097 02 B Table 5 5 Port Statistics Data Window Entries Continued Entry Description LIP f8 AL_PS LIP f8 f7 Login Count Logout Count Loop Timeouts Loss Of Sync Primitive Sequence Errors Rx Link Resets Rx Offline Sequences Total Errors Total Link Resets Total LIPs Received Total LIPs Transmitted Tx Offline Sequences Total Rx Frames Total Rx Words Total Tx Frames Total Tx Words Tx Link Resets Total Offline Sequences This LIP denotes a loop failure detected by the L port identi fiedby AL PS A loop initialization primitive frame used to indicate that a Loop Failure has been detected at its receiver and does not have a valid AL PA Number of device logins that have occurred on the switch Number of device logouts that have occurred on the switch Number of loop timeouts Number of synchronization losses 5100 ms detected by this port A loss of synchronization is detected by receipt of an invalid transmission word Number of bad primitives received by the port Number of link reset primitives received from an attached device Number of offline sequence primitiv
13. a The Secret field is disabled if authentication is set to None otherwise the Secret field enabled B The Generate button is only enabled when authentication is Chap WB X Secretis 16 byte length for MD5 authentication and 20 bytes if authentication is SHA 1 3 14 59097 02 B XX LOGIC 3 Managing Fabrics Securing a Fabric I a 3 2 4 6 Creating a Security Group Member To add a member to a security group do the following 1 59097 02 B On the faceplate display click the Security button on the toolbar or open the Security menu and select Edit Security to open the Edit Security dialog Choose one of the following methods to open the Create a Security Group Member dialog a In the graphic window click a security group and click the Security Member button in the toolbar a Right click on a security group and select Create Members from the popup menu Open the Group Member pull down menu and select a Node World Wide Name The switch must be a member of any group in which authentication is used You can also type in a hex value Open the Authentication pull down menu and select a type of protocol to be used for the authentication process for that member Ba ISL authentication options are None 0 bytes Chap 16 bytes B MS CT Common Transport authentication options are None 0 bytes MD5 16 bytes SHA 20 bytes a Port authentication options are None 0 bytes Chap 16 bytes In the
14. cc eee 4 17 Features License Key Dialog 0200 ee 4 18 Add license Key Dialog 7 sain Ex ved aioe LAMAN Seed eae es BG eR DES 4 19 Hardware Status LEDS sce GH NGAY Tue eae ca heed awa NG 5 1 Faceplate Display Port Information n n anana cece cece ee 5 2 Port Properties Dialog ooa ute Bic et Se AE GAN Ba Soe qu Nan ee Se ee 5 3 Designate Donor Ports eres ess ei e re i S nr n ea a EEE o e aas a ana hi 5 4 Port Loopback Test Dialog ta Ga aa a thie ama be edu Oa oe BO clon 2 5 5 Fabric VIeW GIraphs sss naa sve Pha anakan hc KABA E EE IR Tet bA AS 5 6 Save Default Performance View File Dialog a 5 7 Load Default View File Dialog 0 00 0 0 0020 eee 5 8 Preferences SANsurfer Performance Viewer a 5 9 Default Graph Options Dialog 4 y dot hei eic Ron e ec n Table 2 1 Workstation Requirements is so ioa cs nb ANA Me x RUE Leb oe 2 2 Tool Bar Buttons s ce RR ARR RACER RE qe IR E MER bars 3 1 Topology Display Switch and Status Icons 0 000 cee eee 3 2 Severity Levels tus ko bs necp x ei Rea dewey and Exc ned ae Sard 3 3 Devices Data Window Entries llle 3 4 Edit Zoning Dialog Tool Bar Buttons and Icons eee ee 4 1 Factory User ACCOUNTS os Naan oxide Ged DAW SG PAL Oe Rey ee ded is 4 2 Switch Data Window Entries oz STER ead Ree xe xr es 4 3 SWIC Resets dees mag ct rey edu deci at dc based Mako RA 4 4 Switch Administrative States ce eee eens
15. Symbolic Name Ext Credits Requested Credits to Donate Donor Group Valid Donor Groups Media Media Speed Media Type Media Transmitter Media Distance Media Vendor Media Vendor ID Why E_Port is isolated Multiple Frame Sequence bundling status RSCN message suppression status Sta tus can be enabled disabled or automati cally determined by the switch The speed requested by the user The speed actually being used by the port The maximum number of credits granted to a port that can be used when extending port credits Device scan status Enabled means the switch queries the connected device dur ing login for FC 4 descriptor information Port symbolic name Number of requested credits The number of credits available to be donated by the selected port The donor group of the selected port The number of separate groups within which extended credits may be donated and assigned The transceiver type The 10 Gbps ports always display unknown if attached The maximum transceiver speed The transceiver fibre type such as single mode multi mode copper The transceiver transmitter type such as longwave shortwave electrical The maximum transceiver transmission distance The company that manufactured the SFP The IEEE registered company ID 5 9 5 Managing Ports IX Configuring Ports QLOGIC ee Table 5 6 Port Information Data Window Entries Continued En
16. Using SANsurfer Switch Manager QLOGIC Starting SANsurfer Switch Manager S m Click the Start Application Without Specifying a Fabric radio button to open the SANsurfer Switch Manager window shown in Figure 2 2 W Click the Open Configuration Wizard radio button to open the Config Wizard to configure a switch add a new switch replace restore a switch or recover or edit an IP configuration of an existing switch sANsurfer Switch Manager 0 3 File Fabric View Help fat m A Add Open Save Refresh Events Help QLOGIC Switch Figure 2 2 SANsurfer Switch Manager Window 59097 02 B Em 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager po Exiting SANsurfer Switch Manager QLOGIC AA NY 24 Exiting SANsurfer Switch Manager To exit a SANsurfer Switch Manager application session open the File menu and select Exit If you have not yet defined an encryption key the Save Default Fabric View File dialog shown in Figure 2 3 prompts you to save the current fabric view as the default fabric view file Enter an encryption key in the Default Fabric File Encryption Key field Re enter the encryption key in the Re enter Encryption Key to Confirm field Click the OK button to save the current set of fabrics to the default fabric view file in the working directory Save Default Fabric Yiew File xi An ecryption key is required to encrypt information to be stored in a default fabric view file Default Fabric V
17. Zoning History Limits List Displays switch operational information Table A 28 describes the switch operational parameters Table A 28 Switch Operational Parameters FlashSize MBytes LogLevel MaxPorts NumberOfResets ReasonForLastReset ActivelmageVersion build date Parameter Description SymbolicName Descriptive name for the switch SwitchWWN Switch world wide name SwitchType Switch model BootVersion PROM boot version CreditPool Number of port buffer credits available to recipient ports DomainlD Switch domain ID FirstPortAddress FC address of switch port 0 Size of the flash memory in megabytes Event severity level used to record events in the event log Number of ports available on the switch Number of times the switch has been reset over its service life Action that caused the last reset Active firmware image version and build date 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Show Command I a Table A 28 Switch Operational Parameters Continued Parameter Description PendinglmageVersion build date Firmware image version and build date that is pending This image will become active at the next reset or power cycle ActiveConfiguration Name of the switch configuration that is in use AdminState Switch administrative state AdminModeActive Admin session status BeaconOnStatus Beacon status as set by the Set Beacon command OperationalStat
18. 59097 02 B XKX A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Reset Command TO radius Resets the RADIUS configuration to the default values as described in Table A 14 security Clears the security database and deactivates the active security set The security configuration value autosave and fabric binding remain unchanged services Resets the switch services configuration to the default values as described in Table A 15 snmp Resets the SNMP configuration settings to the factory default values Refer to Table A 13 for SNMP configuration default values switch Resets the switch without a power on self test This is the default This reset disrupts traffic and does the following m Activates the pending firmware W Closes all management sessions W Clears the event log To save the event log before resetting refer to the Set Log Command on page A 76 To reset the switch with a power on self test refer to the Hardreset Command on page A 34 To reset the switch without disrupting traffic refer to the Hotreset Command on page A 37 system Resets the system configuration settings to the factory default values as described in Table A 16 NOTE W Because this keyword changes network parameters the workstation could lose communication with the switch W This keyword does not affect installed license keys zoning Clears the zoning database and deactivates the active zone set The zoning configuration values auto
19. Address Trap 1 5 Port Trap 1 5 Severity Trap 1 5 Version Trap 1 5 Enabled ObjectlD AuthFailureTrap ProxyEnabled Trap 1 10 0 0 254 Traps 2 5 0 0 0 0 162 Warning 2 False 1 3 6 14 1 1663 1 1 1 1 23 SANbox 5600 1 3 6 1 4 1 1663 1 1 1 1 24 SANbox 5602 False True 59097 02 B A 51 A Command Line Interface Reset Command XX QLOGIC AA NY A 52 Enter the Show Setup Radius command to display RADIUS configuration values Table A 14 RADIUS Configuration Defaults Parameter Default Device AuthOrder Local UserAuthOrder Local TotalServers 1 DeviceAuthServer False UserAuthServer False Accounting Server False ServerlPAddress 10 0 0 1 ServerUDPPort 1812 Timeout 2 seconds Retries 0 SignPackets False Enter the Show Setup Services command to display switch service configuration values Table A 15 Services Configuration Defaults Parameter TelnetEnabled SSHEnabled GUIMgmtEnabled SSLMgmtEnabled EmbeddedGUlEnabled SNMPEnabled NTPEnabled CIMEnabled FTPEnabled MgmtServerEnabled True False True False True True False True True False Default 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC ls A Command Line Interface Reset Command Enter the Show Setup System command to display system configuration values Table A 16 System Configuration Defaulis Parameter Default Ethernet Network Discovery Ethernet Network IP Add
20. Discard Inactive Cancel Help Figure 3 16 Zoning Config Dialog 3 7 3 2 1 Interop Auto Save The Interop Auto Save parameter determines whether changes to the active zone set that a switch receives from other switches in the fabric will be saved to the zoning database on that switch Changes are saved when an updated zone set is activated Zoning changes are always saved to temporary memory However if Interop Auto Save is enabled the switch firmware saves changes to the active zone set in temporary memory and to the zoning database If Interop Auto Save is disabled changes to the active zone set are stored only in temporary memory which is cleared when the switch is reset NOTE Disabling the Interop Auto Save parameter can be useful to prevent the propagation of zoning information when experimenting with different zoning schemes However leaving the Interop Auto Save parameter disabled can disrupt device configurations should a switch have to be reset For this reason the Interop Auto Save parameter should be enabled in a production environment 59097 02 B 3 47 3 Managing Fabrics XX Zoning a Fabric QLOGIC E 3 73 22 Default Visibility Default visibility determines the level of communication that is permitted among ports devices when there is no active zone set The default visibility parameter can be set differently on each switch When default visibility is enabled ALL on a switch all ports device
21. Entries in the Event Browser shown in Figure 3 11 are formatted by severity time stamp source type and description The maximum number of entries allowed in the Event Browser is 10 000 The maximum number of entries allowed on a switch is 1200 Once the maximum is reached the event list wraps and the oldest events are discarded and replaced with the new events Event entries from the switch use the switch time stamp while event entries generated by the application have a workstation time stamp You can filter sort and export the contents of the Event Browser to a file The Event Browser begins recording when enabled and SANsurfer Switch Manager is running If the Event Browser is enabled using the Preferences dialog the next time SANsurfer Switch Manager is started all events from the switch log will be displayed If the Event Browser is disabled when SANsurfer Switch Manager is started and later enabled only those events from the time the Event Browser was enabled and forward will be displayed To display the Event Browser open the Fabric menu and select Show Event Browser or click the Events button on the tool bar If the Show Event Browser selection or the Events button is grayed out you must first enable the Events Browser preference Refer to Setting SANsurfer Switch Manager Preferences on page 2 16 Column Sorting ovo Naa fg Timestamp jr Source ili ype Description Tue May 18 10 11 24 CDT 200 0 20 92 206 Unkno
22. Fox Snmp Properties World Wide Name 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 82 21 First Port Address 40000 Operational State online Firmware Version 44 1 0 0 25 Symbolic Name unknown MAC Address 00 c0 dd 00 92 20 SNMP Configuration SNMP Enabled CJ SNMP Proxy Contact Contact2 Location Location 2 Read Community Authentication Trap True Trap Community Write Community SNMP Trap Configuration vi Trap 1 Enabled Trap Version v2 Trap Severity Mark Trap Address 1 4 1 1 Trap Port 11 trap1 Trap2 Trap3 Trap4 Traps Close Help Figure 4 13 SNMP Properties Dialog 4 32 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 4 Managing Switches Configuring a Switch ls 4 7 7 1 SNMP Configuration The SNMP configuration defines how authentication traps are managed Table 4 7 describes the SNMP configuration parameters The illegal characters for the user defined fields are the pound sign semi colon and comma Table 4 7 SNMP Configuration Parameters Parameter Description SNMP Enabled Enables or disables SNMP communication with other switches in the fabric Contact Specifies the name up to 64 characters of the person who is to be contacted to respond to trap events The default is undefined Read Commu Read community password up to 32 characters that authorizes an nity SNMP agent to read information from the switch This is a write only field The value on the switch and t
23. In Order Delivery A feature that requires that frames be received in the same order in which they were sent Input Power LED A chassis LED that indicates that the switch logic circuitry is receiving proper DC voltages Inter Switch Link The connection between two switches using E Ports IP Internet Protocol LIP Loop Initialization Primitive sequence Logged in LED A port LED that indicates device login or loop initialization status Maintenance Button Formerly known as the Force PROM button Momentary button on the switch used to reset the switch or place the switch in maintenance mode Maintenance Mode Formerly known as force PROM mode Maintenance mode sets the IP address to 10 0 0 1 and provides access to the switch for maintenance purposes Management Information Base A set of guidelines and definitions for SNMP functions Management Workstation PC workstation that manages the fabric through the fabric management switch 59097 02 B Mesh Topology A fabric in which each chassis has at least one port directly connected to each other chassis in the fabric MIB Management Information Base Multistage Topology A fabric in which two or more edge switches connect to one or more core switches NL_Port Node Loop Port A Fibre Channel device port that supports arbitrated loop protocol N_Port Node Port A Fibre Channel device port in a point to point or fabric connection Pending
24. Secondary Secret Generate ox canei Hop Figure 3 7 Create a Security Group Member Dialog The conventions for ISL security group members are listed below WB You can enter member world wide name WWN which must be 16 hex characters or 23 characters with valid WWN format xX XX XxX XX XX XX XX XX m The authentication choices are None and Chap ul The Secret field is disabled if authentication is set to None If authentication is Chap the Secret field is enabled B The Generate button is only enabled when authentication is set to Chap B Valid binding entries are between 0 to 239 3 13 3 Managing Fabrics XX Securing a Fabric QLOGIC AA nn The conventions for Port security group members are listed below B You can enter member world wide name WWN which must be 16 hex characters or 23 characters with valid WWN format xX XX XxX XX XX XX XX XX WB The authentication choices are None and Chap E The Secret field is disabled if authentication is set to None If authentication is Chap the Secret field is enabled B The Generate button is only enabled when authentication is set to Chap The conventions for MS security group members are listed below WB You can enter member world wide name WWN which must be 16 hex characters or 23 characters with valid WWN format xX XX XxX XX XX XX XX XX B The CT common transport authentication choices are None MD5 and SHA 1
25. Switch Stacks The stack dialogs are essentially the same as their corresponding switch dialogs except for the Select Switch for Initial Configuration pull down menu is added to each dialog The stack dialogs display the information for the switch selected in the Select Switch for Initial Configuration pull down menu Choose another switch in the pull down menu to display information for that switch The switch configuration displayed is the configuration that will be applied to all other switches in the stack after you click the OK button The following operations are available to configure the stack as a single entity 59097 02 B 4 35 4 Managing Switches XX Managing Switch Stacks QLOGIC ee W Date time and Network Time Protocol NTP settings Refer to Setting the Date Time and Enabling NTP Client on page 4 16 for more information W Firmware load and activation Refer to Installing Firmware on page 4 44 for more information W Switch reset Refer to Resetting a Switch on page 4 16 for more information B Edit zoning configuration Refer to Configuring the Zoning Database on page 3 47 for more information B Editing user accounts Refer to Managing User Accounts on page 4 2 for more information B SNMP configuration Refer to SNMP Configuration on page 4 33 for more information W Syslog configuration Refer to Syslog on page 4 36 for more information Additional stack operations include W X R
26. True SSHEnabled True False False GUIMgmt Enabled True False True SSLMgmtEnabled True False False EmbeddedGUIEnabled True False True SNMPEnabled True False True NTPEnabled True False False CIMEnabled True False True FTPEnabled True False True Mgmt ServerEnabled True False True Do you want to save and activate this services setup y n n 59097 02 B A 89 A Command Line Interface Set Setup Command XX QLOGIC AA NN The following is an example of the Set Setup SNMP command SANbox xxxx 5 admin start SANbox xxxx admin 5 set setup snmp A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or TOT and the ENTER key to do so Trap Severity Options unknown emergency alert critical error warning notify info debug mark SNMPEnabled True False True Contact string max 64 chars lt sysContact undefined Location string max 64 chars sysLocation undefined TraplAddress dot notated IP Address 10 20 71 15 TraplPort decimal value 162 TraplSeverity see allowed options above warning TraplVersion 1 2 2 TraplEnabled True False False Trap2Address dot notated IP Address 0 0 0 0 Trap2Port decimal value 162 Trap2Severity see allowed options above warning Trap2Version 1 2
27. W o start SANsurfer Switch Manager as a standalone application do the following 1 Start the SANsurfer Switch Manager using one of the following methods C For Windows double click the SANsurfer Switch Manager shortcut or select SANsurfer Switch Manager from Start menu depending on how you installed the SANsurfer Switch Manager application From a command line you can enter the SANsurfer Switch Manager command install directory SANsurfer Switch Manager exe C For Linux Solaris or Mac OS X enter the SANsurfer Switch Manager command install directory SANsurfer Switch Manager 2 Inthe Initial Start dialog click the Open Configuration Wizard button When you power up the switch the Configuration Wizard will recognize the switch and lead you through the configuration process W o start SANsurfer Switch Manager from SANsurfer Management Suite do the following 1 Start the SANsurfer Management Suite application using one of the following methods CQ For Windows double click the SANsurfer shortcut or select SANsurfer from Start menu depending on how you installed the SANsurfer application From a command line enter the following command install directory NSANsurfer exe L For Linux or Solaris enter the SANsurfer command lt install_directory gt SANsurfer 2 From the SANsurfer Management Suite home page click the SANsurfer Switch Manager button 59097 02 B 2 9 2 Using SANsurfer Switch
28. XX QLOGIC 5 Managing Ports Testing Ports ls 5 5 Testing Ports 59097 02 B The port loopback tests verify correct port operation by sending a frame out through the loop and then verifying that the frame received matches the frame that was sent Only one port can be tested at a time for each type of test The Port Loopback Test dialog shown in Figure 5 4 presents the following loopback tests Symbolic Name 5141 Test Details Test Selection Internal loopback test can be performed only on a port set z See Pott vj 1 Ka to the diagnostic state Select Test Internal loopback tests all the c HS pa a hardware on the port Internal External Online Test Results Test parameters Frame Count 100 Test Status Inactive Frame Size 40 292 256 Test Pattern Frames Sent Use Default Pattern O User Defined Pattern hex Failure Count Terminate Test Upon Error Figure 5 4 Port Loopback Test Dialog WB SerDes level Internal The SerDes level test verifies port circuitry The SerDes level test sends a test frame from the ASIC through the SerDes chip and back to the ASIC for the selected ports The port passes the test if the frame that was sent by the ASIC matches the test frame that was received This test requires that the port be in diagnostics mode and therefore disrupts communication m SFP level External The SFP level test verifies port circuitry The SFP level test
29. deactivate delete security set groups security set list remove security set group rename security set old security set new activate security set Activates the security set given by security set This keyword deactivates the active security set Close the Security Edit session using the Security Save or Security Cancel command before using this keyword active Displays the name of the active security set This keyword is available to without an Admin session add security set group list Adds one or more groups given by group list to the security set given by security set Use a lt space gt to delimit multiple group names in group list A security set can have a maximum of three groups with no more than one group of each group type copy security set source security set destination Creates a new security set named security set destination and copies into it the membership from the security set given by security set source 59097 02 B XKX A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Securityset Command ls create security set Creates the security set with the name given by security set A security set name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters Valid characters are 0 9 A Z a z and The security database supports a maximum of 4 security sets deaciivate Deactivates the active security set Close the Security Edit session before using this keyword delete
30. mCHXLL The following is an example of the Show Log command SANbox xxxx 5 show log date time ID 327 day month E AO GET DOMAIN 328 day month 329 day month 330 day month 331 day month 332 day month len 0x30 333 day month 334 day month 335 day month 336 day month Oper UserPort 0 date time date time date time date time date time date time date time date time date time year I Eport Port 0 8 Eport State year I Eport year I Eport year I Eport year I Eport year I Eport year I Eport year I Eport year I Eport year I Eport 8 EpConnState Connected Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port 0 8 FSPF PortUp state 0 0 8 Sending init hello 0 8 Processing EFP oxid 0x8 0 8 Eport State E A2 IDLE 0 8 EFP WWN 0x100000c0dd00b845 0 8 Sending LSU oxid 0xc type 1 0 8 Send Zone Merge Request 0 8 LSDB Xchg timer set 0 8 Setting attribute A 114 59097 02 B XX LOGIC A Command Line Interface Show Perf Command o 9 97 aaa Show Perf Command Authority Syntax Keywords 59097 02 B Displays port performance in frames second and bytes second If you omit the keyword the command displays data transmitted out data received in and total data transmitted and received in frames second and bytes per second None show perf byte port number inbyte
31. which are described in Table A 29 This keyword does not require an Admin session Table A 29 Zoning Database Limits Limit Description MaxZoneSets Maximum number of zone sets 256 MaxZones Maximum number of zones 2000 MaxAliases Maximum number of aliases 2500 MaxTotalMembers Maximum number of zone and alias members 10000 that can be stored in the switch s zoning database MaxZonesInZoneSets Maximum number of zones that are components of zone sets 2000 excluding those in the orphan zone set that can be stored in the switch s zoning database Each instance of a zone in a zone set counts toward this maxi mum MaxMembersPerZone Maximum number of members in a zone 2000 MaxMembersPerAlias Maximum number of members in an alias 2000 list Lists all zoning definitions This keyword does not require an Admin session restore Reverts the changes to the zoning database that have been made during the current Zoning Edit session since the last Zoning Save command was entered 59097 02 B A 139 A Command Line Interface XX Zoning Command QLOGIC AA X m w Cq Fb Examples save Saves changes made during the current Zoning Edit session The system informs you that the zone set must be activated to implement any changes This does not apply if you entered the Zoning Clear command during the Zoning Edit session The following is an example of the Zoning Edit command SANbox xxxx 5 admin
32. 000 9 E Zone zone 000 000 Soft E ww 1000000000000000 Active Zoneset AE ww 1000000000000001 Data Window AE ww 1000000000000002 E ww 1000000000000003 Devices Active Zoneset l Switch Link Figure 3 13 Active Zone Set Data Window 59097 02 B 3 35 3 Managing Fabrics XX Working with Device Information and Nicknames QLOGIC AA NY 3 5 5 Link Data Window The Link data window displays information about all switch links in the fabric or selected links This information includes the switch name the port number at the end of each link and the link status icons To open the Link data window click the Link tab below the data window in the topology display 3 6 Working with Device Information and Nicknames SANsurfer Switch Manager enables you to do the following m Display detailed device information m Export device information to a file m Manage device port nicknames 3 6 1 Displaying Detailed Device Information In addition to the information that is available in the Devices data window you can click the i in the Details column to display more information as shown in Figure 3 14 amp Detailed Device Display Identifying Device Information r Supplemental Information Port WWN 21 00 00 04 cf 92 b6 d9 Current Speed Data Unavailable Nickname defined Supported Speeds Data Unavailable Switch Sw 194 Max Payload Data Unavailable Max Frame Size Data Unavailable Port Port 3
33. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 37M 58 0 0 0 0 8 37M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 36M 58 0 0 0 0 8 36M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 35M 58 0 0 0 0 a 35M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 37M 58 0 0 0 0 8 37M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 36M 58 0 0 0 0 7 36M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 137M 58 0 0 0 0 8 37M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 36M 58 0 0 0 0 8 36M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 36M 58 0 0 0 0 7 36M 59097 02 B e A Command Line Interface XX Show Setup Command QLOGIC EN CCG 9 9 V Show Setup Command Authority Syntax Keywords Examples A 118 Displays the current SNMP and system settings None show setup mfg radius services snmp system mfg Displays manufacturing information about the switch radius Displays RADIUS server information services Displays switch service status information snmp Displays the current SNMP settings system Displays the current system settings The following is an example of the Show Setup Mfg command SANbox xxxx gt show setup mfg Manufacturing Information BrandName QLogic BuildDate Unknown PartNumber SANbox 5602 SerialNumber FAM0331000011 LicensedPorts 20 MACAddress 00 c0 dd 02r00 17 PlanarPartNumber Unknown SwitchSymbolicName SANbox XXXX SwitchWWN 10 00 00 c0 dd 02 cc 16 SystemDescription SANbox 5602 FC Switch SystemObjectID 1 956 1 4 1 1602 1 1 1 1 24 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Show Setup Command aaa The following is an example of the Show Setup Service
34. 11 3 Fabric Tree The fabric tree lists the managed fabrics and their switches as shown in Figure 2 9 The window width can be adjusted by clicking and dragging the moveable window border An entry handle located to the left of an entry in the tree indicates that the entry can be expanded or collapsed Click this handle or double click the entry to expand or collapse a fabric tree entry A fabric entry expands to show its member switches KA SANsurfer Switch Manager File Fabric Switch Wizards View Help Fabric Fi a amp m Entry Add Open Save Refresh Events Help itch Entry Handle Ni Moveable Em Window Border Switch Em SwW2 Ly Entries ews SW2 Normal oouo anoo Oooo ECB Figure 2 9 Fabric Tree Each fabric tree entry has a small icon next to it that uses color to indicate operational status B A green icon indicates normal operation B A yellow icon indicates that a switch is operational but may require attention to maintain maximum performance m A red icon indicates a potential failure or non operational state as when the switch is offline ul A blue icon indicates that a switch is unknown unreachable or unmanageable If the status of the fabric is not normal the fabric icon in the fabric tree will indicate the reason for the abnormal status The same message is provided when you rest the mouse over the fabric icon in the fabric tree The fabric tree provides access to the topolog
35. 13 Active Zone Set Data Window 00 ee 3 35 3 14 Detailed Devices Display Dialog 0002 ee ee 3 36 3 15 Edt Zoning Dialog co ac ects Ala Us BEN eral OT RECON eek 3 44 3 16 Zoning Contig Dialog NA dh hw ee de NLNG ea he eR WR a See 3 47 Page x 59097 02 B po SANbox 5600 Series QLOGIC Switch Management User s Guide ls 4 1 User Account Administration Dialog Add Account 0 00s 4 2 User Account Administration Dialog Remove Account 4 3 User Account Administration Dialog Change Password 4 4 User Account Administration Dialog Modify Account 4 5 Faceplate Display Switch Information liliis 4 6 Configured Zonesets Data Window 00 eee eee 4 7 Port Threshold Alarm Configuration Dialog silere 4 8 Port Threshold Alarm Example 200 e eee eee eee eee 4 9 switch Properties Dialog o hele cunts nna a Meee Peet ER ada bes 4 10 Advanced Switch Properties Dialog lille 4 11 System Services Dial g sie beaded bad NA BA KU seed EA RAE ERA EE 12 Network Properties Dialog s 222803 BANAT TRA EE Ere he BA rug 4 13 SNMP Properties Dialog 2 oue rv cxx ieee o bete eh eee ba BTA COSWIIGh StaCKS na er epa o ROC RU Ree P ERE tale Rea ek Dee ee ate eee ok 4 15 Syslog Dialga magmana eis erem Gen ER eae NO eke wed eee ee Ka 4 16 Restore Dialogs Full and Selective 0
36. 2e cw bamba hana e Rot ders A 46 Security Command AA A 54 Securityset Command 23 dos ERR XR RR e Rd A 58 Sel COMMANG 22e ene LETRAS Pa ANAKAN RA PER lang A 61 Set Config Command aaa tena oe S Shake we DAG RN E ES A 64 Set Log Command na paa EERTERXG e SER RES ER A 76 Set Port Command ser ee she oU rr ia a OR DE eee A 80 Set Setup Command ees A 82 Show Command 02 424 doce Sia carte S heehee G KATE a NG A 92 Show Config COIiIfiaritde 25 5 nG KG GEL BANANA A OO IR P PEE eR dea A 107 Show bog Command cuv RR HPV ER OLE we See a eas NG A 111 Page ix SANbox 5600 Series XKX Switch Management User s Guide QLOGIC ee Show Perf Command 0 00 e eee eee A 115 Show Setup Command a a ma BNG NG ka hn ed A 118 Shutdown COMMANG ue sioe aT de er eae swe ae Os AG A 122 Test Command 5c ez vs tlhe Ure SCR ER oe aa wale DN nd A 123 Uptime Command a cu sex eer e e Daan eR EN eR A 126 User Command uot oot md areae d dnas NA Metin d Ee ori es A 127 Whoani Command ex Na AG KLANG RR ERE S knee oes A 130 Zong Gommarnd 6223623 d ie EE Rd t ERU Edu eat A 131 Zoneset Command ns 29a AA e dite ma tet NEU a A 135 ZONING COMMANG 2 2 vea pb ER IE RR xis E RET A 138 Glossary Index List of Figures Figure Page 2 1 Initial Startup Dialoge o x DERE patentee LADLAD REEL xA Med SES 2 10 2 2 SANsurfer Switch Manager Window eese 2 11 2 3 Save Default Fabric View File Dialog lise 2 12 2 4 Load Default Fa
37. 4 5 Timeout Values v eee EXC E ac IR Ex A Ea e Yo tc n e ape odes 4 6 IP Configuration Paratmielersa 3 tis x x qx ocaco x e ORE t o e CRI RE Re oa Ce 4 7 SNMP Configuration Parameters eren 4 8 SNMP Trap Configuration Parameters 000 cece eee ee eee 59097 02 B Page 2 2 2 21 3 29 3 31 3 34 3 45 4 2 4 8 4 17 4 20 4 26 4 30 4 33 4 34 Page xi SANbox 5600 Series Switch Management User s Guide 4 9 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9 A 10 A 11 A 12 A 13 A 14 A 15 A 16 A 17 A 18 A 19 A 20 A 21 A 22 A 23 A 24 A 25 A 26 A 27 A 28 A 29 XX LOGIC aaa BB Factory Default Configuration Settings lisse 4 40 Port TYPES cT EETTP 5 2 Port Operational Sales aa png deere DA gate RE RER ERE ER pde 5 3 Port SDeedS eran hoe eR SLANG NANG KAPAG tees BEEN equis pere ieu 5 3 Port Transceiver Media View eee 5 4 Port Statistics Data Window Entries aa b RR RR 5 5 Port Information Data Window Entries llle 5 8 Port Administrative States ss cun ise iG er Suy RU ERREUR ds 5 11 Porm Speeds kaaa dos equus en eb v I eR a Ra tae EPP oS uai 5 12 PORT pes ng side a tcp or E das BAG ADAM AGE pa KGG an NA Ba pa AA Ab a M E 5 13 Command Line Completions 20323404434 mer ERES AME edad SE RESTER A 6 Commands Listed by Authority Level else A 7 CIM Listener Configuration Parameters ll
38. A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Set Port Command I aaa Auto The port speed is automatically detected This applies only to ports 0 15 state state Specifies one of the following administrative states for the specified port Online Places the port online This activates and prepares the port to send data Offline Places the port offline This prevents the port from receiving signal and accepting a device login Diagnostics Prepares the port for testing This prepares the port for testing and prevents the port from accepting a device login Down Disables the port by removing power from the port lasers 59097 02 B A 81 A Command Line Interface XX Set Setup Command QLOGIC ee Set Setup Command Manages configuration settings for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS servers switch services SNMP and system configurations Authority Admin session Syntax set setup radius services snmp system Keywords radius Prompts you in a line by line fashion to configure RADIUS servers for user account and device authentication Table A 23 describes the RADIUS server configuration fields Table A 23 RADIUS Service Settings Entry Description DeviceAuthOrder Authenticator priority for devices m Local Authenticate devices using only the local security database This is the default m Radius Authenticate devices using only the security database on the RADIUS server W RadiusLocal Auth
39. A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the attributes for the server being processed press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so If you wish to terminate the configuration process completely press qq or QO and the ENTER key to so do DeviceAuthOrder 1 Local 2 Radius 3 RadiusLocal Local UserAuthOrder 1 Local 2 Radius 3 RadiusLocal Local TotalServers decimal value 0 5 1 Server 1 ServerIPAddress dot notated IP Address 10 20 11 8 ServerUDPPort decimal value 1812 DeviceAuthServer True False True UserAuthServer True False True AccountingServer True False False Timeout decimal value 10 30 secs 10 Retries decimal value 1 3 O None 0 SignPackets True False False Secret 32 hex or 16 ASCII char value BERER ERS Do you want to save and activate this radius setup y n n The following is an example of the Set Setup Services command SANbox xxxx admin gt set setup services A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Warning If services are disabled the connection to the switch may be lost TelnetEnabled True False
40. Admin session remove zone member list Removes the ports devices given by member_list from the zone given by zone Use a lt space gt to delimit aliases and ports devices in member_list member_list can have any of the following formats B X Domain ID and port number pair Domain ID Port Number Domain IDs can be 1 239 port numbers can be 0 255 W 6 character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address hex W 16 character hexadecimal worldwide port name WWPN with the format XXIXXIXXIXXIXXIXXIXXIXX gl Alias name rename zone old zone new Renames the zone given by zone old to the zone given by zone new type zone zone type Specifies the zone type given by zone type to be assigned to the zone name given by zone If you omit the zone type the system displays the zone type for the zone given by zone zone type can be one of the following Soft Name server zone hardACL Access control list hard zone This keyword is case sensitive zonesets zone Displays all zone sets of which the zone given by zone is a component This keyword does not require an Admin session A 132 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Zone Command ls Examples The following is an example of the Zone List command SANbox xxxx 5 zone list wwn b0241f zone set 1 wwn 23bd31 zone set 1 wwn 221416 zone set 1 wwn 2215c3 zone set 1 wwn 0160ed zone set 1 wwn c001b0 zone set
41. Config Command QLOGIC ENENNNNNNNNNM V O aw Table A 18 Set Config Port Parameters Continued Parameter Description AutoPerfTuning Automatic performance tuning for FL Ports only The default is True W f AutoPerfTuning is enabled True and the port is an FL Port MFSEnable is automatically enabled LCFEn able and VIEnable are overridden to False W f AutoPerfTuning is disabled False MFSEnable LCFEnable and VIEnable retain their original values LCFEnable Link control frame preference routing This parameter appears only if AutoPerfTuning is False Enables True or disables False preferred routing of frames with R_CTL 1100 Class 2 responses The default is False Enabling LCFEnable will disable MFSEnable MFSEnable Multi Frame Sequence bundling This parameter appears only if AutoPerfTuning is False Prevents True or allows False the interleaving of frames in a sequence The default is False Enabling MFSEnable disables LCFEnable and VIEnable VIEnable Virtual Interface VI preference routing This parameter appears only if AutoPerfTuning is False Enables True or disables False VI preference routing The default is False Enabling VIEnable will disable MF SEnable MSEnable Management server enable Enables True or disables False management server on this port The default is True NoClose Loop circuit closure prevention Enables True or disables 1 2 4 Gbps ports only False the lo
42. D TOV time out receiving a reject frame or receiving a frame on an offline port Number of class 3 words received by this port Number of class 3 words transmitted by this port Number of invalid transmission words detected during decod ing Decoding is from the 10 bit characters and special K char acters Number of E Port logins Number of class 2 and class 3 fabric busy F BSY frames generated by this port in response to incoming frames This usually indicates a busy condition on the fabric or N port that is preventing delivery of this frame Number of times a frame is received and all the switch ports receive buffers are full The normal Fabric Login exchange of flow control credit should prevent this from occurring The frame will be discarded Number of frames from devices that have been rejected Frames can be rejected for any of a large number of reasons Number of invalid Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC frames detected Number of address identifier S ID D ID errors AL PA equals non zero AL PA found on F Port Number of optical link failures detected by this port A link fail ure is a loss of synchronization or by loss of signal while not in the offline state A loss of signal causes the switch to attempt to re establish the link If the link is not re established a link failure is counted A link reset is performed after a link failure Number of F7 AL PSLIPs or AL PD vendor specific resets performed
43. Domain 100 0x64 WWN 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 ba 68 Domain 101 0x65 WWN 10 00 00 60 df 22 2e 06 Domain 102 0x66 WWN 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 90 ef Domain 103 0x67 WWN 10 00 00 60 69 50 0b 6c Domain 104 0x68 WWN 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 b8 b7 The following is an example of the Show Fabric command SANbox xxxx gt show fabric Domain WWN Enet IP Addr FC IP Addr SymbolicName 16 0x10 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 77 81 10 20 68 11 0 0 0 0 gui sbl 11 17 0x11 10 00 00 cO dd 00 6a 2d 10 20 68 12 0 0 0 0 sw12 18 0x12 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 c3 04 10 20 68 160 0 0 0 0 sw 160 19 0x13 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 bc 56 10 20 68 108 0 50 20 0 Sb2 108 The following is an example of the Show FDMI command SANbox xxxx 5 show fdmi HBA ID PortID Manufacturer Model Ports 21 01 00 e0 8b 27 aa bc 610000 QLogic Corporation OLA2342 2 21 00 00 00 ca 25 9b 96 180100 QLogic Corporation QL2330 2 A 100 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Show Command I The following is an example of the Show FDMI WWN command SANbox xxxx 5 show fdmi 21 00 00 e0 8b 09 3b 17 FDMI Information Manufacturer QLogic Corporation SerialNumber 04202 Model QLA2342 ModelDescription QLogic QLA2342 PCI Fibre Channel Adapter PortID 610000 NodeWWN 20 00 00 60 8b 07 aa bc HardwareVersion FC5010409 10 DriverVersion 8 2 3 10 Beta 2 W2K VI OptionRomVersion 1 21 FirmwareVersion D3 02 La OperatingSystem SunOS 5 8 MaximumCTPayload 2040 NumberOfPorts 1 Port 21 01 00 e
44. EN pU LV A 4 Commands A 6 The command syntax is as follows command keyword keyword value keyword value1 value2 The Command is followed by one or more keywords Consider the following rules and conventions E Commands and keywords are case insensitive W Required keyword values appear in standard font value Optional values are shomn in italics value M Underlined portions of the keyword in the command format indicate the abbreviated form that can be used For example the Delete keyword can be abbreviated Del The command line completion feature makes entering and repeating commands easier Table A 1 describes the command line completion keystrokes Table A 1 Command Line Completion Keystroke Effect Tab Completes the command line Enter at least one character and press the tab key to complete the command line If more than one possibility exists press the Tab key again to display all possibilities Up Arrow Scrolls backward through the list of previously entered commands Down Arrow Scrolls forward through the list of previously entered commands Control A Moves the cursor to the beginning of the command line Control E Moves the cursor to the end of the command line The command set performs monitoring and configuration tasks Commands related to monitoring tasks are available to all account names Commands related to configuration tasks are available only within an admin
45. Firmware The firmware image that will be activated upon the next switch reset POST Power On Self Test Power On Self Test POST Diagnostics that the switch chassis performs at start up Principal Switch The switch in the fabric that manages domain ID assignments SANsurfer Switch Manager Switch management application SFP Small Form Factor Pluggable Glossary 3 SANbox 5600 Series Switch Management User s Guide XX QLOGIC AA NN Small Form Factor Pluggable A transceiver device smaller than a GigaBit Interface Converter that plugs into the Fibre Channel port SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Soft Zone Soft zoning divides the fabric for purposes of controlling discovery Members of the same soft zone automatically discover and communicate freely with all other members of the same zone Target A storage device that responds to an initiator device User Account An object stored on a switch that consists of an account name password authority level and expiration date VCCI Voluntary Control Council for Interference World Wide Name WWN A unique 64 bit address assigned to a device by the device manufacturer WWN World Wide Name Zone A set of ports or devices grouped together to control the exchange of information Zone Set A set of zones grouped together The active zone set defines the zoning for a fabric Glossary 4 Zoning Database The set of zone
46. Manager Workstation Requirements 02 eee ee Installing the Management Application 0 0 c eee eee eee SANsurfer Switch Manager a SANsurfer Management Suite eee SMS Installation for Windows 0 eee eee SMS Installation for Linux liliis SMS Installation for Solaris 0 20000 e eee eee Starting SANsurfer Switch Manager eee eee eee Exiting SANsurfer Switch Manager cece eee eee eee Uninstalling SANsurfer Switch Manager cece eee eee SIs Unsa s e sto AG Maha maaga CAG noo laser ed d BA MUN cng Standalone Uninstall 32220060 NALANG ede BAKLA BARA Bab haa Changing the Encryption Key for the Default Fabric View File Saving and Opening Fabric View Files 0 00000 eee eee Setting SANsurfer Switch Manager Preferences Using Online Help 345 scott rad ater Basa bn a Ghana akan a E cu Viewing Software Version and Copyright Information SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface 0a Menu Bari AL ART BS NAA ENG Topology Display Menu 02 eee Faceplate Display Menu cece eee eee Shortcut KEYS s s Re RAE E KAG a ee eee WOOU BARS e mii ERROR AA EEA ede te Be ROE Fabric Treek I od en eect RE EAR KA RA Graphic Window 2b RE ERR E hex BES a IRE RE habas Data Window and Tabs x mat ere eom o SR Wie Oe tel 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 4 2 6
47. Secret area enter an authentication password to be assigned that member Or you can click the Generate Secret button to randomly generate a secret In the Binding field ISL groups only enter the domain ID 1 239 for the switch for the ISL group member The WWN of the switch must be at the entered domain ID when attempting to enter the fabric otherwise it will become isolated Click the OK button to save the changes 3 15 3 Managing Fabrics XX Securing a Fabric QLOGIC AA NN 3 2 4 7 Editing the Security Configuration on a Switch To edit a security configuration on the switch do the following 1 Onthe faceplate display click the Security button on the toolbar or open the Security menu and select Edit Security to open the Edit Security dialog By default the security configuration on the switch is displayed in the Edit Security dialog To edit a security configuration saved to a file open the File menu and select Open File or press Ctrl o letter 0 to open the Open dialog Browse for and select the security file and click the Open button to display the security file in the Edit Security dialog 2 Select the security item to edit in the graphic window and choose one of the following B Rename a Security Set or Group Open the Edit menu and select a Rename option In the Rename dialog enter a new name and click the OK button to save the changes W Edit Security Group Member Open the Edit menu and se
48. Switches controlled by an Ethernet Internet Protocol have a colored Ethernet icon displayed on the right side of the switch A green Ethernet icon indicates normal operation yellow indicates a condition that may require attention to maintain maximum performance and red indicates a potential failure Table 3 1 shows the different switch icons and their meanings Table 3 1 Topology Display Switch and Status Icons Switch Icon Description SANbox 5600 Series Switch W Normal operation Green Warning operational with errors Yellow L E Critical potential failure Red L Unknown communication status unknown unreach able or unmanageable Blue Fabric Management Switch Hoe a W Ethernet connection normal Green DONO DOOD auam augu COCO LLL m Ethernet connection warning Yellow W Ethernet connection critical Red Pa APAN Qi Switch is not manageable with this version of SANsurfer Switch Manager Use the management application that was shipped with this switch 59097 02 B 3 29 3 Managing Fabrics XX Displaying Fabric Information QLOGIC ee 3 5 2 Displaying the Event Browser 3 30 The Event Browser displays a list of events generated by the switches in the fabric and the SANsurfer Switch Manager application Events that are generated by the SANsurfer Switch Manager application are not saved on the switch but can be saved to a file during the SANsurfer Switch Manager session
49. Switches in the Display 59097 02 B You can arrange individual switch icons in the topology display or allow SANsurfer Switch Manager to arrange all switch icons for you WB To move an individual switch icon click and drag the icon to another location in the graphic window Links stretch or contract to remain connected B To arrange all switch icons in the topology display automatically open the View menu and select Layout Topology By default the Toggle Auto Layout box in the View menu is checked which causes SANsurfer Switch Manager to arrange the icons when you select Layout Topology You can save a custom arrangement or layout and restore that layout during a SANsurfer Switch Manager session Begin by arranging the icons then open the View menu and select Remember Layout To restore the saved layout open the View menu uncheck the Toggle Auto Layout box and select Layout Topology 2 25 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager XKX Using the Topology Display QLOGIC ee 2 12 2 3 Opening the Faceplate and Topology Display Popup Menus The topology display shows all switches that are able to communicate and all connections between switches The faceplate display shows the front of a single switch and its ports Menu options vary with each type of popup menu B To open the fabric popup menu in the topology display right click the graphic window background m To open the switch popup menu in the topology display right c
50. Ta Source Type Description me cue te Figure 3 12 Filter Events Dialog 3 32 59097 02 B po 3 Managing Fabrics QLOGIC Displaying Fabric Information I aaa 3 5 2 2 Sorting the Event Browser Sorting the Event Browser enables you to display the events in alphanumeric order based on the event severity timestamp source type or description Initially the Event Browser is sorted in ascending order by timestamp To sort the Event Browser click the Severity Timestamp Source Type or Description column buttons You can also open the Sort menu and select By Severity By Timestamp By Source By Type or By Description Successive sort operations of the same type alternate between ascending and descending order 3 5 2 3 Saving the Event Browser to a File You can save the displayed Event Browser entries to a file Filtering affects the save operation because only displayed events are saved To save the Event Browser to a file do the following 1 Filter and sort the Event Browser to obtain the desired display 2 Open the File menu and select Save As 3 Select a folder and enter a file name in which to save the event log and click the Save button The file can be saved in XML CSV or text format XML files can be opened with an internet browser or text editor CSV files can be opened with most spreadsheet applications 59097 02 B 3 33 3 Managing Fabrics XX Displaying
51. TrapbEnabled False ObjectID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1663 1 1 1 1 24 AuthFailureTrap True ProxyEnabled True A 120 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Show Setup Command o 9 9 7 aaa The following is an example of the Show Setup System command SANbox xxxx 5 show setup system System Information EthONetworkDiscovery Static EthONetworkAddress 10 20 11 32 EthONetworkMask 2554255 252 0 Eth0GatewayAddress 10 20 8 254 AdminTimeout 30 InactivityTimeout 0 LocalLogEnabled True RemoteLogEnabled False RemoteLogHostAddress 10 0 0 254 NTPClientEnabled True NTPServerAddress 51 682 85 102 EmbeddedGUIEnabled True 59097 02 B me A Command Line Interface XX Shutdown Command QLOGIC AA NN Shutdown Command Terminates all data transfers on the switch at convenient points and closes the Telnet session Always power cycle the switch after entering this command Authority Admin session Syntax shutdown Notes Always use this command to perform an orderly shut down before removing power from the switch When the shutdown is complete the Heartbeat LED is extinguished A 122 59097 02 B XX LOGIC A Command Line Interface Test Command ls Test Command Authority Syntax Keywords 59097 02 B Tests ports using internal SerDes level external transceiver and online loopback tests Internal and external tests require that the port be placed in diagnostic mode Refer to the Set Com
52. a user account s password Admin account name and an admin session to change another account s password You can change you own password without an Admin session passwd account name account name The user account name To change the password for an account name other than your own you must open an admin session with the account name Admin If you omit account name you will be prompted to change the password for the current account name The following is an example of the Passwd command SANbox xxxx admin 5 passwd user2 Press q and the ENTER key to abort this command account OLD password Qo X ck ke e KKK account NEW password 8 20 chars ig ck ANGAT EN please confirm account NEW password password has been changed A 42 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface LOGIC Ping Command TT AP Ping Command Initiates an attempt to communicate with another switch over an Ethernet network and reports the result Authority None Syntax ping ip_address Keywords ip address The IP address of the switch to query Broadcast IP addresses such as 255 255 255 255 are not valid Examples The following is an example of a successful Ping command SANbox xxxx 5 ping 10 20 11 57 Ping command issued Waiting for response SANbox xxxx 5 Response successfully received from 10 20 11 57 This following is an example of an unsuccessful Ping command SANbox xxxx 5 ping 10 20 10 100 Ping c
53. activate a zone set to apply its zoning definitions to the fabric Only one zone set can be active at one time When you activate a zone set the switch distributes that zone set to the temporary zoning database on every switch in the fabric The purpose of the deactivate function is to suspend all fabric zoning which results in free communication fabric wide or no communication depending on the default visibility setting Refer to Default Visibility on page 3 48 for more information It is not necessary to deactivate the active zone set before activating a new one m To activate a zone set open the Zoning menu and select Activate Zone Set to open the Activate Zone Set dialog Select a zone set from the Select Zone Set pull down menu and click the Activate button B To deactivate the active zone set open the Zoning menu select Deactivate Zone Set Acknowledge the warning about traffic disruption and click the Yes button to confirm that you want to deactivate the active zone set 3 7 4 3 Copying a Zone to a Zone Set To copy an existing zone and its membership from one zone set to another select the zone and drag it to the chosen zone set Click the Apply button to save changes to the zoning database 3 7 4 4 Removing a Zone from a Zone Set or from All Zone Sets You can remove a zone from a zone set or from all zone sets in the database 1 In the faceplate display open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning to open the
54. an Alias c ee eee eee 3 57 Removing an Alias from All Zones a 3 57 Merging Fabrics and Zoning cece eee ees 3 58 Zone Merge Failure 2 3 58 Zone Merge Failure Recovery a 3 59 Managing Switches Managing User Accounts x dae ox Ebr RR EE ROC e pi Ret 4 2 Creating User Accounts other on Sah VER aba D ES 4 3 Removing a User Account csse kb eR eed 4 4 Changing a User Account Password illus aa 4 5 59097 02 B po SANbox 5600 Series QLOGIC Switch Management User s Guide A 4 1 4 Modifying a User Account 0 0 00 e ee ee 4 6 4 2 Displaying Switch Information 2s eb ee be 4 7 4 2 1 Devices Data WIndOW 4s vis RR RR ERE EAE RE 4 8 4 2 2 Switch Data Window cuc cto son tees Re e ANA UNS ee 4 8 4 2 3 Port Statistics Data Window sex ere er Rx x eR EXER 4 12 4 2 4 Port Information Data Window llli 4 12 4 2 5 Configured Zonesets Data Windows aaa 4 13 4 3 Configuring Port Threshold Alarms a nd 0724400 detes bones 4 14 4 4 Paging a SWIIOD c 2 eens dota NAA Ghee APA AN Sape Sra te Ma rta 4 15 4 5 Setting the Date Time and Enabling NTP Client 4 16 4 6 Resetting a SWIICDI un P esoror eni o Qc Ds Tem i eee Ded newt eee 4 16 4 7 Configuring ass WIEOs sa duh leet te na Na KG a NAA naal M eR ARM Eo id 4 18 4 7 1 Using the Configuration Wizard llle 4 18 4 7 2 Switch Properties uro e boe x oro ae ite d x
55. attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list lot press or Q and the ENTER key to do so q Name listener 1 Type 2 Permanent 3 Transient Permanent URL IP address port format 10 0 0 1 5000 Finished configuring attributes This configuration must be saved with the cim save command before it can take effect or to discard this configuration use the cim cancel command A 14 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC A Command Line Interface CIMSubscription Command ls CiMSubscription Command Authority Syntax Keywords 59097 02 B Creates edits or removes CIM subscriptions Admin session and a CIM Edit session Refer to the CIM Command on page A 11 for information about opening a CIM edit session cimsubscription create subscription name delete subscription name edit subscription name create subscription name Prompts you in a line by line fashion to create a CIM subscription with the name given by subscription name subscription name can have up to 32 characters 0 9 A Z a z _ and Table A 4 describes the CIM subscription configuration parameters Table A 4 CIM Subscription Configuration Parameters Parameter Description Name Subscription name FilterID Event type for which the switch monitors and sends an
56. button 3 Click the OK button to save the change to the database 3 3 Tracking Fabric Firmware and Software Versions The Fabric Tracker option enables you to generate a snapshot or baseline of current system version information which can be viewed analyzed and compared to other snapshot files and exported to a file Information includes date and time SANsurfer Switch Manager version switch active firmware version device hardware drivers and firmware version from FDMI The Snapshot Analyzer option enables you to B Compare two snapshots B Detect mismatches of firmware and driver versions t Detect devices that have been moved added to or removed from the fabric 3 20 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 3 Managing Fabrics Tracking Fabric Firmware and Software Versions ls 3 3 1 Saving a Version Snapshot 3 3 2 To save the current snapshot to an XML file open the Fabric menu select Fabric Tracker and select Save Snapshot To view and analyze system version information open the Fabric menu select Fabric Tracker and select Analyze Snapshots The Fabric Version Snapshot Analysis dialog shown in Figure 3 9 opens with the Summary Differences and Reports tab pages Click the Browse buttons to open and view the snapshot files in the corresponding tab pages Click the Close button to exit the Fabric Version Snapshot Analysis dialog The color key below the scrollable area defines the meanings of the colors used The Summar
57. compliant switches Enabling this setting under other circumstances will disable zoning that is defined by domain ID and port number This Legacy Address Format option is available only when the Interop 1 setting is enabled on the Advanced Switch Properties dialog Contact your authorized maintenance provider for assistance in using this feature Refer to the QLogic Switch Interoperability Guide on the QLogic Web site for a complete discussion of configuring for operation with non Qlogic Switches NOTE The Legacy Address Format setting must be the same on all switches in the fabric otherwise the inter switch links will not connect 4 25 4 Managing Switches XX Configuring a Switch QLOGIC AA NY 4 7 3 3 Timeout Values The switch timeout values determine the timeout values for all ports on the switch Table 4 5 describes the switch timeout parameters The timeout values must be the same for all switches in the fabric NOTE Mismatched timeout values will disrupt the fabric These should not be changed unless absolutely necessary Therefore the switch must be offline to change these values Use the Switch Properties dialog to take the switch offline Table 4 5 Timeout Values Parameter Description R_A_TOV Resource Allocation Timeout Represents the maximum time a frame could be delayed in the Fabric and still be delivered The default is 10000 milliseconds E D TOV Error Detect Timeout Represents the maximum round tr
58. contact their authorized maintenance provider for technical support of their QLogic switch products QLogic direct customers may contact QLogic Technical Support others will be redirected to their authorized maintenance provider Visit the QLogic support Web site listed in Contact Information for the latest firmware and software updates 1 4 1 Availability QLogic Technical Support for products under warranty is available during local standard working hours excluding QLogic Observed Holidays 1 4 2 Training QLogic offers certification training for the technical professional for both the SANblade HBAs and the SANbox 5600 Series switches From the training link at www qlogic com you may choose Electronic Based Training or schedule an intensive hands on Certification course Technical Certification courses include installation maintenance and troubleshooting QLogic SAN products Upon demonstrating knowledge using live equipment QLogic awards a certificate identifying the student as a Certified Professional The training professionals at QLogic may be reached by email at tech training qlogic com 59097 02 B 1 3 1 Introduction Technical Support XX QLOGIC ee 1 4 3 Contact Information Support Headquarters QLogic Web Site Technical Support Web Site Technical Support Email Technical Training Email North American Region Email Phone Fax Europe Middle East and Africa Region Email Phone Numbers by Languag
59. cycled option has the following value setting Displays the status of the parameter that controls the display of alarms in the session output stream This parameter is set using the Set Alarm command audit Displays the most recent 200 records in the administrative audit log The audit log contains configuration and administrative changes that have been made to the switch including the originating management session and IP address broadcast Displays the broadcast tree information and all ports that are currently transmitting and receiving broadcast frames chassis Displays chassis component status and temperature cimlistener listener name Displays CIM indicator services listener information for the listener given by listener name If you omit listener name the command displays all listeners cimsubscription subscription name Displays CIM subscription information for the subscription given by subscription name If you omit subscription name the command displays all subscriptions config option Displays switch port and zoning configuration attributes Refer to the Show Config Command on page A 107 domains Displays list of each domain and its worldwide name in the fabric donor Displays list of current donor configuration for all ports fabric Displays list of each domain symbolic name worldwide name node IP address and port IP address 59097 02 B A 93 A Command Line Interface XX Show Command
60. display 2 11 1 1 Topology Display Menu The menu options available in the topology display are shown in Figure 2 7 File Fabric Switch Open View File Ctri O Add Fabric Delete Save View As Remove Fabric Export Devices Information Save Default Fabric View File Fabric Tracker gt Switch Properties Preferences Security Consistency Checklist Network Properties Nicknames Rediscover Fabric SNMP Properties Exit Start Performance View Show Event Browser Stack Wizards View Help Refresh Stack Configuration Wizard Refresh F5 Help Topics Select All Ports Layout Topology About Syslog O Toggle Auto Layout SNMP Properties Remember Layout Set Date Time User Accounts Security Consistency Checklist Reset L Load Firmware Remove Switch Figure 2 7 Topology Display Menu 59097 02 B 2 19 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface XX QLOGIC AA NY 2 11 1 2 Faceplate Display Menu The menu options available in the faceplate display are shown in Figure 2 8 Fie Fabric Switch Port Open View File cto Add Fabric Archive Port Properties Save View As Remove Fabric Restore Port Properties 10G Save Defaul
61. ea gm Mo o Bl Add Open Save Refresh Events Zoning Security Help Switch Fabric 1 SW Sw Em SW3 Power Supply i Fan Module 2 mpa 808946064 Power Supply Fan Module 1 9 Zone Sets ZoneSet ORPHAN ZONE SET 9 ZoneSet maxzs E zone chuck 21 Soft CF Zone qla200 1 Soft CF Zone qla200 2 Soft CF Zone qla200 3 Soft Devices Switch PortStats PortInfo Configured Zonesets Configured Security Active Security Figure 4 6 Configured Zonesets Data Window 59097 02 B 4 13 4 Managing Switches XX Configuring Port Threshold Alarms QLOGIC C P 4 3 Configuring Port Threshold Alarms You can configure the switch to generate alarms for selected events Configuring an alarm involves choosing an event type rising and falling triggers a sample window and finally enabling or disabling the alarm To configure port threshold alarms do the following 1 2 In the faceplate display open the Switch menu and select Port Threshold Alarm Configuration The Port Threshold Alarm Configuration dialog shown in Figure 4 7 prompts you to enable or disable all alarms select an event set triggers set a sample window and enable or disable an individual alarm BB Port Threshold Alarm Configuration xi Enable All Port Threshold Alarms Port Threshold Alarm CRC Errors Monitoring v Enable vj Ri
62. file located on the remote host and then restart the syslog daemon Consult your operating system documentation for information on how to configure Remote Logging The syslog conf file on the remote host must contain an entry that specifies the name of the log file in which to save error messages Add the following line to the syslog conf file A tab separates the selector field local0 info and action field which contains the log file path name var adm messages messages name local0 info lt tab gt var adm messages name The NTP Client feature allows switches to synchronize their date and time with a centralized server NTP client ensures the consistency of date and time stamps in alarms and log entries An Ethernet connection to NTP server is required Refer to Setting the Date Time and Enabling NTP Client on page 4 16 for more information 4 31 4 Managing Switches Xx Configuring a Switch QLOGIC NY 4 7 7 SNMP Properties Use the SNMP Properties dialog shown in Figure 4 13 to change SNMP configuration parameters After making changes click the OK button to put the new values into effect To open the SNMP Properties dialog select a switch in the topology display or open the faceplate display open the Switch menu and select SNMP Properties NOTE Since Read Community Trap Community and Write Community settings are like passwords and are write only fields the current settings are displayed as asterisks
63. for Graphs Apply these changes to all graphs Apply these changes to the currently selected graph Apply these changes ONLY to new graphs a ces Help Figure 5 9 Default Graph Options Dialog To modify the graph options do the following 1 Choose the units for the graph WB Select the Show Bytes Data on Graph check box to plot data in KBytes second m Select the Show Frames Data on Graph check box to plot data in frames second 59097 02 B po 5 Managing Ports QLOGIC Graphing Port Performance ls 2 Choose what data type to plot For example if you selected Show Frames Data on Graph in step 1 you can plot one or all of the following B Total frames transmitted and received Total Frames B Total frames transmitted Total Tx Frames B Total frames received Total Rx Frames In addition to these you can also plot total errors by selecting the Total Errors check box 3 Display or hide the unit grid Select the Display Grid on Graph check box to display the unit grid 4 Choose the color scheme for the graph Click a Select Color button to open its corresponding Select Color dialog which allows you to select a new color scheme You can select the color for each data type the unit grid and the background by clicking the corresponding color field or button In each case you can choose a color using the Swatches Red Green Blue RGB or Hue Saturation Brightness HSB method N
64. indicates active gray indicates inactive The faceplate display provides the following views of port status corresponding to the View menu options in the faceplate display Refer to Monitoring Port Status on page 5 2 for more information about these displays L Port type a Port state B Port speed B Port media Context sensitive popup menus are displayed when you right click the faceplate image or a port icon in the faceplate display 2 13 2 Working with Ports Ports are selectable and serve as access points for other displays and menus You select ports to display information about them in the data window or to modify them Context sensitive popup menus are displayed when you right click the faceplate image or on a port icon in the faceplate display 2 13 2 1 Selecting Ports You can select ports in the following ways Selected ports are outlined in white B o select a port click the port in the faceplate display B To select a range of consecutive ports select a port then press and hold the shift key and select another port The application selects both end ports and all ports in between in port number sequence m To select several non consecutive ports hold the Control key while selecting W To select all ports right click on the faceplate image Select Select All Ports from the popup menu To cancel a selection press and hold the Control key and select it again 2 28 59097 02 B XX LOGIC 2 Using SANsur
65. key to do so Configuring Port Number 1 AdminState 1 Online 2 Offline 3 Diagnostics 4 Down Online LinkSpeed 1 1Gb s 2 2Gb s 4 4Gb s A Auto Auto PortType GL G F FL Donor GL SymPortName string max 32 chars Portl ALFairness True False False DeviceScanEnable True False True ForceOfflineRSCN True False False ARB FF True False False InteropCredit decimal value 0 255 0 ExtCredit dec value increments of 15 non loop only 0 FANEnable True False True AutoPerfTuning True False False LCFEnable True False False MFSEnable True False False VIEnable True False False MSEnable True False True NoClose True False False IOStreamGuard Enable Disable Auto Disable PDISCPingEnable True False True Finished configuring attributes This configuration must be saved see config save command and activated see config activate command before it can take effect To discard this configuration use the config cancel command SANbox xxxx admin config 5 59097 02 B A 71 A Command Line Interface XX Set Config Command QLOGIC AA 1 dC Ww V The following is an example of the Set Config Port command for a 10 Gbps port SANbox xxxx 5 admin start SANbox xxxx admin 5 config edit SANbox xxxx admin config 5 set config port 16 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the cur
66. level Displays the event severity level logging setting and the display level setting options Displays the options that are available for configuring event logging and automatic display to the screen Refer to the for information about how to configure event logging and display level port Displays the ports being monitored for events If an event occurs which is of the defined level and on a defined component but not on a defined port no entry is made in the log settings Displays the current filter settings for component severity level port and display level This command is equivalent to executing the following commands separately Show Log Component Show Log Level and Show Log Port Examples The following is an example of the Show Log Component command SANbox xxxx 5 show log component Current settings for log FilterComponent NameServer MgmtServer Zoning Switch Blade Port Eport Snmp The following is an example of the Show Log Level command SANbox xxxx 5 show log level Current settings for log FilterLevel Info DisplayLevel Critical The following is an example of the Show Log Options command SANbox xxxx gt show log options Allowed options for log FilterComponent All None NameServer MgmtServer Zoning Switch Blade Port Eport Snmp FilterLevel Critical Warn Info None DisplayLevel Critical Warn Info None 59097 02 B AMA A Command Line Interface Show Log Command XX QLOGIC E amp 9 3 m
67. limited to monitoring tasks NOTE If a user is logged into a switch using SANsurfer Switch Manager or CLI and an administrator changes user access rights and passwords existing logins will not be affected by the new settings Login access and privileges are only checked for a new login request Security Consistency Checklist The Security Consistency Checklist dialog enables you to compare security related features on switches to check for inconsistencies Any changes must be made through the appropriate dialog such as Network Properties dialog Switch Properties dialog or SNMP Properties dialog To open the Security Consistency Checklist dialog open the Switch menu and select Security Consistency Checklist 59097 02 B XX LOGIC 3 Managing Fabrics Securing a Fabric ls 3 2 4 Device Security 59097 02 B Device security provides for the authorization and authentication of devices that you attach to a switch You can configure a switch with a group of devices against which the switch authorizes new attachments by devices other switches or devices issuing management server commands Device security is configured through the use of security sets and groups A group is a list of device worldwide names that are authorized to attach to a switch There are three types of groups one for other switches ISL another for devices port and a third for devices issuing management server commands MS A security set is a set
68. menu in the Nicknames dialog and select Export 3 Entera name for the XML nickname file in the Save dialog and click Save 3 38 59097 02 B XKX 3 Managing Fabrics QLOGIC Zoning a Fabric TO 3 6 3 5 Importing a Nicknames File Importing a nicknames file copies its contents into and replaces the contents of the Nicknames xml file which is used by SANsurfer Switch Manager To import a nickname file do the following 1 Open the File menu and select Nicknames to open the Nicknames dialog 2 Open the File menu in the Nicknames dialog and select Import 3 Select an XML nickname file in the Open dialog and click Open When prompted to overwrite existing nicknames click Yes 3 7 Zoning a Fabric Zoning enables you to divide the ports and devices of the fabric into zones for more efficient and secure communication among functionally grouped nodes This subsection addresses the following topics Zoning Concepts Using the Zoning Wizard Managing the Zoning Database Managing Zone Sets Managing Zones Managing Aliases Merging Fabrics and Zoning 3 7 1 Zoning Concepts The following zoning concepts provide some context for the zoning tasks described in this section B Zones B Aliases B Zone Sets W Zoning Database W Configuring the Zoning Database 59097 02 B 3 39 3 Managing Fabrics xX Zoning a Fabric QLOGIC AA NN 3 7 1 1 Zones 3 7 1 1 1 Soft Zones 3 40 A zone is a named group of ports or
69. name is a user defined name of up to 32 characters that identifies the switch The symbolic name is used in the topology and faceplate displays as well as many data windows to more easily identify switches The illegal characters are the pound sign semi colon and comma 4 Managing Switches XX Configuring a Switch QLOGIC AA NY 4 7 2 2 Switch Administrative States The switch administrative state determines the operational state of the switch The switch administrative state exists in two forms the configured administrative state and the current administrative state m The configured administrative state is the state that is saved in the switch configuration and is preserved across switch resets SANsurfer Switch Manager always makes changes to the configured administrative state The configured administrative state is displayed in the Switch Properties dialog B The current administrative state is the state that is applied to the switch for temporary purposes and is not retained across switch resets The current administrative state is set using the Set Switch command Refer to the Set Command on page A 61 Table 4 4 describes the administrative state values Table 4 4 Switch Administrative States Parameter Description Online The switch is available Offline The switch is unavailable Diagnostics The switch is in diagnostics mode is unavailable and tests can then be run on all ports of the switch
70. no longer than 64 characters Valid characters are 0 9 A Z a z and The security database supports a maximum of 16 groups If you omit type ISL is used type can be one of the following ISL Configures security for attachments to other switches Port Configures security for attachments to N Port devices MS Configures security for attachments to N Port devices that are issuing management server commands 59097 02 B A 29 A Command Line Interface Group Command XX QLOGIC AA NN A 30 edit group member Initiates an editing session in which to change the attributes of a worldwide name given by member in a group given by group Member attributes that can be changed are described in Table A 8 Table A 8 Group Member Attributes Attribute Description Authentication ISL and Port Groups CTAuthentication MS Groups Primary Hash ISL and Port Groups Hash MS Groups Primary Secret ISL and Port Groups Secondary Hash ISL and Port Groups Secondary Secret ISL and Port Groups Secret MS Groups Enables CHAP or disables None authentication using the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP CT authentication Enables True or disables False authentication for MS group members The default is False The preferred hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Primary Secret sent by the member The hash functions are MD5
71. of designated donor ports Click the Next button 59097 02 B 5 15 5 Managing Ports XKX Resetting a Port QLOGIC AA NY Extended Distance Designate Donor Ports Donor Group 0 Extended Distance Requirements Dana Donenborts Available ports Selected donor ports Verify Requested Changes Port 0 GL inactive Offline Apply Changes Port 1 GL inactive Online A gt gt Changes Complete Port 2 GL inactive Online Port 3 GL inactive Diagng Port 4 GL inactive Online Number of ports needed 0 Number of designated donor ports 0 Ports configured to be donor ports will be disabled Back Next Cancel Help Figure 5 3 Designate Donor Ports 4 Verify Requested Changes Review the extended distance requests and the selected donor ports Click the Finish button to apply the changes and redistribute the credits NOTE As credits are used the Logged In LEDs on the corresponding donor ports illuminate continuously In addition donor port Activity LEDs will reflect the same traffic as the recipient port Donor ports whose credits are being used are unavailable to devices that are connected to them 5 4 Resetting a Port The Reset Port option reinitializes the port using the saved configuration To reset a port do the following 1 Inthe faceplate display select the port s to be reset 2 Open the Port menu and select Reset Port 5 16 59097 02 B
72. open the Edit Zoning dialog with the zoning configuration of the selected source switch displayed The zoning changes made to the source switch in the Edit Zoning dialog are applied to all switches in the stack 4 9 Archiving a Switch You can create an XML archive file containing the configuration parameters Basically any data received by SANsurfer Switch Manager is archived Archived parameters include the following Switch properties and statistics IP configuration SNMP configuration Port properties and statistics Alarm configuration Zoning configuration Configured security RADIUS Server information This archive file can be used to restore the configuration on the same switch or on a replacement switch You can also use the archive file as a template for configuring new switches to add to a fabric Security settings and user account information are not archived The archive can be used later to restore the switch Refer to Restoring a Switch on page 4 38 for more information To archive a switch do the following 1 Open the Switch menu in the faceplate display and select Archive 2 Inthe Save dialog enter a file name 3 Click the Save button 59097 02 B 4 37 4 Managing Switches XKX Restoring a Switch QLOGIC AA NY 4 10 Restoring a Switch 4 38 Restoring a switch loads the archived switch configuration parameters to the switch The switch configuration must be archived before it can be restored Th
73. or SHA 1 If the member does not sup port the Primary Hash the switch will use the Secondary Hash The hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Secret sent by the MS group member Hash values are MD5 or SHA 1 Hexadecimal string that is encrypted by the Primary Hash for authentication with the member The string has the fol lowing lengths depending on the Primary Hash function W MD5 hash 16 byte m SHA 1 hash 20 byte Hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Secondary Secret sent by the group member Hash values are MD5 or SHA 1 The Secondary Hash is used when the Primary Hash is not available on the group member The Primary Hash and the Secondary Hash cannot be the same Hex string that is encrypted by the Secondary Hash and sent for authentication The string has the following lengths depending on the Secondary Hash function W MD5 hash 16 byte E SHA 1 hash 20 byte Hexadecimal string that is encrypted by the Hash function for authentication with MS group members The string has the following lengths depending on the Hash function W MD5 hash 16 byte m SHA 1 hash 20 byte 59097 02 B XKX A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Group Command ls Table A 8 Group Member Attributes Continued Attribute Description Binding Domain ID of the switch to which to bind the ISL group mem ISL Groups ber worldwide name This option is available only if Fab ricBindingEnabled is set to True using th
74. oris eu sem EE Eq EET ESTER E 5 14 Device SCAM d e xtate ipu those APA 5 14 Changing Port Symbolic Name 0 020 eee 5 14 Using the Extended Credits Wizard cece eee 5 15 Resetting a POTE ims omi ioo ER CC E hn UR EE teed PG hh fes 5 16 Testing POMS NP T E 5 17 Graphing Port Performance eese xk e ERR ERR eee 5 19 Starting SANsurfer Performance Viewer llis sels 5 20 Exiting SANsurfer Performance Viewer aa 5 21 Saving and Opening Performance View Files 5 22 Changing the Default Performance View File Encryption Key 5 23 Setting SANsurfer Performance Viewer Preferences 5 23 Setting the Polling Frequency a 5 24 Displaying Graphs for a Switch eee 5 24 Displaying Graphs for a Stack 0 aaa 5 25 Arranging Graphs in the Display 0 aaa 5 25 Customizing Graphis e sone iple iUd ate sre ote Pee NI etn 5 26 Setting Global Graph Type 0 0 00 eee eee 5 28 Rescaling a Selected Graph aa 5 28 Printing Grapligs sedeat d RNA cu NG cs er Gad Aga DAS Tod ami ABA NAG ag 5 28 Saving Graph Statistics to a File a 5 28 59097 02 B Page viii XX LOGIC SANbox 5600 Series Switch Management User s Guide aaa Appendix A Command Line Interface A 1 A 2 A 3 A 3 1 A 3 2 A 4 59097 02 B Logging On to Switch sce eee he ee XR EREXXTRRREEGGO Rx Ee A 1 User ACCOUNTS s panaman Mand
75. port number device port Fibre Channel address or the device port WWN To add ports devices to an alias do the following 1 Open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning dialog 2 Choose one of the following methods to add the port device Select a port device in the Port Device tree and drag it into the alias To select multiple ports devices press and hold the Control key while selecting Select a port device in the Port Device tree Click an alias to select multiple ports devices press the Control key while selecting Select an alias Open the Edit menu and select Add Members Select a port device in the Port Device tree To select multiple ports devices press the Control key while selecting Select an alias Click the Insert button If the port device you want to add is not in the Port Device tree you can add it by doing the following a b C d Right click the selected alias Open the Edit menu and select Create Members Choose the WWN Domain Port or First Port Address radio button Enter the hexadecimal value for the port device according to the radio button selection 16 digits for a WWN member 4 digits for a Domain Port member DDPP or a 6 digit Fibre Channel Address for a First Port Address member DDPPAA where D domain ID P port number and A ALPA 3 Click the OK button to add the member and save the change 3 7 6 3 Removing an Alias from All Zones To remove an ali
76. prompts you to choose a region then a subregion to specify the time zone Examples The following examples enables and disables the beacon SANbox xxxx gt set beacon on Command succeeded SANbox xxxx gt set beacon off Command succeeded 59097 02 B A 63 A Command Line Interface XX Set Config Command QLOGIC AA NY Set Config Command Authority Syntax Keywords A 64 Sets switch port port threshold alarm security and zoning configuration parameters The changes you make with this command are not retained when you reset or power cycle the switch unless you save them using the Config Save command Refer to the Config Command on page A 17 Admin session and a Config Edit session set config port port number ports port number security switch threshold zoning port port number Initiates an edit session in which to change configuration parameters for the port number given by port number If you omit port number the system begins with port O and proceeds in order through the last port For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets Enter q to end the configuration for one port or qq to end the configuration for all ports Table A 18 describes the port parameters ports port number Initiates an editing session in which to change configuration parameters for all ports based on the configuration for the port given by p
77. response to trap authentication failures The default is False Enables True or disables False SNMP communication with other switches in the fabric The default is True system Prompts you in a line by line fashion to change system configuration settings Table A 26 describes the system configuration fields For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets NOTE Changing the IP address will terminate all Ethernet management sessions Table A 26 System Configuration Settings AdminTimeout Inactivity Timeout Entry Description EthONetworkDiscovery Ethernet boot method 1 Static 2 Bootp 3 DHCP 4 RARP The default is 1 Static EthONetworkAddress Ethernet Internet Protocol IP address The default is 10 0 0 1 EthONetworkMask Ethernet subnet mask address EthOGatewayAddress Ethernet IP address gateway Amount of time in minutes the switch waits before termi nating an idle Admin session Zero 0 disables the time out threshold The default is 30 the maximum is 1440 Amount of time in minutes the switch waits before termi nating an idle Telnet command line interface session Zero 0 disables the time out threshold The default is 0 the maximum is 1440 59097 02 B A 87 A Command Line Interface Set Setup Command AA NN Table A 26 System Configuration Settings Continued A 88 XX QLOGIC Entr
78. security set Deletes the security set given by security set If the specified security set is active the command is suspended until the security set is deactivated groups security set Displays all groups that are members of the security set given by security set This keyword is available without an Admin session list Displays a list of all security sets This keyword is available without an Admin session remove security set group Removes a group given by group from the security set given by security set If security set is the active security set the group will not be removed until the security set has been deactivated rename security set old security set new Renames the security set given by security set old to the name given by security set new Notes Refer to the Group Command on page A 26 for information about creating and managing groups Examples The following is an example of the Securityset Active command SANbox xxxx 5 securityset active Active SecuritySet Information ActiveSecuritySet alpha LastActivatedBy Remote LastActivatedOn day month date time year 59097 02 B A 59 A Command Line Interface XX Securityset Command QLOGIC ee The following is an example of the Securityset Groups command SANbox xxxx gt securityset groups alpha Current list of Groups for SecuritySet alpha groupl ISL group2 Port The following is an example of the Securityset List command SA
79. server Configuring all of your switches and your workstations to utilize NTP will keep their date time settings in sync and will prevent difficulties with SSL certificates and event logs B CIM Common Information Model Allows management of the switch through third party applications that use CIM B FTP File Transfer Protocol Allows file transfers to the switch via FTP FTP is required for out of band firmware uploads which will complete faster than in band Firmware uploads m Management Server Allows management of the switch through third party applications that use GS 3 Management Server 4 7 5 Security Consistency Checklist Dialog The Security Consistency Checklist dialog enables you to compare security related features on switches in order to check for inconsistencies Any changes must be made through the appropriate dialog such as Network Properties dialog Switch Properties dialog or SNMP Properties dialog To open the Security Consistency Checklist dialog open the faceplate display open the Switch menu and select Security Consistency Checklist 4 28 59097 02 B XKX 4 Managing Switches LOGIC Configuring a Switch 9 9 97 aaa 4 7 6 Network Properties Use the Network Properties dialog shown in Figure 4 12 to change IP configuration parameters and enable remote logging After making changes click the OK button to put the new values into effect To open the Network Properties
80. session An account must have Admin authority to enter the Admin Start command which opens an admin session Refer to the Admin Command on page A 8 The commands and their page numbers are listed in Table A 2 59097 02 B XKX A Command Line Interface LOGIC Commands T335 P Table A 2 Commands Listed by Authority Level Monitoring Commands Configuration Command Help A 35 Admin A 8 id Anae Admin Session Commands Ping A 43 Ps A 44 Alias A 9 Quit A 45 CIM A 11 Show A 92 CIMListener A 13 Show Config A 107 CIMSubscription A 15 Show Log A 111 Config A 17 Show Perf A 115 Create A 20 Show Setup A 118 Date A 23 Uptime A 126 Feature A 24 Whoami A 130 Firmware Install A 25 Group A 26 Hardreset A 34 Hotreset A 37 Image A 38 Lip A 41 Passwd A 42 Reset A 46 Security A 54 Securityset A 58 Set A 61 Set Config A 64 Set Log A 76 Set Port A 80 Set Setup A 82 Shutdown A 122 Test A 123 User A 127 Zone A 131 Zoneset A 135 Zoning A 138 Some keywords do not require an Admin session Some keywords can be executed only by the Admin account name 59097 02 B A 7 A Command Line Interface XX Admin Command QLOGIC AA NN Admin Command Authority Syntax Keywords Notes Examples Opens and closes an Admin session The Admin session provides commands that change the fabric and swit
81. sets zones and aliases stored on a switch 59097 02 B A access control list zone 3 41 3 56 account name display A 127 A 130 factory A 2 active zone set 3 35 3 41 Active Zoneset data window 3 35 Admin account name A 6 authority A 6 Admin command A 8 Admin session timeout A 87 administrative state configured 4 20 5 11 current 4 20 5 11 port 5 11 A 81 switch 4 20 A 62 alarm configuration 4 14 A 69 configuration defaults A 50 configuration display A 107 description A 79 log A 61 A 93 alias add members 3 57 A 9 copy A 9 create 3 56 A 9 delete A 10 delete members A 10 description 3 41 display list A 10 display members A 10 remove 3 57 rename A 10 Alias command A 9 Arbitrated Loop Physical Address A 80 archive configuration 4 37 59097 02 B Index authentication A 28 device 3 1 trap 4 33 user 3 1 authority A 6 auto save default fabric view file 2 16 graphing options 5 23 zoning configuration 3 47 B beacon A 61 binding A 27 A 31 BootP boot method 4 30 broadcast 4 23 A 93 browser 2 2 browser location 2 16 5 23 C certificate 3 7 A 20 CHAP authentication A 28 chassis status A 93 checklist 3 8 CIM command A 11 CIMListener command A 13 CIMSubscription command A 15 command line interface A 1 command syntax A 6 commands A 6 Common Information Model configure A 11 display listener A 93 display subscription A 93 listener A 13 service 4 28 A 85 subscription A 15 Index 1 S
82. start SANbox xxxx admin 5 zoning edit SANbox xxxx admin zoning gt SANbox xxxx admin zoning 5 zoning cancel Zoning edit mode will be canceled Please confirm y n n y SANbox xxxx admin 5 admin end The following is an example of the Zoning Limits command SANbox xxxx 5 zoning limits Zoning Attribute Maximum Current Zoning Name MaxZoneSets 256 6 MaxZones 2000 17 MaxAliases 2500 1 MaxTotalMembers 10000 166f MaxZonesInZoneSets 2000 19 MaxMembersPerZone 2000 10 D 1 JBOD 1 23 D 1 Photons 9 D 2 JBOD1 16 D 2 NewJBOD 2 5 E1JBOD1 5 E2JBOD2 3 LinkResetZone 3 LinkResetZone2 8 NewJBOD1 8 NewJBOD2 24 Q_1Photonl 8 Q_1_NewJBOD1 13 Q 1 Photon 1 21 Q 2 NewJBOD2 3 ZoneAlias 3 ZoneDomainPort 4 ZoneFCAddr MaxMembersPerAlias 2000 2 AliasInAZone A 140 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Zoning Command o 9 9 7 aaa The following is an example of the Zoning List command SANbox xxxx 5 zoning list Active ZoneSet Information ZoneSet Zone ZoneMember wwn b0241f 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 21 00 00 e0 8b 02 41 2f wwn_23bd31 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 23 bd 31 wwn 221416 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 22 14 16 wwn 2215c3 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 22 15 c3 Configured Zoning Information ZoneSet Zone ZoneMember wwn b0241f 50 06 04 82 bf
83. the administration or operation of a fabric and require administrator intervention Alarms are always logged and always displayed on the screen 59097 02 B A 79 A Command Line Interface XX Set Port Command QLOGIC ee Set Port Command Authority Syntax Keywords A 80 Sets port state and speed for the specified port temporarily until the next switch reset or new configuration activation This command also clears port counters Admin session except for the Clear keyword set port port_number bypass alpa clear enable speed transmission_speed state state port_number Specifies the port Ports are numbered beginning with 0 bypass alpa Sends a Loop Port Bypass LPB to a specific Arbitrated Loop Physical Address ALPA or to all ALPAs on the arbitrated loop alpa can be a specific ALPA or the keyword ALL to choose all ALPAs clear Clears the counters on the port This keyword does not require an admin session enable Sends a Loop Port Enable LPE to all ALPAs on the arbitrated loop speed transmission_speed Specifies the transmission speed for the specified port Choose one of the following port speed values 1Gb s One gigabit per second This applies only to ports 0 15 2Gb s Two gigabits per second This applies only to ports 0 15 4Gb s Four gigabits per second This applies only to ports 0 15 10Gb s Ten gigabits per second This applies only to ports 16 19 59097 02 B po
84. the Event Browser Filtering the Event Browser enables you to display only those events that are of interest based on the event severity timestamp source type and description To filter the Event Browser open the Filter menu and select Filter Entries This opens the Filter Events dialog shown in Figure 3 12 The Event Browser displays those events that meet all of the criteria in the Filter Events dialog If the filtering criteria is cleared or changed then all the events that were previously hidden that satisfy the new criteria will be shown You can filter the event browser in the following ways W Severity Check one or more of the corresponding check boxes to display alarm events critical events warning events or informative events W Date Time Check one or both of the From and To check boxes Enter the bounding timestamps MM dd yy hh mm ss aa to display only those events that fall within those times aa indicates AM or PM The current year yy can be entered as either 2 or 4 digits For example 12 12 03 will be interpreted December 12 2003 WB Text Check one or more of the corresponding check boxes and enter a text string case sensitive for event source type and description The Event Browser displays only those events that satisfy all of the search specifications for the Source Type and Description text Filter Events Severity Vi Alarm vi Critical v Warning v Info Date Time _ From
85. the InteropMode parameter is Interop 1 this parameter enables True or disables False the use of legacy address formatting for inter operating with non FC SW 2 switches The default is False 59097 02 B XKX A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Set Config Command a M threshold Initiates a configuration session by which to generate and log alarms for selected events The system displays each event its triggers and sampling window one line at a time and prompts you for a value For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets These parameters must be saved in a configuration and activated before they will take effect Refer to the Config Command on page A 17 for information about saving and activating a configuration Table A 21 describes the Set Config Threshold parameters The switch will down a port if an alarm condition is not cleared within three consecutive sampling windows by default 30 seconds Reset the port to bring it back online An alarm is cleared when the threshold monitoring detects that the error rate has fallen below the falling trigger Table A 21 Set Config Threshold Parameters Parameter Description Threshold Monitoring Enabled Master enable disable parameter for all events Enables True or disables False the generation of all enabled event alarms The default is False CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled The event type enable disable para
86. the changes to the active zone set The edited copy then becomes the active zone set The Edit Zoning dialog has a Zone Sets tree on the left and a Port Device or members tree on the right Both trees use display conventions similar to the fabric tree for expanding and contracting zone sets zones and ports An expanded port shows the port Fibre Channel address an expanded address shows the port World Wide Name You can select zone sets zones and ports in the following ways W Click a zone zone set or port icon m Right click to select a zone set or zone and open the corresponding popup menu W X Hold down the Shift key while clicking several consecutive icons W X Hold down the Control key while clicking several non consecutive icons Using tool bar buttons popup menus or a drag and drop method you can create and manage zone sets and zones in the zoning database Table 3 4 describes the zoning tool bar operations Use the Edit Zoning dialog to define zoning changes and click the Apply button to open the Error Check dialog Click the Error Check button to have SANsurfer Switch Manager check for zoning conflicts such as empty zones aliases or zone sets and ACL zones with non domain ID port number membership Click the Save Zoning button to implement the changes Click the Close button to close the Error Check dialog On the Edit Zoning dialog click the Close button to close the Edit Zoning dialog Table 3 4 Edit Zoni
87. the components currently being monitored for events The components are as follows All Monitors all components Chassis Monitors chassis hardware components such as fans and power supplies Eport Monitors all E Ports Mgmtserver Monitors management server status Nameserver Monitors name server status None Monitor none of the component events A 111 A Command Line Interface XX Show Log Command QLOGIC EN PV ww L Other Monitors other miscellaneous events Port Monitors all port events SNMP SNMP events Switch Monitors switch management events Zoning Monitors zoning conflict events display filter Displays log events on the screen according to the component or severity level filter given by filter filter can be one of the following Info Displays all informative events Warning Displays all warning events Critical Displays all critical events Eport Displays all events related to E Ports Mgmtserver Displays all events related to the management server Nameserver Displays all events related to the name server Port port number Displays all events related to the port given by port number SNMP Displays all events related to SNMP A 112 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Show Log Command o 9 9 97 aaa Switch Displays all events related to switch management Zoning Displays all events related to zoning
88. the following 1 Select one or more ports in the faceplate display 2 Open the Port menu and select Port Properties or Port Properties 10G to open the Port Properties dialog 3 Click the Port Type radio button for the port type you want Click the OK button to write the new port type to the switch Table 5 9 Port Types State Description F Port Fabric port Supports a single public device N Port FL Port Fabric loop port Self discovers a single device N Port or a loop of up to 126 public devices NL Port 1 2 4 Gbps ports only G Port Generic port Self discovers as an F Port or an E Port GL Port Generic loop port Self discovers as an F Port FL Port or an E Port GL Port is the default port type A single device on a public loop will attempt to configure as an F Port first then if that fails as an FL Port 1 2 4 Gbps ports only Donor Donor port Allows buffer credits to be used by another port 1 2 4 Gbps ports only 59097 02 B 5 13 5 Managing Ports XX Configuring Ports QLOGIC AA NY 5 2 4 O Stream Guard The I O Stream Guard feature suppresses the Registered State Change Notification RSCN messages on a port basis I O Stream Guard should be enabled only on ports connected to initiator devices To configure the I O Stream Guard option using the Port Properties dialog open the Port menu and select Port Properties Click the radio button that corresponds to one of the follo
89. the possible port types and their meanings Table 5 1 Port Types State Description F Port FL Port G Port GL Port E Port Donor Fabric port Supports a single public device N Port Fabric loop port Self discovers a single device N Port or a loop of up to 126 public devices NL Port 1 2 4 Gbps ports only Generic port Self discovers as an F Port or an E Port Generic loop port Self discovers as an F Port FL Port or an E Port GL Port is the default port type A single device on a public loop will attempt to configure as an F Port first then if that fails as an FL Port 1 2 4 Gbps ports only Expansion port The mode that a G Port or GL Port is in when attached by an ISL inter switch link to another fibre channel switch Donor port Allows buffer credits to be used by another port 1 2 4 Gbps ports only 5 2 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 5 Managing Ports Displaying Port Information ls 5 1 1 2 Displaying Port Operational States To display the operational state on each port in the faceplate display open the View menu and select View Port States Table 5 2 lists the possible operational states and their meanings The port operational state refers to actual port state and not the administrative state you may have assigned Table 5 2 Port Operational States State Description Iso Off Dia Dn Online port is active and ready to send da
90. you omit MMDDhhmmCOCY Y the current date is displayed which does not require an admin session Network Time Protocol NTP must be disabled to set the time with the Date command Refer to the Set Setup Command on page A 82 System keyword for information about NTP When setting the date and time on a switch that is enabled for SSL connections the switch time must be within 24 hours of the workstation time Otherwise the connection will fail The following is an example of the Date command SANbox xxxx gt date Mon Apr 07 07 51 24 2003 A 23 A Command Line Interface XX Feature Command QLOGIC AA NN Feature Command Adds license key features to the switch and displays the license key feature log To order a license key contact your switch distributor or your authorized reseller Upgrading a switch is not disruptive nor does it require a switch reset Authority Admin session for Add keyword only Syntax feature add license key log Keywords add license key Adds the feature that corresponds to the value given by license key license key is case insensitive log Displays a list of installed license key features Notes SANbox 5600 Series switches can be upgraded to 12 16 or 20 port configurations Examples The following is an example of the Feature Add command SANbox xxxx 5 admin start SANbox xxxx admin 5 feature add 1 LCVXOWUNOJBE6 License upgrade to 20 ports Once the feature has been
91. 0 8b 27 aa be SupportedFC4Types FCP SupportedSpeed 2Gb s CurrentSpeed 2Gb s MaximumFrameSize 2048 OSDeviceName HostName The following is an example of the Show NS local domain command SANbox xxxx 5 show ns Seq Domain Port Port No ID ID Type COS PortWWN NodeWWN 1 19 0x13 1301e1 NL 2 19 0x13 1301e2 NL 3 19 0x13 1301e4 NL 4 19 0x13 130d00 N 21300200220 37373113 89 202003 005203373 73313769 21200 00 20 37 73 12 9b 207007002207 372 73712799b 202002002 202372792 05226 20s 00008205372 13 205 26 21 01 00 e0 8b 27 a7 bc 20 01 00 e0 8b 27 a7 bc 59097 02 B Xs A Command Line Interface XX Show Command QLOGIC AA NN The following is an example of the Show NS domain ID command SANbox xxxx 5 show ns 18 Seq Domain Port Port No ID ID Type COS PortWWN NodeWWN 1 18 0x12 120700 N 3 21 00 00 e0 8b 07 a7 bce 20 00 00 e0 8b 07 a7 be The following is an example of the Show NS port_ID command SANbox xxxx gt show ns 1301e1 Port ID 1301e1 PortType NL PortWWN 21 00 00 20 37 73 131 69 SymbolicPortName NodeWWN 20200200220 237273713369 SymbolicNodeName NodeIPAddress 0 0 0 0 ClassOfService 3 PortIPAddress 0 0 0 0 FabricPortName 20 01 00 c0 dd 00 bc 56 FC4Type FCP FC4Desc NULL The following is an example of the Show Interface command SANbox xxxx gt show interface etho Link encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 C0 DD 00 BD ED inet addr 10 20 68 107 Bcast 10 20 68 255 Mask 255 255 255 0 UP BROADCAST RUN
92. 00 e0 8b 27 a7 be QLogic Corp T First Port Address 030000 Port Device Tree WN 21 00 00 e0 8b 07 a7 be QLogic Corp BK Domain 3 Port 14 BB Domain 3 Pont 15 BB Domain 3 Port 16 ii Domain 3 Port 17 kk Domain 3 Port 18 86 Domain 3 Por 19 aaa Apply Close Help Figure 3 15 Edit Zoning Dialog To apply zoning to a fabric choose a zone set and activate it When you activate a zone set the switch distributes that zone set and its zones excluding aliases to every switch in the fabric This zone set is known as the active zone set 3 44 59097 02 B XKX 3 Managing Fabrics QLOGIC Zoning a Fabric TO You cannot edit an active zone set on a switch You must configure an inactive zone set to your needs and then activate that updated zone set to apply the changes to the fabric When you activate a zone set the switch distributes that zone set to the temporary zoning database on every switch in the fabric However in addition to the merged active zone set each switch maintains its own original zone set in its zoning database Only one zone set can be active at one time NOTE f the Interop Auto Save parameter is enabled on the Zoning Configuration dialog then every time the active zone set changes the switch will copy it into an inactive zone set stored on the switch You can edit this copy of the active zone set stored on the switch and activate the updated copy to conveniently apply
93. 1 wwn 401248 zone set 1 wwn 02402f zone set 1 wwn 22412f zone set 1 The following is an example of the Zone Members command SANbox xxxx 5 zone members wwn b0241f Current List of Members for Zone wwn b0241f 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 21 00 00 e0 8b 02 41 2f 59097 02 B A 133 A Command Line Interface XX Zone Command QLOGIC ee The following is an example of the Zone Zonesets command SANbox xxxx gt zone zonesets zonel Current List of ZoneSets for Zone zonel zone set 1 A 134 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC A Command Line Interface Zoneset Command ls Zoneset Command Authority Syntax Keywords 59097 02 B Manages zone sets and component zones across the fabric Admin session and a Zoning Edit session Refer to the Zoning Command on page A 138 for information about starting a Zoning Edit session The Active List and Zones keywords are available without an Admin session You must close the Zoning Edit session before using the Activate and Deactivate keywords zoneset activate zone set active add zone set zone list copy zone set source zone set destination create zone set deactivate delete zone set list remove zone set zone list rename zone set old zone set new zones zone set activate zone set Activates the zone set given by zone set This keyword deactivates the active zone set Close the Zoning Edit session before using thi
94. 2 Sorting the Event Browser 00 ccc eee eee 3 33 Saving the Event Browser toa File 3 33 Devices Data Window 2 2 2 aaaea aaeeea 3 34 Active Zone Set Data Window aa 3 35 Link Data Window ON nm dre DNA tard Boe RATER S EROR 3 36 Working with Device Information and Nicknames 3 36 Displaying Detailed Device Information aaa 3 36 Exporting Device Information to a File aa 3 37 Managing Device Port Nicknames a 3 37 Creating a Nickname n annann ns aka Dahan 3 37 Editing Nickname x xe rx ERST 3 38 Deleting a Nickname 0 3 38 Exporting Nicknames to a File 200 00 eee 3 38 Importing a Nicknames File 0000 e eee eee 3 39 Zoning a Fabri x iesise aka saree ohare eed tye tans naaa LINE KARA 3 39 Page v SANbox 5600 Series XKX Switch Management User s Guide QLOGIC AA NY 3 7 1 3 7 1 1 3 7 1 2 3 7 1 3 3 7 1 4 3 7 2 3 7 3 3 7 3 1 3 7 3 2 3 7 3 3 3 7 3 4 3 7 3 5 3 7 3 6 3 7 4 3 7 4 1 3 7 4 2 3 7 4 3 3 7 4 4 3 7 4 5 3 7 5 3 7 5 1 3 7 5 2 3 7 5 3 3 7 5 4 3 7 5 5 3 7 5 6 3 7 5 7 3 7 6 3 7 6 1 3 7 6 2 3 7 6 3 3 7 7 3 7 7 1 3 7 7 2 Section 4 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 1 3 Page vi Zoning Concepts ssassn 3 39 EM egea a BA MAG a a e a E a ait 3 40 Aliases Naa anana Ea Gees tice mra But bu ewe Oe ovs 3 41 ZONE SOS oa Sue aCe eee eons Sao mE ee
95. 2 Trap2Enabled True False False Trap3Address dot notated IP Address 0 0 0 0 Trap3Port decimal value 162 Trap3Severity see allowed options above warning Trap3Version 1 2 2 Trap3Enabled True False False Trap4Address dot notated IP Address 0 0 0 0 Trap4Port decimal value 162 Trap4Severity see allowed options above warning Trap4Version GE J 2 2 Trap4Enabled True False False Trap5Address dot notated IP Address 0 0 0 0 Trap5Port decimal value 162 Trap5Severity see allowed options above warning Trap5Version 1 2 2 Trap5Enabled True False False ReadCommunity string max 32 chars public WriteCommunity string max 32 chars private TrapCommunity string max 32 chars public AuthFailureTrap True False False ProxyEnabled True False True A 90 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC A Command Line Interface Set Setup Command aaa The following is an example of the Set Setup System command SANbox xxxx admin gt set setup system A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list lot press g or Q a Eth0NetworkDiscovery EthONetworkAddress EthONetworkMask Eth0GatewayAddress AdminTimeout InactivityTimeout LocalLogEnabled RemoteLogEnabled RemoteLogHostAddress NTPClientEnabled NTPServerAddress
96. 2 7 2 9 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 14 2 15 2 15 2 16 2 17 2 17 2 18 2 19 2 19 2 20 2 20 2 21 2 22 2 23 2 23 Page iii SANbox 5600 Series Switch Management User s Guide 2 11 6 2 12 2 12 1 2 12 2 2 12 2 1 2 12 2 2 2 12 2 3 2 12 3 2 13 2 13 1 2 13 2 2 13 2 1 2 13 2 2 2 13 3 Section 3 3 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 1 3 3 1 4 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 2 4 1 3 2 4 2 3 2 4 3 3 2 4 4 3 2 4 5 3 2 4 6 3 2 4 7 3 2 4 8 3 2 4 9 3 2 4 10 3 2 4 11 3 2 4 12 3 2 4 13 3 2 4 14 XX LOGIC SS aaa amnanae eaqr rr Working Status Indicator liliis 2 23 Using the Topology Display eser ER eb ad 2 24 Switch and Link Status a cei GRAE Aha pa ANA ES 2 24 Working with Switches and Links llle 2 25 Selecting Switches and Links 00 0 2 25 Arranging Switches in the Display 2 25 Opening the Faceplate and Topology Display Popup Menus 2 26 Topology Data Windows na maa RR 2 26 Using the Faceplate Display 0000 eee eee 2 27 Port Views and Status iu xa nan NG eee be DAN ee eee ee Redes 2 28 Working withi POMS wadding pad ao Oe A e Rer RR Re e b Rated 2 28 Selecting PORE eo NA Mast BAN cett cad M tci Iram EM Gaba 2 28 Opening the Faceplate Popup Menu lssssss 2 29 Faceplate Data Windows 524v eR ned sets ER m 2 29 Managing Fabrics RADIUS Servers 2 240 tc Na NA emt ed a Baa maa MM titt M a 3 1 Adding a RADIU
97. 27 Error Detect Timeout 4 26 event browser filter 3 32 preference 2 16 sort 3 33 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC SANbox 5600 Series Switch Management User s Guide I aaa event logging by component A 76 A 111 by port A 78 A 113 by severity level A 113 display A 111 restore defaults A 78 save settings A 79 settings A 113 severity level 3 31 A 78 start A 79 stop A 79 event severity 3 31 extended credit wizard 5 15 external test 5 17 A 123 F F_Port 5 2 5 13 fabric add 3 23 add a switch 3 26 database 3 23 delete 3 24 discovery interval 2 16 displaying information 3 28 loop port 5 2 5 13 management 3 1 management workstation 2 2 merge 3 58 port 5 2 5 13 rediscovery 3 25 security 3 7 services 3 19 status 3 29 tracker 3 20 tree 2 22 zoning 3 39 Fabric Device Management Interface 4 22 A 94 59097 02 B fabric view file 5 22 auto save 5 23 open 3 24 password 5 21 save 3 25 faceplate display data window 2 29 description 2 18 2 27 factory defaults 4 40 A 46 FC 4 descriptor 5 14 FDMI See Fabric Device Management Interface Feature command A 24 File Transfer Protocol example A 39 service 4 28 A 85 firmware image file 4 44 A 38 install with CLI A 25 install with SANsurfer Switch Manager 4 44 list image files A 38 non disruptive activation 4 44 A 37 remove image files A 38 retrieve image file A 38 unpack image A 38 version A 99 Firmware Install command A 25 FL_Port 5 2 5 13 G gate
98. 3 Index 9 SANbox 5600 Series Switch Management User s Guide XX QLOGIC E Nh Vi V bPVV Z zone access control list 3 41 add member port 3 54 A 131 copy 3 51 A 131 create 3 53 A 131 definition 3 40 delete A 132 delete member port A 132 discard inactive 3 48 list A 132 list members A 132 name server 3 40 remove 3 51 remove all 3 55 remove member port 3 55 rename 3 55 A 132 soft 3 40 type 3 56 A 132 Zone command A 131 zone merge description 3 58 failure 3 58 failure recovery 3 59 Index 10 zone set activate 3 51 A 135 active 3 35 3 41 A 138 add member zone A 135 copy A 135 create 3 50 A 135 deactivate 3 51 A 47 A 136 definition 3 41 delete A 136 delete member zone 3 51 A 136 discard inactive 3 48 display A 136 display active A 135 display members A 136 display zones A 132 management 3 50 orphan 3 41 remove 3 52 rename 3 55 A 136 tree 3 45 Zoneset command A 135 zoning 4 25 configuration 3 47 A 70 configuration defaults A 50 configuration display A 107 database 3 42 3 44 A 47 default 3 49 edit A 138 history A 139 limits A 139 list definitions A 139 remove all 3 49 revert changes A 139 save edits A 140 wizard 3 43 Zoning command A 138 zoning database restore 3 48 save to file 3 48 59097 02 B
99. 5 show config threshold Configuration Name default ThresholdMonitoringEnabled False CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled True RisingTrigger 25 FallingTrigger 1 SampleWindow 10 DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled True RisingTrigger 25 FallingTrigger 0 SampleWindow 10 ISLMonitoringEnabled True RisingTrigger 2 FallingTrigger 0 SampleWindow 10 LoginMonitoringEnabled True RisingTrigger 5 FallingTrigger 1 SampleWindow 10 LogoutMonitoringEnabled True RisingTrigger 5 FallingTrigger 1 SampleWindow 10 LOSMonitoringEnabled True RisingTrigger 100 FallingTrigger 5 SampleWindow 10 The following is an example of the Show Config Zoning command SANbox xxxx gt show config zoning Configuration Name default InteropAutoSave True DefaultVisibility All DiscardInactive False A 110 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC A Command Line Interface Show Log Command aaa Show Log Command Authority Syntax Keywords 59097 02 B Displays the contents of the log or the parameters used to create and display entries in the log The log contains a maximum of 1200 entries When the log reaches its entry capacity subsequent entries overwrite the existing entries beginning with the oldest None show log number of events component display filter level options port settings number of events Specifies the number of the most recent events to display from the event log number of events must be a positive integer component Displays
100. A Command Line Interface Group Command T O paaa The following is an example of the Group List command SANbox xxxx 5 group list Group SecuritySet groupl ISL alpha group2 Port alpha The following is an example of the Group Members command SANbox xxxx 5 group members groupl Current list of members for Group groupl 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 71 ed 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 72 45 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 90 ef 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 b8 b7 59097 02 B A 33 A Command Line Interface XX Hardreset Command QLOGIC AA NN Hardreset Command Resets the switch and performs a power on self test This reset disrupts traffic activates the pending firmware and clears the alarm log To save the alarm log before resetting refer to the Set Log Command on page A 76 Authority Admin session Syntax hardreset Notes To reset the switch without a power on self test refer to the Reset Command on page A 46 To reset the switch without disrupting traffic refer to the Hotreset Command on page A 37 A 34 59097 02 B XX LOGIC A Command Line Interface Help Command lls Help Command Displays a brief description of the specified command its keywords and usage Authority None Syntax help command keyword Keywords command Displays a summary of the command given by command and its keywords If you omit command the system displays all available commands keyword Displays a summary of the keyword given by
101. A NY cancel Cancels the online test in progress status Displays the status of a test in progress or if there is no test in progress the status of the test that was executed last Examples To run an internal or external port test do the following 1 Tostart an admin session enter the following command and press the Enter key admin start 2 Place the port in Diagnostics mode enter the following command x port number and press the Enter key set port x state diagnostics 3 Choose the type of port loopback test to run m Torun an internal loopback test enter the following test port x internal W Torun an external loopback test enter the following command A loopback plug must be installed for this test to pass test port x external 4 A series of test parameters are displayed on the screen Press the Enter key to accept each default parameter value or type a new value for each parameter and press the Enter key The TestLength parameter is the number of frames sent the FrameSize 256 byte maximum in some cases parameter is the number of bytes in each frame and the DataPattern parameter is the pattern in the payload 5 After the test type has been chosen and the command executed a message on the screen will appear detailing the test results 6 Afterthe test is run put the port back into online state by entering the following command x port number and pressing the Enter key set port x state online 7 To ve
102. A 76 clear A 76 display A 77 A 112 event A 76 A 111 local A 88 power on self test A 97 remote A 88 logged in users A 99 login limit 3 24 A 2 loop port bypass A 80 enable A 80 fabric 5 2 5 13 initialization A 41 59097 02 B XX LOGIC SANbox 5600 Series Switch Management User s Guide aaa loopback test 5 17 loss of signal monitoring 4 14 Management Server group A 29 service 4 28 A 85 manufacturer information A 118 mask address A 87 MD5 authentication A 28 media status 5 4 memory activity A 94 workstation 2 2 menu structure 2 19 Multi Frame Sequence bundling A 66 N name server display A 94 export 3 37 zone 3 40 NDCLA See Non disruptive code load and activation network configuration reset A 47 discovery 4 30 A 87 gateway address A 87 interfaces A 94 IP address A 87 mask A 87 properties 4 29 4 32 Network Time Protocol client A 88 description 4 16 interaction with Date command A 23 server address A 88 service 4 28 A 85 59097 02 B nickname create 3 37 delete 3 38 edit 3 38 export 3 38 import 3 39 node to node test 5 18 non disruptive activation A 37 Non disruptive code load and activation 4 16 NTP See Network Time Protocol O online help 2 17 test 5 18 operating systems 2 2 orphan zone set 3 41 P page break A 62 Passwd command A 42 password change A 42 default fabric file 5 23 default fabric view file 2 15 factory A 2 switch A 42 user ac
103. ANbox 5600 Series Switch Management User s Guide XX LOGIC AA NN Config command A 17 configuration activate A 17 archive 4 37 backup A 17 copy A 17 delete A 17 edit A 18 list A 18 reset A 46 restore 4 38 A 18 save A 18 wizard 4 18 configured administrative state 4 20 connection Secure Socket Layer A 20 security 3 7 A 84 contact 4 33 CRC error 4 14 Create command A 20 credits 5 15 current administrative state 4 20 D data window active security 3 19 Active Zoneset 3 35 Configured Zonesets 4 13 description 2 23 2 26 2 29 Devices 3 34 4 8 port information 5 8 port statistics 5 5 switch 4 8 database fabric 3 23 zoning 3 44 date 4 16 Date command A 23 Decode error 4 14 Index 2 default configuration 4 40 visibility 3 48 3 51 zoning 3 49 default fabric view file auto save 2 16 SANsurfer Switch Manager 2 16 defaults alarm configuration A 50 port configuration A 49 RADIUS configuration A 52 security configuration A 53 services configuration A 52 Simple Network Management Protocol configuration A 51 switch configuration A 48 system configuration A 53 zoning configuration A 50 device authentication 3 1 nickname 3 37 scan 5 14 security 3 9 Devices data window 3 34 4 8 disk space 2 2 distance 5 15 domain ID binding A 27 A 31 description 4 21 display A 93 lock 4 21 donor port 5 2 5 13 A 93 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 4 30 E E Port isolation 3 58 4 21 embedded GUI service 4
104. ANsurfer Switch Manager is started and later enabled only those events from the time the Event Browser was enabled and forward will be displayed W Choose the default port view when opening the faceplate display You can set the faceplate to reflect the current port type default port speed port operational state or port transceiver media Regardless of the default port view you choose you can change the port view in the faceplate display by opening the View menu and selecting a different port view option Refer to the corresponding subsection for more information 2 16 59097 02 B XKX 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager QLOGIC Using Online Help ls Port Types on page 5 2 Displaying Port Operational States on page 5 3 Displaying Port Speeds on page 5 3 Displaying Transceiver Media Status on page 5 4 Oooo Preferences Working Directory CADocuments and Settings Browse Browser Location n Filesilnternet Exploreniexplore exe Browse Auto Load and Auto Save Graphing Environment _ Display dialog when making non secure connections Com ak Figure 2 5 Preferences Dialog SANsurfer Switch Manager To set preferences for your SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions do the following 1 Open the File menu and select Preferences to open the Preferences dialog 2 Enter or browse for paths to the working directory and browser 3 Inthe Application wide Options area choose the prefere
105. Add Fabric button 59097 02 B 3 23 3 Managing Fabrics XKX Managing the Fabric Database QLOGIC EN P pV g NOTE A switch supports a combined maximum of 19 logins or sessions reserved as follows m 4logins or sessions for internal applications such as management server and SNMP m 9 high priority Telnet sessions W 6 logins or sessions for SANsurfer Switch Manager inband and out of band logins Application Programming Interface API inband and out of band logins and Telnet logins Additional logins will be refused NOTE f the entry switch has SSL Secure Socket Layer enabled the switch will generate and display a Verify Certificate dialog that you must accept before gaining access to the fabric Refer to Connection Security on page 3 7 and System Services Dialog on page 4 27 for more information on certificates and SSL 3 4 2 Removing a Fabric To delete a fabric file from the database do the following 1 Selecta fabric in the fabric tree 2 Open the Fabric menu and select Remove Fabric 3 4 3 Opening a Fabric View File A fabric view file is one or more fabrics saved to a file To open an existing view file do the following 1 Openthe File menu and select Open View File or click the Open button If the fabric you are currently viewing has changed you will be prompted to save the changes to the fabric view file with the Save View dialog before opening a different view file 2 In the Open View dia
106. C Upgrading the Switch Using License Keys ls To upgrade the switch do the following 1 Isolate the switch from the fabric 2 Add a fabric with the IP address of the switch you want to upgrade 3 Open the faceplate display for the switch you want to upgrade 4 Open the Switch Menu and select Features to open the Feature Licenses dialog shown in Figure 4 17 amp Feature licenses Figure 4 17 Features License Key Dialog 5 Inthe Feature Licenses dialog click the Add button to open the Add License Key dialog shown in Figure 4 18 FO Add License Key Description Add Key Figure 4 18 Add License Key Dialog 6 In the Add License Key dialog enter the port license key in the Key field 7 Click the Description button to display the upgrade description 8 Click the Add Key button to upgrade the switch Allow a minute or two for the upgrade to complete The switch will need to be reset after the upgrade 59097 02 B 4 43 4 Managing Switches XX Installing Firmware QLOGIC NENNEN X 4 14 Installing Firmware Installing firmware involves loading unpacking and activating the firmware image on the switch SANsurfer Switch Manager does this in one operation To provide consistent performance throughout the fabric ensure that all switches are running the same version of firmware The pending firmware version will differ from the active version during the brief period while the switc
107. CD ROM drive 1 If the SANsurfer Management Suite start page does not open in your default browser do the following a Using Windows Explorer double click the drive letter which contains the SANsurfer Management Suite Disk b Locate and double click the Start_Here htm file to open the SANsurfer Management Suite start page in your default browser 2 Onthe SANsurfer Management Suite start page click the SANbox Switch Software button 3 On the SANbox Switch Software page scroll to the SANbox 5600 Series Series area In the Operating System column click the Win NT 2000 link 5 Click the SANsurfer Management Software link to open the File Download dialog 2 4 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager Installing the Management Application o 9 9 7 M 59097 02 B 6 10 14 You can run the installation file from the CD ROM or download the installation file to your hard drive Choose one of the following WB Open the installation file from the CD ROM and follow the SANsurfer Switch Manager installation instructions B Specify a location in which to save the sansurfer windows install exe file and click the Save button Double click the saved sansurfer windows install exe file and follow the installation instructions When the installation is complete start SANsurfer Management Suite using the SANsurfer file from the SANsurfer Management Suite installation directory You can also start SANsurf
108. D Domain ID Lock In band Management Broadcast Support Resource Allocation Timeout R A TOV Interop Mode O Stream Guard Device Scan Enabled Error Detect Timeout E D TOV SNMP Enabled SNMP Proxy IP Address FDMI Enabled FDMI HBA Entry Level Subnet Mask Address Gateway Address Value SANbox Online 4 False True Enable 10000 milliseconds True Disabled True 2000 milliseconds True True 10 0 0 1 True 1000 255 0 0 0 10 0 0 254 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 4 Managing Switches Restoring the Factory Default Configuration I aaa 59097 02 B Table 4 9 Factory Default Configuration Settings Continued Setting Value Network Discovery Remote Logging Remote Logging Host Ip Address NTP Client Enabled NTP Server IP Address Contact Location Trap Enabled Trap Port Trap Address Trap Community Read Community Write Community Port State Port Speed Port Type Static False 10 0 0 254 False 10 0 0 254 Undefined Undefined False 162 Trap 1 10 0 0 254 Traps 2 5 0 0 0 0 Public Public Private Online Auto detect 1 2 4 Gbps ports GL 10 Gbps ports G 4 41 4 Managing Switches xX Downloading a Support File QLOGIC AA NY 4 12 Downloading a Support File The Download Support File menu option assembles all log files and switch memory data into a core dump file dump support tgz This file can be sent to technical support personnel for troubleshooting sw
109. D and port number pair You must reconfigure zones that are affected by domain ID reassignment 4 21 4 Managing Switches XX Configuring a Switch QLOGIC NENNEN 4 7 2 4 Fabric Device Management Interface Fabric Device Management Interface FDMI provides a means to gather and display device information from the fabric and allows FDMI capable devices to register certain information with the fabric if FDMI is enabled SANsurfer Switch Manager will report any and all FDMI information reported by the entry switch if FDMI is enabled on the entry switch To view FDMI data FDMI must be enabled on the entry switch and on all other switches in the fabric which are to report FDMI data FDMI is comprised of the fabric to device interface and the application to fabric interface The fabric to device interface enables a device s management information to be registered The application to fabric interface provides the framework by which an application obtains device information from the fabric Use the FDMI HBA Entry Limit field on the Switch Properties dialog to configure the maximum number of HBAs that can be registered with a switch If the number of HBAs exceeds the maximum number the FDMI information for those HBAs can not be registered Use the FDMI Enabled radio button on the Switch Properties dialog to enable or disable FDMI If FDMI is enabled on an HBA the HBA forwards information about itself to the switch when the HBA logs in
110. Edit Zoning dialog 2 Inthe Zone Sets tree select the zone s to be removed 3 Open the Edit menu and select Remove to remove the zone from the zone set or select Remove from All Zones to remove the zone from all zone sets 4 Click the Apply button to save changes to the zoning database Alternatively you may use shortcut menus to remove a zone from a zone set or from all zone sets in the database 59097 02 B 3 51 3 Managing Fabrics XX Zoning a Fabric QLOGIC E 3 7 4 5 Removing a Zone Set Removing a zone set from the database affects the member zones in the following Ways m Member zones that are members of other zone sets are not affected a Member zones that are not members of other zone sets become members of the orphan zone set The orphan zone set cannot be removed and is not saved on the switch To delete a zone set from the database do the following 1 In the faceplate display open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning dialog 2 Inthe Zone Sets tree select the zone set to be removed 3 Open the Edit menu and select Remove to remove the zone set 4 Click the Apply button to save changes to the zoning database Alternatively you may use shortcut menus to remove a zone set from the database 3 7 5 Managing Zones Managing zones involves the following Creating a Zone in a Zone Set Adding Zone Members Renaming a Zone or a Zone Set Removing a Zone Mem
111. EmbeddedGUIEnabled nd the ENTER key to do so 1 Static 2 Bootp 3 Dhcp 4 Rarp dot notated IP Address dot notated IP Address dot notated IP Address dec value 0 1440 minutes 0 never dec value 0 1440 minutes 0 never True False True False dot notated IP Address True False dot notated IP Address True False Static 10 0 0 1 2554255425550 10 0 0 254 30 0 True False 10 0 0 254 False 10 0 0 254 True 59097 02 B A 91 A Command Line Interface XX Show Command QLOGIC AA NN Show Command Displays fabric switch and port operational information Authority None Syntax show about alarm option audit broadcast chassis cimlistener listener name cimsubscription subscription name config option domains donor fabric fdmi port wwn interface log option Isdb mem count ns option pagebreak perf option port port number post log setup option steering domain id support switch timezone topology users version Keywords about Displays an introductory set of information about operational attributes of the switch This keyword is equivalent to the Version keyword A 92 59097 02 B XKX A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Show Command aaa alarm option Displays the alarm log and session display setting If you omit option the command displays the last 200 alarm entries The alarm log is cleared when the switch is reset or power
112. Enabled True ForceOfflineRSCN False ARB_FF False InteropCredit 0 ExtCredit 0 FANEnabled True AutoPerfTuning False LCFEnabled False MFSEnabled True MSEnabled True NoClose False IOStreamGuard Disabled VIEnabled False PDISCPingEnable True The following is an example of the Show Config Port command for a 10 Gbps port SANbox xxxx 5 show config port 16 Configuration Name default Port Number 16 AdminState Online LinkSpeed 10Gb s PortType G SymbolicName 10G 16 DeviceScanEnabled True ForceOfflineRSCN False AutoPerfTuning False LCFEnabled False MFSEnabled False MSEnabled True IOStreamGuard Disabled VIEnabled False PDISCPingEnabled True A 108 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Show Config Command o 9 9 7 aaa The following is an example of the Show Config Switch command SANbox xxxx 5 show config switch Configuration Name default AdminState Online BroadcastEnabled False InbandEnabled True FDMIEnabled False FDMIEntries 10 DomainID 19 0x13 DomainIDLock True SymbolicName sw108 R A TOV 10000 ED TOV 2000 PrincipalPriority 254 ConfigDescription Default Config ConfigLastSavedBy admin OB session5 ConfigLastSavedOn day month date time year InteropMode Standard 59097 02 B A 109 A Command Line Interface XX Show Config Command QLOGIC E V amp A O pVVpVt X The following is an example of the Show Config Threshold command SANbox xxxx
113. Examples The following is an example of the Create Support command when an FTP server is available on the workstation SANbox xxxx admin 5 create support Log Msg Creating the support file this will take several seconds FTP the dump support file to another machine y n y Enter IP Address of remote computer 10 20 33 130 Login name johndoe Enter remote directory name bin support Would you like to continue downloading support file y n n y Connected to 10 20 33 130 10 20 33 130 220 localhost localdomain FTP server Version wu 2 6 1 18 ready 331 Password required for johndoe Password XXXXXXX 230 User johndoe logged in cd bin support 250 CWD command successful lcd itasca conf images Local directory now itasca conf images bin 200 Type set to I put dump support tgz local dump support tgz remote dump support tgz 227 Entering Passive Mode 10 20 33 130 232 133 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for dump support tgz 226 Transfer complete 43430 bytes sent in 0 292 secs 1 5e 02 Kbytes sec Remote system type is UNIX Using binary mode to transfer files 221 You have transferred 43430 bytes in 1 files 221 Total traffic for this session was 43888 bytes in 1 transfers 221 Thank you for using the FTP service on localhost localdomain 59097 02 B A 21 A Command Line Interface XX Create Command QLOGIC AA NY The following is an example of the Create Support command and how
114. F BSY frames generated by this port in response to incoming frames This usually indicates a busy condition on the fabric or N Port that is preventing deliv ery of this frame Flowerrors Received a frame when there were no available credits FReject Number of frames from devices that were rejected InvalidCRC Invalid CRC detected 59097 02 B A 95 A Command Line Interface Show Command XX LOGIC AA NY Table A 27 Show Port Parameters Continued Entry Description InvalidDestAddr LIP AL PD ALPS LIP F7 AL PS LIP F8 AL PS LIP F7 F7 LIP F8 F7 Link Failures Login Logout LoopTimeouts LossOfSync PrimSeqErrors RxLinkResets RxOfflineSeq TotalErrors TotalLIPsRecvd TotalLIPsXmitd Invalid destination address detected Number of F7 AL PS LIPs or AL PD vendor specific resets performed This LIP is used to reinitialize the loop An L Port identified by AL PS may have noticed a performance degradation and is trying to restore the loop This LIP denotes a loop failure detected by the L Port identified by AL PS A loop initialization primitive frame used to acquire a valid AL PA A loop initialization primitive frame used to indicate that a loop failure has been detected at the receiver Number of optical link failures detected by this port A link failure is a loss of synchronization or a loss of signal while not in the offline state A loss of sign
115. Fabric Information QLOGIC AA NN 3 5 3 Devices Data Window The Devices data window displays information about devices hosts and storage targets connected to the switch Click the Devices tab below the data window to display device information for all devices that are logged into the selected fabric To narrow the display to devices that are logged into specific switches select one or more switches in the fabric tree or the topology display Table 3 3 describes the entries in the Devices data window Refer to Exporting Device Information to a File on page 3 37 for exporting device information Table 3 3 Devices Data Window Entries Entry Description Port WWN Port world wide name Nickname Device port nickname To create a new nickname or edit an existing nickname double click the cell and enter a nickname in the Edit Nickname dialog Refer to Managing Device Port Nicknames on page 3 37 for more information Details Click the i to display additional detail about the device Refer to Displaying Detailed Device Information on page 3 36 FC Address Fibre Channel address Switch Switch name Port Switch port number Target Initiator Device type target or initiator Vendor Host Bus Adapter Device Vendor Host Name Name of host Active Zones The active zone to which the device belongs Row Number of port as displayed in the faceplate display 3 34 59097 02 B XKX 3 Managing Fabrics QLOGIC Displaying Fa
116. Faceplate Display Switch Information The fabric updates the topology and faceplate displays by forwarding changes in status to the management workstation as they occur You can allow the fabric to update the switch status or you can refresh the display at any time To refresh switch status in the display do one of the following W Click the Refresh button WB Open the View menu and select Refresh B Press the F5 key Right click a switch in the topology display and select Refresh Switch from the popup menu Right click in the graphic window of the faceplate display and select Refresh Switch from the popup menu 4 Managing Switches XKX Displaying Switch Information QLOGIC AA NN 4 2 1 Devices Data Window 4 2 2 The Devices data window displays information about devices hosts and storage targets connected to the switch Click the Devices tab below the data window to display name server information for all devices that are logged into the selected fabric To narrow the display to devices that are logged into specific switches select one or more switches in the fabric tree or the topology display Refer to Devices Data Window on page 3 34 for a description of the entries in the Devices data window Switch Data Window 4 8 The Switch data window displays current network and switch information for the selected switches Refer to Configuring a Switch on page 4 18 for more information about the Switch data wi
117. MP m 9 high priority Telnet sessions W 6 logins or sessions for SANsurfer Switch Manager inband and out of band logins Application Programming Interface API inband and out of band logins and Telnet logins Additional logins will be refused A 3 Working with Switch Configurations Successful management of switches and fabrics with the command line interface depends on the effective use of switch configurations Modifying configurations backing up configurations and restoring configurations are key switch management tasks A 2 59097 02 B XX LOGIC A Command Line Interface Working with Switch Configurations aaa A 3 1 Modifying a Configuration 59097 02 B A switch supports up to 10 configurations including the default configuration Each switch configuration contains switch port port threshold alarm and zoning configuration components The Show Switch command displays the name of the active configuration A configuration name can have up to 31 characters excluding the pound symbol semicolon and comma By editing the latest configuration and saving the results under a new name you can create a history of configuration changes Use the Config List command to display the configurations stored on the switch SANbox xxxx gt config list Current list of configurations default config_10132003 To modify a switch configuration you must open an Admin session with the Admin Start command An Ad
118. Manager XKX Starting SANsurfer Switch Manager QLOGIC AA NY 3 In the Initial Start dialog click the Open Configuration Wizard button When you power up the switch the Configuration Wizard will recognize the switch and lead you through the configuration process The application opens with the Initial Start dialog shown in Figure 2 1 If you prefer not to see this dialog check the Don t show this dialog again box This has the same effect as disabling the Display Initial Startup Dialog preference Refer to Setting SANsurfer Switch Manager Preferences on page 2 16 for information about setting preferences Initial Start Dialog SANsurfer Switch Manager Fibre Channel Fabric Management Select initial option Open Configuration Wizard Open existing fabric requires ip address login and password Open existing fabric view file O Start application without specifying a fabric Don t show this dialog again Proceed Cancel Help Figure 2 1 Initial Startup Dialog m Click the Open Existing Fabric radio button to open the Add a New Fabric dialog which prompts you for a fabric name IP address account name and password Refer to Adding a Fabric on page 3 23 W X Click the Open Existing Fabric View File radio button to open the Open View dialog which prompts you to specify a fabric view file that you saved earlier Refer to Opening a Fabric View File on page 3 24 2 10 59097 02 B XKX 2
119. Manager x Admin Authority Days to Expiration never expires never expires never expires never expires Change Password Select user account for password change Account Login ho selection Old Password New Password Verify Password Change Password Auld Account Remove Account Change Password Modify Account Close Help Figure 4 3 User Account Administration Dialog Change Password 59097 02 B 4 5 4 Managing Switches XKX Managing User Accounts QLOGIC AA NY 4 1 4 Modifying a User Account To modify a user account on a switch open the Switch menu in the faceplate display and select User Accounts This displays the User Account Administration dialog shown in Figure 4 4 Click the Modify Account tab Select the account login name from the list of accounts at the top of the dialog Click the Admin authority Enabled check box to grant admin authority to the account name Click an Account Expiration Date radio button If the account is not to be permanent enter the number of days until the account expires Click the Modify Account button to save the changes Click the Close button to close the User Account Administration dialog User Account Administration SANbox Manager Ei Admin Authority Days to Expiration never expires never expires never expires never expires Modify Account Select user account to be modified
120. Managing Fabrics XKX Zoning a Fabric QLOGIC AA NN 3 7 1 4 Zoning Database 3 7 1 4 1 Each switch has its own zoning database The zoning database is made up of all aliases zones and zone sets that have been created on the switch or received from other switches The switch maintains two copies of the inactive zoning database one copy is maintained in temporary memory for editing purposes the second copy is maintained in permanent memory Zoning database edits are made on an individual switch basis and are not propagated to other switches in the fabric when saved There are two configuration parameters that affect the zoning database Interop Auto Save and Default Visibility The Interop Auto Save parameter determines whether changes to the active zone set that a switch receives from another switch in the fabric will be saved to permanent memory on that switch The Default Visibility parameter permits or prohibits communication among ports devices when there is no active zone set Refer to Configuring the Zoning Database on page 3 47 for information about zoning configuration Viewing Zoning Limits and Properties 3 42 Zoning limits vary depending on the firmware installed on the switch To view zoning limits and properties on a switch do the following 1 In the faceplate display open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning dialog 2 Choose one of the following L In the zone sets tree lef
121. Managing Ports Graphing Port Performance ls 5 6 4 Changing the Default Performance View File Encryption Key To change the encryption key for the default performance view file do the following 1 5 6 5 Open the File menu and select Save Default Performance View File to open the Save Default Performance View File dialog Enter the new encryption key in the Default File Encryption Key field Re enter the same encryption key in the Re enter Encryption Key to Confirm field Click the OK button to save the changes Setting SANsurfer Performance Viewer Preferences To set preferences open the File menu and select Preferences to open the Preferences dialog shown in Figure 5 8 Set the following preferences and click the OK button to save the changes Change the location of the working directory in which to save files Change the location of the browser used to view the online help Enable or disable the Auto Load and Auto Save Graphing Options preference When enabled SANsurfer Performance Viewer prompts you to save and load the default fabric file between sessions Refer to Exiting SANsurfer Performance Viewer on page 5 21 for more information on the default performance view file Enable or disable the Display Dialog When Making Non secure Connections checkbox If enabled the Non secure Connections Check dialog is displayed when you attempt to open a non secure fabric You then have the option of opening a non secure fa
122. NING MULTICAST MTU 1500 Metric 1 RX packets 4712 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 3000 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 100 RX bytes 415313 405 5 Kb TX bytes 716751 699 9 Kb Interrupt 11 Base address 0xfcc0 lo Link encap Local Loopback inet addr 127 0 0 1 Mask 255 0 0 0 UP LOOPBACK RUNNING MTU 16436 Metric 1 RX packets 304 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 304 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 0 RX bytes 20116 19 6 Kb TX bytes 20116 19 6 Kb A 102 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Show Command nn aaa The following is an example of the Show Port command SANbox xxxx 5 show port 1 Port Number 1 AdminState Online OperationalState Online AsicNumber 0 PerfTuningMode Normal AsicPort 1 PortID 0e0800 ConfigType GL Port WWN 20 08 00 c0 dd 03 d5 94 DiagStatus Passed RunningType E EpConnState Connected MediaPartNumber PL XPL VC SG3 22 EpIsoReason NotApplicable MediaRevision 1 IOStreamGuard Disabled MediaType 200 M5 SN I LinkSpeed 2Gb s MediaVendor Unknown LinkState Active MediaVendorID 00000485 LoginStatus LoggedIn SymbolicName Port8 MaxCredit 16 SyncStatus SyncAcquired MediaSpeeds 1Gb s 2Gb s 4Gb s XmitterEnabled True ALInit 5 LIP F8 AL PS 0 ALInitError 0 LIP F8 F7 0 BadFrames 0 LinkFailures 2 Class2FramesIn 0 Login a Class2FramesOut 0 Logout 2 Class2WordsIn 0 LoopTimeouts 1 Class2WordsOut 0 LossOfS
123. Nbox xxxx gt securityset list Current list of SecuritySets alpha beta A 60 59097 02 B XKX A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Set Command TT yay Set Command Sets a variety of switch parameters Authority Admin session for all keywords except Alarm Beacon and Pagebreak which are available without an Admin session Syntax set alarm option beacon state config option log option pagebreak state port option setup option switch state timezone Keywords alarm option Controls the display of alarms in the session output stream or clears the alarm log option can be one of the following clear Clears the alarm log history This value requires an Admin session on Enables the display of alarms in the session output stream off Disables the display of alarms in the session output stream beacon state Enables or disables the flashing of the Logged In LEDs according to state This keyword does not require an admin session state can be one of the following on Enables the flashing beacon off Disables the flashing beacon config option Sets switch port port threshold alarm security and zoning configuration parameters Refer to the Set Config Command on page A 64 59097 02 B A 61 A Command Line Interface XX Set Command QLOGIC AA NN A 62 log option Specifies the type of entries to be entered in the event log Refer to the Set Log Command on page A 76 p
124. None Empty port no transceiver installed 5 4 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 5 Managing Ports Displaying Port Information ls 5 1 2 Port Statistics Data Window 59097 02 B The Port Statistics data window displays statistics about port performance To open the Port Statistics window select one or more ports in the faceplate display and click the Port Stats tab below the data window Table 5 5 describes the Port Statistics data window entries The Statistics pull down menu is available on the Port Statistics data window and provides different ways to view detailed port information Click the down arrow to open the pull down menu Open the pull down menu and select Absolute to view the total count of statistics since the last switch or port reset Select Rate to view the number of statistics counted per second over the polling period Select Baseline to view the total count of statistics since the last time the baseline was set When viewing baseline statistics click the Clear Baseline button to set the current baseline The baseline will also be set when the switch status changes from unreachable to reachable Table 5 5 Port Statistics Data Window Entries Entry Description Start Time The beginning of the period over which the statistics apply The start time for the Absolute view is not applicable The start time for the Rate view is the beginning of polling interval The start time for the Baseline view is the last ti
125. OTE Clicking the Reset button in the Swatches HSB and RGB tab pages of the Select Color dialogs will reset the colors in the Preview area to the last saved color scheme At this point you are only selecting a new color scheme to be saved m Swatches Click the Swatches tab Select a swatch from the palette m HSB Click the HSB tab Select a color using any of the following methods C Click in the color palette C SelecttheH S or B button and use the slide to vary the selected value u Enter values in the H S or B input fields B RGB Click the RGB tab Select a color by moving the slides to adjust the values for red blue and green or enter values in the input fields 5 Inthe Default Graph Options dialog click the corresponding radio button to apply changes to all graphs the currently selected graph or all new graphs 6 In the Default Graph Options dialog click the OK button to save the color scheme changes and close the dialog 59097 02 B 5 27 5 Managing Ports XX Graphing Port Performance QLOGIC AA NN 5 6 7 4 Setting Global Graph Type The Set Global Graph Type option enables you to view port activity using two types of graphs W Line Graph plots continuous port activity in horizontal line format m Bar Graph the last polling value received by the application in bar graph format To set the global graph type open the Graph menu and select Line Bar or Bar Graph 5 6 7 5 Rescaling
126. QLOGIC AA NY fdmi port wwn Displays detailed information about the device host bus adapter given by port wwn If you omit port wwn the command displays a summary of host bus adapter information for all attached devices in the fabric Illegal characters in the display appear as question marks interface Displays the status of the active network interfaces log option Displays log entries Refer to the Show Log Command on page A 111 The log is cleared when the switch is reset or power cycled Isdb Displays Link State database information mem count Displays information about memory activity for the number of seconds given by count If you omit count the value 1 is used Displayed memory values are in 1K block units NOTE This keyword will display memory activity updates until count is reached it cannot be interrupted Therefore avoid using large values for count ns option Displays name server information for the specified option If you omit option name server information for the local domain ID is displayed option can have the following values all Displays name server information for all switches and ports domain id Displays name server information for the switch given by domain id domain id is a switch domain ID port id Displays name server information for the port given by port id port id is a port Fibre Channel address A 94 59097 02 B XKX A Co
127. RSCN Suppression Device scan 5 10 59097 02 B XKX 5 Managing Ports QLOGIC Configuring Ports o 9 9 9 7 aaa 5 2 1 Changing Port Administrative States The port administrative state determines the operational state of a port The port administrative state has two forms the configured administrative state and the current administrative state m The configured administrative state is the state that is saved in the switch configuration and is preserved across switch resets SANsurfer Switch Manager always makes changes to the configured administrative state B The current administrative state is the state that is applied to the port for temporary purposes and is not preserved across switch resets The current administrative state is set using the Set Port command Refer to the Set Port Command on page A 80 Table 5 7 describes the port administrative states To change port administrative state do the following 1 Select one or more ports in the faceplate display 2 Open the Port menu and select Port Properties or Port Properties 10G to open the Port Properties dialog 3 Click the Port States radio button that corresponds to the port state you want 4 Click the OK button to write the new port state to the switch Table 5 7 Port Administrative States State Description Online Activates and prepares port to send data Offline Prevents port from receiving signal and accepting
128. S Server a na ae ee eeos epee aeesgas be 3 2 Removing a RADIUS Server 00 000 eee 3 4 Editing RADIUS Server Information 200000 eee 3 5 Modifying Authentication Order RADIUS Server Information 3 6 sebum a PADNGs 2 8 fuse O AG bd oo NAG a NG ened he oe Ad d es 3 7 Connection Security a os nnd perna 820d FE CEREEA ERP ER eRe EAS 3 7 User Account SOcHrIty dao eese ace atte Mae sean Pate a alee 3 8 Security Consistency Checklist 0 00 eee 3 8 Device Securty obse occu Tart Nanana Ge i eae Rare abes 3 9 Edit Security Dialog 232 x cat ER eee eked esed 3 10 Creating a Security Set 0 0 0 eee 3 11 Create Security Group Dialog 0 000 eee eee 3 12 Creating a Security Group a 3 12 Create Security Group Member Dialog 3 13 Creating a Security Group Member a 3 15 Editing the Security Configuration on a Switch 3 16 Viewing Properties of a Security Set Group or Member 3 17 Using the Security Config Dialog 3 17 Archiving a Security Configuration to a File 3 18 Activating a Security Sel 1s Ama PAA REOR EP 3 18 Deactivating a Security Set 3 18 Configured Security Data Window aa 3 19 Active Security Data Window llle sess 3 19 59097 02 B Page iv XX LOGIC SANbox 5600 Series Switch Management User
129. Selecta security set group or member open the Edit menu and select Properties W Inthe graphic window right click on the security item and select Properties from the popup menu 3 View the security information for the selected item in the Properties dialog 3 2 4 9 Using the Security Config Dialog Use the Security Config dialog shown in Figure 3 8 to save the active security configuration on the switch to non volatile or to temporary memory and to require the domain ID of a switch be validated before attaching to the fabric Security Config Auto Save Fabric Binding Enabled Figure 3 8 Security Config Dialog To configure security on the switch do the following 1 Onthe faceplate display open the Security menu and select Edit Security Config to open the Security Config dialog 2 Check the Auto Save check box to enable default or disable Auto Save mode If enabled the security configuration is saved to non volatile memory on the switch If disabled the security file is saved only to temporary memory The Auto Save feature is used when Fabric Binding is enabled When Auto Save is disabled any updates from remote switches will not be saved locally If the local switch is reset it may isolate 59097 02 B 3 17 3 Managing Fabrics XX Securing a Fabric QLOGIC AA NY 3 Check the Fabric Binding Enabled check box to require the expected domain ID of a switch is verified before being allowed to
130. Series area In the Operating System column click the Linux link Click the SANsurfer Management Software link to open the File Download dialog Enter a path name to save the sansurfer_linux_install bin file and click the Save button Open a terminal window for the directory in which the sansurfer_linux_install bin file was saved and make the file executable chmod x sansurfer_linux_install bin Execute the install program and follow the installation instructions sansurfer_linux_install bin When the installation is complete start SANsurfer Management Suite using the SANsurfer file in the installation directory Click the Switch tab from the left pane to open SANsurfer Switch Manager From the Help menu select About and make note of the release version number Close SANsurfer Management Suite 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager Installing the Management Application o 9 9 9 7 E aaa 2 2 2 3 10 11 12 13 15 To ensure that you are using the most recent version of SANsurfer Switch Manager visit the QLogic support web page and go to Drivers Software and Manuals a Select your switch model from the pull down menu Locate the description for SANsurfer Switch Manager for Linux under Management Software b Ifthe release version number 5 00 xx is greater than what is currently installed on your workstation down load the new version and proceed to step 11 Other
131. T 4 17 A 47 restore factory defaults 4 40 selecting 2 25 services A 47 A 84 A 118 stack 4 35 status 2 24 Switch data window 4 8 symbolic name port 5 14 switch 4 19 syslog 4 31 system configuration change A 87 defaults A 53 display A 118 System Fault LED 4 45 system services 4 27 Index 8 59097 02 B XX LOGIC SANbox 5600 Series Switch Management User s Guide ls T Telnet service 4 28 A 84 session timeout A 87 Test command A 123 testing ports 5 17 time 4 16 A 23 time zone A 63 timeout Admin session A 87 Telnet session A 87 values 4 26 tool bar standard 2 21 zoning 3 45 topology display arrange icons 2 25 data windows 2 26 description 2 18 usage 2 24 transceiver status 5 4 transmission speed 5 12 trap authentication 4 33 community 4 33 configuration 4 34 SNMP version 4 34 U upgrade 4 42 A 24 Uptime command A 126 user logged in A 99 59097 02 B user account add A 127 admin A 2 admin account A 2 create 4 3 default 4 2 delete A 127 display A 127 edit A 127 list A 127 modify 4 6 password 4 5 remove 4 4 security 3 8 User command A 127 V version 2 17 version snapshot compare 3 21 export 3 22 save 3 21 Virtual Interface preference routing A 66 W web applet A 85 enable A 88 service 4 27 Whoami command A 130 wizard configuration 4 18 extended credit 5 15 zoning 3 43 working directory 2 16 5 23 status indicator 2 23 workstation requirements 2 2 write community 4 3
132. To download this file open an FTP session log in with account name password of images for both and type get configdata Refer to Backing up and Restoring Switch Configurations on page A 4 cancel Terminates the current configuration edit session without saving changes that were made copy config source config destination Copies the configuration given by config source to the configuration given by config destination The switch supports up to 10 configurations including the default configuration delete config name Deletes the configuration given by config name from the switch You cannot delete the default configuration Default Config nor the active configuration A Command Line Interface XX Config Command QLOGIC AA NN edit config name Opens an edit session for the configuration given by config name If you omit config name the currently active configuration is used list Displays a list of all available configurations on the switch This keyword does not require an admin session restore Restores configuration settings to an out of band switch from a backup file named configdata which must be first uploaded on the switch using FTP You create the backup file using the Config Backup command Use FTP to load the backup file on a switch then enter the Config Restore command After the restore is complete the switch automatically resets Refer to Backing up and Restoring Switch Co
133. To install firmware do the following 4 15 1 2 In the faceplate display open the Switch menu and select Load Firmware In the Firmware Upload dialog click the Browse button to browse and select the firmware file to be uploaded Click the Start button to begin the firmware load process You will be shown a message warning you that the switch will be reset in order to activate the firmware SANsurfer Switch Manager prompts you to activate the new firmware using a hot non disruptive reset if possible Click the OK button to reset the switch and activate the new firmware Displaying Hardware Status To display a summary of the hardware status information in a popup text box rest the cursor over the chassis LED cluster in the faceplate display 59097 02 B Input Power LED indicates the voltage status of the switch Heartbeat LED indicates the status of the internal switch processor and the results of the POST System Fault LED indicates an over temperature condition or a Power On Self Test error cr Figure 4 19 Hardware Status LEDs 4 45 4 Managing Switches XKX Displaying Hardware Status QLOGIC E A Notes 4 46 59097 02 B Section 5 Managing Ports This section describes the following tasks that manage ports and devices Displaying Port Information Configuring Ports Using the Extended Credits Wizard Resetting a Port Testing Ports Graphing Port Performance 5 1 Displaying P
134. UPC Ehe odi sioe dones 4 19 4 7 2 1 Symbolic Name x x em pr E Ge beat Serge re 4 19 4 7 2 2 Switch Administrative States llli a 4 20 4 7 2 3 Domain ID and Domain ID Lock 200 4 21 4 7 2 4 Fabric Device Management Interface 4 22 4 7 2 5 Broadcast Support 1 251 6 Nag is NAG NG etu Da PPL AGANG 4 23 4 7 2 6 In band Management 2 e she x me RR PINANG mdr ee 4 23 4 7 3 Advanced Switch Properties mee ee ene RELY ESOS 4 24 4 7 3 1 Interop Mode for ZONING s oio cep e C SERO an RU 4 25 4 7 3 2 Legacy Port Address Format a 4 25 4 7 3 3 Timeout Valu6s i abo BAKA eR PLANO LEAR OS DAA RE 4 26 4 7 4 System Services Dialog AA 4 27 4 7 5 Security Consistency Checklist Dialog 4 28 4 7 6 Network Properties tai ce eT EE KNANG RR QUEORESME SS EI 4 29 4 7 6 1 IP Config ration co A costs etes NA ents Ame ost d cad BA dang 4 30 4 7 6 2 Remote Eoggllig oen tuns BEER i ee aa 4 31 4 7 6 3 NTP CIA UTERE 4 31 4 7 SNMP Properties xe eo os eae POSE ee ee RACES 4 32 4 7 1 1 SNMP Configuration anaana anaa 4 33 4 7 1 2 SNMP Trap Configuration n s anaa aaae 4 34 4 8 Managing Switch Stacks 2 4 2144 der E RR EE d 4 35 4 8 1 Syslog ong Leste org me Hte eda seeded ated inves Han du 4 36 4 8 2 Select Source Dialog 0 REESE RT Ru EH PE ad EE 4 37 4 9 Archiving a SWIEOID sons eio dde t EX ce Eee e dude qi CH e Vo d S 4 37 4 10 Hestorng d OWING s sido o tO os tue ae
135. Viewer opens with a blue fabric icon displayed in the fabric tree Fabric status is displayed in text format after the fabric name in the fabric tree The color of the icon indicates the current connection status as normal green warning yellow critical red or unmanageable blue SANsurfer Performance Viewer nf x File Fabric Graph Window Help 5 Lah a 2 Add Remove Help Fabric 9 Fabric 1 um Sw Em SW2 Em SW3 E sw potes ff Dj EET j 2 swe port 12 zu BI Figure 5 5 Fabric View Graphs 59097 02 B 5 19 5 Managing Ports XX Graphing Port Performance QLOGIC AA NN This section describes how to do the following Starting SANsurfer Performance Viewer Exiting SANsurfer Performance Viewer Saving and Opening Performance View Files Changing the Default Performance View File Encryption Key Setting SANsurfer Performance Viewer Preferences Setting the Polling Frequency Displaying Graphs for a Switch Printing Graphs Saving Graph Statistics to a File 5 6 1 Starting SANsurfer Performance Viewer To start SANsurfer Performance Viewer from within SANsurfer Switch Manager open the topology display and select Start Performance Viewer from the Fabric menu When starting the SANsurfer Performance Viewer application from the SANsurfer Switch Manager application on Linux and Solaris platforms the fabric currently displayed in the SANsurfer Switch Manager topology displa
136. Visibility Temperature Security Auto Save Security Fabric Binding Enable Fan 1 Status Fan 2 Status Power Supply 1 Status Power Supply 2 Status Beacon Status Broadcast Support In band Enabled Temperature Failure Port Shutdown Warning Temperature Failure Temperature NTP Client Enabled NTP Server Address FDMI HBA Entry Limit Zoning visibility status Permits All or prevents None communication between attached devices in the absence of an active zone set Internal switch temperature C N A does not apply to this switch N A does not apply to this switch The status of Fan 1 SANbox 5602 only The status of Fan 2 SANbox 5602 only Power supply 1 status Power supply 2 status SANbox 5602 only Beacon status Switch LEDs are blinking On or not off Broadcast support status Broadcast support is enabled or disabled default In band management status Permits True or prevents False a switch from being managed over an ISL Non configurable always enabled for this switch All ports are downed when the switch temperature exceeds the Failure Temperature Non configurable temperature threshold 65 Celsius above which a warning condition alarm is generated Non configurable temperature threshold 70 Celsius above which a failure condition alarm is generated Enabled or disabled Allows for switches to synchronize their time a centralized server The IP address of the centr
137. XX QLOGIC Simplify SANbox 5600 Series Switch Managment User s Guide Firmware Version 5 0 59097 02 B Pagei SANbox 5600 Series po Switch Management User s Guide QLOGIC AA NN Information furnished in this manual is believed to be accurate and reliable However QLogic Corporation assumes no responsibility for its use nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use QLogic Corporation reserves the right to change product specifications at any time without notice Applications described in this document for any of these products are for illustrative purposes only QLogic Corporation makes no representation nor warranty that such applications are suitable for the specified use without further testing or modification QLogic Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document This product is covered by one or more of the following patents 6697359 other patents pending QLogic SANbox SANsurfer SANblade SANsurfer Switch Manager and SANsurfer Management Suite are trademarks or registered trademarks of QLogic Corporation Java and Solaris are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc Gnome is a trademark of the GNOME Foundation Corporation Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Mac OS X and Safari are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc Microsoft Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows 2003 and Internet Explorer are trademark
138. a Selected Graph The Rescale Selected Graph option auto scales downward and re positions the data within a graphic window to display all new data captured by the graph To rescale a selected graph do the following 1 Select a displayed graph 2 Open the Graph menu and select Rescale Selected Graph or right click on the graph and select Rescale from the popup menu 3 View the data in the graph window 5 6 8 Printing Graphs To print a graph select a graph then open the File menu and select Print Graph Window You can also right click on a graph and select Print Graph Window from the popup menu 5 6 9 Saving Graph Statistics to a File Statistics for one or all graphs can be saved to a file that can be opened with a spreadsheet application To save a graph statistics file do the following 1 Select a graph 2 Open the File menu and select Save Current Graph Statistics to a File to save the selected graph or select Save All Graph Statistics to a File You can also right click on a graph and select Save Statistics to File 3 Inthe Save dialog enter a path name for the file By default the file is saved in the working directory 4 Click the Save button 5 28 59097 02 B Appendix A Command Line Interface The command line interface CLI enables you to perform a variety of fabric and switch management tasks through an Ethernet or a serial port connection This section describes the following W Logging On to a Switc
139. a device login Diagnostics Prepares port for testing and prevents the port from accepting a device login Down Disables the port 59097 02 B Ed 5 Managing Ports XKX Configuring Ports QLOGIC AA NN 5 2 2 Changing Port Speeds The 1 2 4 Gbps ports are capable of transmitting and receiving at 1 Gbps 2 Gbps or 4 Gbps The ports can be configured for either transmission speed or to sense the transmission speed of the device to which it is connected Table 5 8 describes the port speeds To change the port speed do the following 1 Select one or more 1 2 4 Gbps ports in the faceplate display 2 Open the Port menu and select Port Properties 3 Click the radio button that corresponds to the port speed you want 4 Click the OK button to write the new port speed to the switch Table 5 8 Port Speeds State Description Auto Detect Matches the transmission speed of the connected device This is the default 1Gbps Sets the transmission speed to 1 Gbps 2Gbps Sets the transmission speed to 2 Gbps 4Gbps Sets the transmission speed to 4 Gbps 10Gbps Sets the transmission speed to 10 Gbps 5 12 59097 02 B XKX 5 Managing Ports QLOGIC Configuring Ports o 9 9 9 7 aaa 5 2 3 Changing Port Types The ports can be configured to self discover the proper type to match the device or switch to which it is connected Table 5 9 describes the port types To change the port type do
140. a ote eerie ea QU naba a art are A 2 Working with Switch Configurations 00000 eee ee eee A 2 Modifying a Configuration 0 0000 eee A 3 Backing up and Restoring Switch Configurations A 4 Commands ees aeter ae AA Soy sae d mete Apn A 6 Admin Command sas aeu odes dani PN iter eet PR re es eS A 8 Alias COMMUN AME nae na aie dt NA el Napa an OU OF Malet Na a BANA rs A 9 CIM Command aklan KNB eee Shas P Vo RT t ard A 11 ClMListener Commands oo244 42 t enh GNG tube seeing wea EX A 13 CIMSubscription Command 000 e eee eee A 15 Contig COMMANG x eds bed NG esae eu eee ty Said eee Ng A 17 Create Command e x seit an Got Ce ORO oe OEC DAD EB FU ceat A 20 Date Command em KALABAW DA XXE pep Pg c E dd A 23 Feature Command kaa KA Ia nS SERE AURI a EP Le E A 24 Firmware Install Command cece eee A 25 Group Command era ERE ER EOPERCnS Rurruhd equ oes A 26 Hardreset Command aeree eunt reg belie ds ee e Rr A 34 Help Command Te Ala e bios tt Ba oa A end ET pa no Mee A 35 History Command 5o e Redon ee het eee eS UE RS A 36 Hotreset Command ciue opu cd sucre Baa a A 37 Image Command exe rre eme ERR GERE RERO PES A 38 Lip Command esos erepta Rx tes eee SO ERU RI A 41 Passwd COMMANG osuere ER uA oe oe te id Moe Bst c A 42 Ping Command sce eec be obe e Pod aie obs A 43 PS Command sia incus daa BANG ANG KANA Ka ho eee Ae des A 44 Quit Command ains aie s uS S cv HE ERR ES A 45 Reset Command
141. abrics XX Displaying Fabric Information QLOGIC AA NY 3 5 Displaying Fabric Information The topology display is your primary tool for monitoring a fabric The graphic window of the topology display provides status information for switches inter switch links and the Ethernet connection to the management workstation The data window tabs show device switch and active zone set information The Active Zoneset tab shows the zone definitions for the active zone set Refer to Devices Data Window on page 3 34 and Switch Data Window on page 4 8 for information about the Devices and Switch data windows 3 28 59097 02 B XKX 3 Managing Fabrics QLOGIC Displaying Fabric Information ls 3 5 1 Fabric Status The fabric updates the topology and faceplate displays by forwarding changes in status to the management workstation as they occur You can allow the fabric to update the display status or you can refresh the display at any time To refresh the topology display do one of the following m Click the Refresh button WB Open the View menu and select Refresh B Press the F5 key a Right click anywhere in the background of the topology display and select Refresh Fabric from the popup menu The topology display uses switch and status icons to provide status information about switches inter switch links and the Ethernet connection The switch status icons displayed on the left side of a switch vary in shape and color
142. added the switch will be reset Do you want to continue with license upgrade procedure y n n y Alarm Msg day mon date time year A1005 0030 SM Upgrading Licensed Ports to 20 The following is an example of the Feature Log command SANbox xxxx 5 feature log Mfg Feature Log Switch Licensed for 8 ports Customer Feature Log 1 day month date time year Switch Licensed for 20 ports 1 LCVXOWUNOJBE6 A 24 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC A Command Line Interface Firmware Install Command ls Firmware Install Command Authority Syntax Examples Downloads firmware from a remote host to the switch installs the firmware then resets the switch without a power on self test to activate the firmware This reset is disruptive To perform a non disruptive firmware installation refer to the Image Command on page A 38 The command prompts you for the following m P address of the remote host WB An account name and password on the remote host W Pathname for the firmware image file Admin firmware install The following is an example of the Firmware Install command SANbox xxxx admin 5 firmware install Warning Installing new firmware requires a switch reset Continuing with this action will terminate all management sessions including any Telnet sessions When the firmware activation is complete you may log in to the switch again Do you want to continue y n y Press q and the ENTER key to abort t
143. address 4 Enter the following account name and password user images password images 5 Activate binary mode and copy the firmware image file on the switch ftp gt bin ftp gt put filename 6 Wait for the transfer to complete then close the FTP session xxxxx bytes sent in xx secs ftp gt quit 7 Establish communications with the switch using the CLI Enter one of the following on the command line telnet XXX XXX XXX XXX or telnet switchname where xxx xxx xxx xxx is the switch IP address and switchname is the switch name associated with the IP address 8 A Telnet window opens prompting you for a login Enter an account name and password The default account name and password are admin password 9 Open an Admin session to acquire the necessary authority SANbox xxxx gt admin start 10 Display the list of firmware image files on the switch to confirm that the file was loaded SANbox xxxx admin gt image list 59097 02 B A 39 A Command Line Interface XX Image Command QLOGIC AA NY 11 Unpack the firmware image file to install the new firmware in flash memory SANbox xxxx admin gt image unpack filename 12 Wait for the unpack to complete image unpack command result Passed 13 A message will prompt you to reset the switch to activate the firmware Resetting the switch is disruptive Use the Hotreset command to attempt a non disruptive activation SANbox xxxx admin gt hotreset Example
144. ae 3 41 Zoning Database i e swe eid eee ee Ke ee EN ee 3 42 Using the Zoning Wizards iss actus Phan NA Rad ADD Ae ERR oe 3 43 Managing the Zoning Database 0a 3 44 Editing the Zoning Database 0 3 44 Configuring the Zoning Database 3 47 Saving the Zoning Database to a File 3 48 Restoring the Zoning Database from a File 3 48 Restoring the Default Zoning Database 3 49 Removing All Zoning Definitions a 3 49 Managing Zone Sels Ji 52 nalew hada a nbek3 RA emis RUE REA 3 50 Creating a Zone Set csse gael bbe PERIX vea ES 3 50 Activating and Deactivating a Zone Set 3 51 Copying a Zone to a Zone Set 3 51 Removing a Zone from a Zone Set or from All Zone Sets 3 51 Removing a Zone Sel i canis Resp E FR eee ales 3 52 Managing ZONES sc ito na ace hae sra aces dido p aea a ote in 3 52 Creating a Zone in a Zone Set a 3 53 Adding Zone Members s ke ae ERR RR 3 54 Renaming a Zone or a Zone Set 3 55 Removing a Zone Member 22 eee 3 55 Removing a Zone from a Zone Set 3 55 Removing a Zone from All Zone Sets 3 55 Changing Zone Types os ea Rx eR REED 3 56 Managing Aliases 2 939 Msc e Oto dioses as e d ud dung 3 56 Creating anas a damas dias corn E odere Rous 3 56 Adding a Member to
145. agebreak state Specifies how much information is displayed on the screen at a time according to the value given by state This keyword does not require an admin session state can be one of the following on Limits the display of information to 20 lines at a time The page break functions affects the following commands Alias List Members Show Alarm Log Zone List Members Zoneset List Zones Zoning Active List off Allows continuous display of information without a break port option Sets port state and speed for the specified port The previous Set Config Port settings are restored after a switch reset or a reactivation of a switch configuration Refer to the Set Port Command on page A 80 setup option Changes SNMP and system configuration settings Refer to the Set Setup Command on page A 82 switch state Changes the administrative state for all ports on the switch to the state given by state The previous Set Config Switch settings are restored after a switch reset or a reactivation of a switch configuration state can be one of the following online Places all ports online offline Places all ports offline diagnostics Prepares all ports for testing 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Set Command ls timezone Specifies the time zone for the switch and the workstation The default is Universal Time UTC also known as Greenwich Mean Time GMT This keyword
146. ager will change the port state 4 Enter the frame count frame size and click a test pattern radio button You may use the default pattern or enter an 8 digit pattern hex For online test you can check the Terminate Test Upon Error check box if you want the test to stop should it encounter an error 5 Click the Start Test button to begin the test The Test Results area displays the test status number of frames sent and number of errors found 6 Totest another port open the Select Port pull down menu and select another port number and test type Internal External or Online in the Test Selection area 7 Click the Start Test button to begin the next test Observe the results in the Test Results area 5 18 59097 02 B XKX 5 Managing Ports QLOGIC Graphing Port Performance ls 5 6 Graphing Port Performance SANsurfer Performance Viewer application displays port performance using graphs SANsurfer Performance Viewer plots data communication rates and total errors for selected ports as shown in Figure 5 5 When graphing data communication rates you can choose either frames second or KB second On Solaris platforms if you launch the SANsurfer Performance Viewer application from the SANsurfer Switch Manager application and SANsurfer Performance Viewer can not connect to the fabric for example if you have reached the maximum number of SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions on the entry switch then SANsurfer Performance
147. al causes the switch to attempt to re establish the link If the link is not re established a link failure is counted A link reset is performed after a link failure Number of device logins Number of device logouts A two 2 second timeout as specified by FC AL 2 Number of synchronization losses 5100 ms detected by this port A loss of synchronization is detected by receipt of an invalid transmission word Primitive sequence errors detected Number of link reset primitives received from an attached device Number of offline sequences received An OLS is issued for link initialization a Receive amp Recognize Not Operational NOS state or to enter the offline state Total number of errors detected Number of loop initialization primitive frames received by this port Number of loop initialization primitive frames transmitted by this port A 96 59097 02 B XKX A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Show Command o 9 9 9 7 aaa Table A 27 Show Port Parameters Continued Entry Description TotalLinkResets Total number of link reset primitives TotalOfflineSeq Total number of Offline Sequences issued and received by this port TotalRxFrames Total number of frames received by this port TotalRxWords Total number of words received by this port TotalTxFrames Total number of frames issued by this port TotalTxWords Total number of words issued by this port TxLinkR
148. alized NTP server Ethernet connection to NTP server is required Maximum number of HBAs that can be registered with a switch 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 4 Managing Switches Displaying Switch Information I aaa 59097 02 B Table 4 2 Switch Data Window Entries Continued Entry Description FDMI Enable Number of Donor Groups Embedded GUI Inactivity Timeout GUI Mgmt Enabled Telnet Enabled SSH Enabled SSL Enabled CIM Enabled FTP Enabled Management Server Enabled Fabric Device Management Interface status If enabled device information can be obtained managed and saved through the fabric using Name Service Management Server functions SANsurfer Switch Manager will report any and all FDMI information reported by the entry switch if FDMI is enabled on the entry switch Refer to Display ing Detailed Device Information on page 3 36 for infor mation about displaying FDMI information Total number of donor port groups A donor group is a set of 1 2 4 Gbps only ports on a switch that can donate buffer credits to each other SANsurfer Switch Manager web applet status Enables or disables the web applet on the switch Number of minutes the switch waits before terminating an idle command line interface session Zero 0 disables the time out threshold Switch management application status If disabled the switch cannot be managed using the application Telnet client stat
149. alling and using switch management tools 1 2 Related Materials Refer to the following manuals for information about switch hardware and installation B SANbox 5600 Series Fibre Channel Switch Installation Guide publication number 59096 02 1 3 JDOM License This product includes software developed by the JDOM Project http www jdom org Copyright C 2000 2002 Brett McLaughlin amp Jason Hunter All rights reserved 59097 02 B s 1 Introduction XX JDOM License QLOGIC E 9 9 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the disclaimer that follows these conditions in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The name JDOM must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact license jdom org 4 Products derived from this software may not be called JDOM nor may JDOM appear in their name without prior written permission from the JDOM Project Management pm jdom org In addition we request but do not require that you include in the end user docum
150. alog to change the following switch configuration parameters W Timeout values W Interop mode for zoning B Legacy port address format Advanced Switch Properties World Wide Name 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 82 3b First Port Address 640000 Operational State online Firmware Version v5 0 0 12 14 Symbolic Name Switch MAC address 00 c0 dd 00 82 3a IP Address 10 20 10 24 Timeout Values Interop Mode R A TOV 10000 Interop Mode Standard Interop 1 E D TOV 2000 ox cose Hep Figure 4 10 Advanced Switch Properties Dialog 4 24 59097 02 B XX LOGIC 4 Managing Switches Configuring a Switch I aaa 4 7 3 1 Interop Mode for Zoning 4 7 3 2 When a zone set is activated on an FC SW 2 compliant switch only the active zone set is propagated to all switches in the fabric When a zone set is activated on a non FC SW 2 compliant switch the active zone set and all inactive zone sets the entire zoning database stored in permanent memory are propagated to all switches in the fabric Use the Standard option for FC SW 2 compliant switches to propagate only the active zone set to all switches in the fabric Use the Interop 1 parameter for non FC SW 2 compliant switches to propagate the active zone set and all inactive zone sets to all switches in the fabric Legacy Port Address Format 59097 02 B Legacy Address Format should be enabled only to permit interoperation with certain older non FC SW 2
151. alse False AutoSave True False True Finished configuring attributes This configuration must be saved see config save command and activated see config activate command before it can take effect To discard this configuration use the config cancel command The following is an example of the Set Config Switch command SANbox xxxx gt admin start SANbox xxxx admin 5 config edit SANbox xxxx admin config 5 set config switch A list of attributes with formatting and default values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so AdminState 12Online 2 Offline 3 Diagnostics Online BroadcastEnabled True False True InbandEnabled True False True FDMIEnabled True False True FDMIEntries decimal value 0 1000 1000 DefaultDomainID decimal value 1 239 2 DomainIDLock True False False SymbolicName string max 32 chars SANbox R_A_TOV decimal value 100 100000 msec 10000 E_D_TOV decimal value 10 20000 msec 2000 PrincipalPriority decimal value 1 255 254 ConfigDescription string max 64 chars Default Config InteropMode O Standard 1 Interop_1 Standard 59097 02 B A 73 A Command Line Interface Set Config Command XX QLOGIC AA NY The following is an example of the Set Config Threshold command SANbox xxxx
152. ame soft zone automatically discover and communicate freely with all other members of the same zone The soft zone boundary is not secure traffic across soft zones can occur if addressed correctly Soft zones that include members from multiple switches need not include the ports of the inter switch links Soft zone boundaries yield to ACL zone boundaries Soft zones can overlap that is a device can participate in more than one soft zone Zone membership can be defined by Fibre Channel address domain ID and port number World Wide Name or a combination Soft zoning supports all port types 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 3 Managing Fabrics Zoning a Fabric ls 3 7 1 1 2 Access Control List Hard Zones 3 7 1 2 Aliases 3 7 1 3 Zone Sets 59097 02 B Access Control List ACL zoning divides the fabric for purposes of controlling discovery and inbound traffic ACL zoning is a type of hard zoning that is hardware enforced This type of zoning is useful for controlling access to certain devices without totally isolating them from the fabric Devices can communicate with each other and transmit outside the ACL zone but cannot receive inbound traffic from outside the zone The ACL zone boundary is secure against inbound traffic ACL zones can overlap that is a port can be a member of more than one ACL zone ACL zones that include members from multiple switches need not include the ports of the inter switch links ACL zone boundaries super
153. anager web applet The web applet enables you to point at a switch with an internet browser and run SANsurfer Switch Manager through the browser This parameter is the master control for the Set Setup System command parameter EmbeddedGUlEnabled The default is True SNMPEnabled Enables True or disables False the management of the switch through third party applications that use the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP This parameter is the master control for the Set Setup SNMP command parameter SNMPEnabled The default is True NTPEnabled Enables True or disables False the Network Time Proto col NTP which allows the synchronizing of switch and workstation dates and times with an NTP server This helps to prevent invalid SSL certificates and timestamp confusion in the event log The default is False This parameter is the master control for the Set Setup System command param eter NT PClientEnabled The default is False CIMEnabled Enables True or disables False the management of the switch through third party applications that use the Com mon Information Model CIM The default is True FTPEnabled Enables True or disables False the File Transfer Proto col FTP for transferring files rapidly between the worksta tion and the switch The default is True MgmtServerEnabled Enables True or disables False the management of the switch through third party applications that use GS 3 Man agement Server MS Th
154. andard this parameter enables True or disables False the saving of changes to active zone set in the switch s permanent memory Refer to InteropMode on page A 68 The default is True Disabling the Autosave parameter can be useful to prevent the propagation of zoning information when experimenting with dif ferent zoning schemes However leaving the Autosave parame ter disabled can disrupt device configurations should a switch have to be reset For this reason the Autosave parameter should be enabled in a production environment DefaultVisibility Enables All or disables None communication among the switch s ports devices and the fabric in the absence of an active zone set The default is All Discardlnactive Enables True or disables False the discarding of all inactive zone sets from that zoning database Inactive zone sets are all zone sets except the active zone set The default is False A 70 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Set Config Command aaa Examples The following is an example of the Set Config Port command SANbox xxxx 5 admin start SANbox xxxx admin 5 config edit SANbox xxxx admin config 5 set config port 1 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list lot press q or Q and the ENTER
155. arameters Table A 19 Security Configuration Parameters Parameter Description AutoSave Enables True or disables False the saving of changes to active security set in the switch s permanent memory The default is True FabricBindingEnabled Enables True or disables False the configuration and enforcement of fabric binding on all switches the fabric Fabric binding associates switch worldwide names with a domain ID in the creation of ISL groups switch Initiates an editing session in which to change switch configuration settings The system displays each parameter one line at a time and prompts you for a value For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets Table A 20 describes the Set Config Switch parameters Table A 20 Set Config Switch Parameters Parameter Description AdminState Switch administrative state online offline or diag nostics The default is Online BroadcastEnabled Broadcast Enables True or disables False for warding of broadcast frames The default is True 59097 02 B A 67 A Command Line Interface Set Config Command AA NN Table A 20 Set Config Switch Parameters Continued A 68 XX QLOGIC Parameter Description InbandEnabled Inband management Enables True or disables False the ability to manage the switch over an ISL The default is True FDMIEnabled Fabric Device Mo
156. arm is not cleared after three consecutive sample windows Generate rising Generate rising trigger alarm trigger alarm eligibility ends eligibility ends Rising Event Trigger Count 4 Falling Generate falling Trigger trigger alarm eligibility is reset Sample Window Figure 4 8 Port Threshold Alarm Example 7 Enter a sample window in seconds The sample window defines the period of time in which to count events 8 Repeat steps 3 through 7 for each alarm you want to configure or enable 9 Click the OK button to save all changes 4 4 Paging a Switch You can use the beacon feature to page a switch The beacon feature causes all Logged In LEDs to flash making it easier to recognize To page a switch open the Switch menu in the faceplate display and enable the Toggle Beacon selection To cancel the beacon reselect Toggle Beacon 59097 02 B 4 Managing Switches XX Setting the Date Time and Enabling NTP Client QLOGIC AA NY 4 5 Setting the Date Time and Enabling NTP Client 4 6 The Date Time and Network Time Protocol NTP dialog enables you to manually set the date and time on a switch or to enable the NTP Client to synchronize the date and time on the switch with an NTP server Enabling the NTP client ensures the consistency of date and time stamps in alarms and log entries An Ethernet connection to an NTP server is required When date time is set or displayed in the firmware it is always in Universal Time Howev
157. as from all zones do the following 1 Inthe Zone Sets tree in the Edit Zoning dialog select the alias to be removed 2 Open the Edit menu and select Remove Alias from All Zones 3 Click the Yes button in the Remove dialog 59097 02 B 3 57 3 Managing Fabrics XKX Zoning a Fabric QLOGIC AA NN 3 7 7 Merging Fabrics and Zoning 3 7 7 1 If you join two fabrics with an inter switch link the active zone sets from the two fabrics attempt to merge automatically The fabrics may consist of a single switch or many switches already connected together The switches in the two fabrics attempt to create a new active zone set containing the union of each fabric s active zone set The propagation of zoning information only affects the active zone set not the configured zone sets unless Interop Auto Save is turned on Zone Merge Failure 3 58 If a zone merge is unsuccessful the inter switch links between the fabrics will isolate due to a zone merge failure which will generate an alarm The reason for the E Port isolation can also be determined by viewing the port information Refer to Port Information Data Window on page 5 8 and the Show Command on page A 92 Port keyword A zone merge will fail if the two active zone sets have member zones with identical names that differ in membership or type For example consider Fabric A and Fabric B each with a soft zone named ZN1 in its active zone set Fabric A ZN1 co
158. ate image for each switch in the stack In the fabric tree left pane of the faceplate display the switches in each stack are nested under the stack icon which is nested under the fabric icon Expanding the fabric and stack icons in the fabric tree displays all switches in a stack The lock image on the fabric icon indicates that the application is communicating with the fabric through a secure Secure Sockets Layer connection File Fabric Stack Zoning Wizards View Help Rage Mea XX Add Open Save Refresh Events Zoning Security Help QLOGIC Switch Stack 1 9 Q Fabric 1 O Normal 9 B Stack1 F B ma Switch1 Switch1 ma Switch2 Normal ma Switch3 B Stack2 Switch2 e Normal Switch3 w5 tot tat tot tot to trt EFE eee ERE te normal ESESENES ESESESES ESESESES GL a e cu IN Field Switch1 Switch2 Switch3 First Port Address 040000 030000 050000 World Wide Name 10 00 00 00 dd 03 da 66 10 00 00 c0 dd 03 da 92 10 00 00 00 dd 03 da 94 a Serial Number 0423A00003 0424400191 0424400194 Reason for Status Normal Normal Normal User Name admin admin admin Login Level Super user Super user Super user Super User True True True User Authentication Enabled True True True L Vendor Company Company Company E 117777777 Devices Switch StackLinks Port Stats Portinfo Configured Zonesets Configured Security Active Security utem Figure 4 14
159. atically displayed on the screen using the Display keyword Alarms are always displayed on the screen Admin session set log archive clear component filter_list display filter level filter port port_list restore save start default stop archive Collects all log entries and stores the result in new file named ogfile that is maintained in switch memory where it can be downloaded using FTP To download logfile open an FTP session log in with account name password of images for both and type get logfile clear Clears all log entries component filter_list Specifies one or more components given by filter_list to monitor for events A component is a firmware module that is responsible for a particular portion of switch operation Use a lt space gt to delimit values in the list filter_list can be one or more of the following All Monitors all components To maintain optimal switch performance do not use this setting with the Level keyword set to Info Chassis Monitors chassis hardware components such as fans and power supplies 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Set Log Command oo 9 7 aag Eport Monitors all E Ports Mgmtserver Monitors management server status Nameserver Monitors name server status None Monitor none of the component events Other Monitors other miscellaneous events Port Monitors all port events SNMP Monitors all SNMP events Swi
160. ation date and time to the switch certificate creation date and time For this reason it is important to snychronize the workstation and switch with the same date time and time zone If a certificate has not been created by the user the switch will automatically create one Consider your requirements for connection security for the command line interface SSH management applications such as SANsurfer Switch Manager SSL or both If SSL connection security is required also consider using the Network Time Protocol NTP to synchronize workstations and switches 59097 02 B 3 7 3 Managing Fabrics XKX Securing a Fabric QLOGIC AA NN 3 2 2 User Account Security 3 2 3 User account security is the process by which your user account and password are authenticated with the list of valid user accounts and passwords The switch validates your account and password when you attempt to add a fabric using SANsurfer Switch Manager or log in to a switch through Telnet Your system administrator defines accounts passwords and authority levels that are stored on the switch Refer to Managing User Accounts on page 4 2 for more information The Admin account possesses Admin authority which grants full access to all tasks of the SANsurfer Switch Manager menu system The switch validates your user account and SANsurfer Switch Manager grants access to its menus according to your authority level If you do not have Admin authority you are
161. attach to the fabric NOTE The fabric binding feature must be enabled on all switches in the fabric When enabling this feature it is best to set the switch state to offline enable the fabric binding feature on all switches and then set the switch state to online 4 Click the Apply button to save the settings 5 Click the OK button to close the Security Config dialog 3 2 4 10 Archiving a Security Configuration to a File To archive save a security configuration to a file do the following 1 Onthe faceplate display click the Security button on the toolbar or open the Security menu and select Edit Security to open the Edit Security dialog 2 Configure the security settings as desired 3 Open the File menu and select Save As In the Save dialog enter a name and location for the security file xml extension 5 Click the Save button to save the security file 3 2 4 11 Activating a Security Set Only one security set can be active at one time To activate a security set do the following 1 Onthe faceplate display open the Security menu and select Activate Security Set to open the Activate Security Set dialog 2 Inthe Activate Security Set dialog select a security set from the pull down menu 3 Click the Activate button to activate the security set 3 2 4 12 Deactivating a Security Set Only one security set can be active at one time To deactivate an active security set do the following 1 Inthe fac
162. ber Removing a Zone from a Zone Set Removing a Zone from All Zone Sets Changing Zone Types NOTE Changes that you make to the zoning database are limited to the managed switch and do not propagate to the rest of the fabric To distribute changes to configured zone sets fabric wide you must edit the zoning databases on the individual switches 3 52 59097 02 B XKX 3 Managing Fabrics QLOGIC Zoning a Fabric ls 3 7 5 1 Creating a Zone in a Zone Set When a zone is created its zone type is soft To change the zone type to a hard zone refer to Changing Zone Types on page 3 56 for more information Refer to Zones on page 3 40 for information on zone types soft and hard To create a zone in a zone set do the following 1 Open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning dialog Select a zone set 3 Open the Edit menu and select Create a Zone 4 Inthe Create a Zone dialog enter a name for the new zone and click the OK button The new zone name is displayed in the Zone Sets dialog A zone name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters Valid characters are 0 9 A Z a z _ and NOTE _ lf you enter the name of a zone that already exists in the database the SANsurfer Switch Manager application will ask if you would like to add that zone and its membership to the zone set 5 To add switch ports or attached devices to the zone do one of the following E In the z
163. bric If disabled you cannot open a fabric with a non secure connection Preferences Working Directory 9 C Documents and Settings Browse Browser Location n Files Internet Exploreniexplore exe Browse Auto Load and Auto Save Graphing Environment Display dialog when making non secure connections ox cose Hew Figure 5 8 Preferences SANsurfer Performance Viewer 59097 02 B 5 23 5 Managing Ports XX Graphing Port Performance QLOGIC AA NN 5 6 6 Setting the Polling Frequency SANsurfer Performance Viewer updates the graphs once per second by default To change this polling frequency do the following 1 Open the Graph menu and select Set Polling Frequency to open the Set Graph Polling Frequency dialog 2 Enter the new polling interval in seconds 1 60 Performance Viewer will update the graphs once during the interval For example setting the polling frequency to 5 seconds will return 1 second s worth of data every 5 seconds 3 Click the OK button to save the changes 5 6 7 Displaying Graphs for a Switch To display graphs for a switch do the following 1 Openthe Fabric menu and select Add Fabric or click the Add button Enter a fabric name and an IP address in the Add a New Fabric dialog Include an account name and a password if required 2 Setthe graphing options and polling frequency By default SANsurfer Performance Viewer plots total byt
164. bric File Dialog 23x tree Ree RO EE Rem wed 2 13 2 5 Preferences Dialog SANsurfer Switch Manager aa 2 17 2 6 SANsurfer Switch Manager Display Elements a 2 18 2 7 Topology Display Menu s euet Meine ered ate Sale dos fen SARE pne eaten 2 19 2 8 Faceplate Display Men ey eb exer be e e ey E eee 2 20 2 9 Fabie Oea 5 o6 DA BALA e eter fud ce d dtd iU Ro KAO qid Mah 2 22 2 19 Topology DISplay UH a ken set Dp TE P aee RS Rte EE Bee 2 24 ai siacspl DISDIBy s sce mee p S ta ee eee ASIE R UE REN DAE E ai d 2 27 3 1 Add Server 50 5 wees Di eee BETAS he beg GA ene ea GRAN eke Nea p os 3 2 3 2 Remove Servel aa bs ae Se eS Se eae x NODE BUA UU REDE 3 4 3 3 Edit Server Information i es x Em BG see gadget wake ewe dus 3 5 3 4 Modify Authentication Order RADIUS Server Information 3 6 3 5 Edit Security Dialog 7 paaa ake na yaad hd ta BEG qe Gee ke ege da 3 10 3 6 Greate Security Group Dialog isset e eR oe Me PIG eee 3 12 3 7 Create a Security Group Member Dialog 0 eee eee 3 13 3 8 security Config Dialog magana paka a eed b vas he PA hwo ded mee EUER 3 17 3 9 Fabric Version Snapshot Analysis Dialog cece eee eee 3 22 3 10 Add a New Fabric Dialog esr on Sa ee expe eee Re Se Ee Meee ERE 3 23 OPA Events Browser naa a aan ed bis eu uc Ca ee SN MA Ete ae MAU 3 30 3 12 Filter Events Dialog lt s cce sinite bark ee faa weed Rew ERI exe Eae 3 32 3
165. bric Information ls 3 5 4 Active Zone Set Data Window The Active Zoneset data window displays the zone membership for the active zone set that resides on the fabric management switch The active zone set is the same on all switches in the fabric you can confirm this by adding a fabric through another switch and comparing Active Zone Set displays To open the Active Zoneset data window click the Active Zoneset tab below the data window in the topology display Refer to Configured Zonesets Data Windows on page 4 13 for information about the zone set definitions on a particular switch Refer to Zoning a Fabric on page 3 39 for more information about zone sets and zones The Active Zoneset data window shown in Figure 3 13 uses display conventions for expanding and contracting entries that are similar to the fabric tree An entry handle located to the left of an entry in the tree indicates that the entry can be expanded Click this handle or double click the following entries W Azone set entry expands to show its member zones W Azone entry expands to show its member ports devices W Ports devices that are zoned by WWN or FC address but no longer part of the fabric are grayed out amp Topology BEE File Fabric Switch View Help HG ea gm e m 9B Add Open Save Refresh Events Help QLOGIC FC Fabrics 9 Fabric 1 SV Em SW2 SW3 m o3 Tanna m Normal Q9 Zone Sets G ZoneSet zoneset
166. c_Corporation SANsurfer WB For Solaris opt QLogic_Corporation SANsurfer To uninstall the SANsurfer Management Suite application do the following B X For Windows browse for the uninstall program file or the shortcut link that points to the uninstall program file The uninstall program shortcut is in the same folder as the program shortcut Start menu program group on desktop or user specified that is used to start the SANsurfer Management Suite application Double click the uninstall program file or shortcut link and follow the instructions W For Linux execute the link to SANsurferUninstaller install directory UninstallerData SANsurferUninstaller W For Solaris enter the following command and follow the instructions install directory UninstallData SANsurferUninstaller 2 5 2 Standalone Uninstall A program to uninstall SANsurfer Switch Manager was included as part of the SANsurfer Switch Manager installation process Use this method only if you installed SANsurfer Switch Manager as a standalone program The UninstallerData folder in the Install directory contains the uninstall program Uninstall SANsurfer Switch Manager Also a shortcut link to the uninstall program was installed in the installation directory during the SANsurfer Switch Manager installation process The default installation directories are B For Windows C Program FilesQLogic Corporation SANsurfer Switch Manager W ForLlinux opt QLogic Cor
167. ch configurations Only one Admin session can be open on the switch at any time An inactive Admin session will time out after a period of time which can be changed using the Set Setup System command Refer to the Set Setup Command on page A 82 Admin admin start or begin end or stop cancel start or begin Opens the admin session end or stop Closes the admin session The Hardreset Hotreset Logout Shutdown and Reset Switch commands will also end an admin session cancel Terminates an Admin session opened by another user Use this keyword with care because it terminates the Admin session without warning the other user and without saving pending changes Closing a Telnet window during an admin session does not release the session In this case you must either wait for the admin session to time out or use the Admin Cancel command The following example shows how to open and close an Admin session SANbox xxxx 5 admin start SANbox xxxx admin 5 SANbox xxxx admin 4 admin end SANbox xxxx 5 59097 02 B XX LOGIC A Command Line Interface Alias Command ls Alias Command Authority Syntax Keywords 59097 02 B Creates a named set of ports devices Aliases make it easier to assign a set of ports devices to many zones An alias can not have a zone or another alias as a member Admin session for all keywords except List and Members alias add alias member list copy alias_so
168. ch is mandatory If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Group Name Group 1 Group Type ISL Member WWN 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Authentication None Chap None PrimaryHash MD5 SHA 1 MD5 PrimarySecret 32 hex or 16 ASCII char value SecondaryHash MD5 SHA 1 None None SecondarySecret 40 hex or 20 ASCII char value Binding domain ID 1 239 O None 0 Finished configuring attributes To discard this configuration use the security cancel command The following is an example of the Group Edit command SANbox xxxx admin security 5 group edit G1 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 90 a3 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Group Name gi Group Type ISL Group Member 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 90 a3 Authentication None Chap None chap PrimaryHash MD5 SHA 1 MD5 sha 1 PrimarySecret 40 hex or 20 ASCII char value 12345678901234567890 SecondaryHash MD5 SHA 1 None None md5 SecondarySecret 32 hex or 16 ASCII char value 1234567890123456 Binding domain ID 1 239 0 None 3 Finished configuring attributes To discard this configuration use the security cancel command A 32 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC
169. configuring attributes This configuration must be saved see config save command and activated see config activate command before it can take effect To discard this configuration use the config cancel command 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Set Config Command o 9 9 7 aaa The following is an example of the Set Config Zoning command SANbox xxxx 5 admin start SANbox xxxx admin 4 config edit SANbox xxxx admin config 5 set config zoning A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so InteropAutoSave True False True DefaultVisibility All None All DiscardInactive True False False Finished configuring attributes This configuration must be saved see config save command and activated see config activate command before it can take effect To discard this configuration use the config cancel command 59097 02 B A 75 A Command Line Interface XX Set Log Command QLOGIC ee Set Log Command Authority Syntax Keywords A 76 Specifies the events to record in the event log and display on the screen You determine what events to record in the switch event log using the Component Level and Port keywords You determine what events are autom
170. count 4 5 performance graphs 5 24 tuning A 66 Ping command A 43 polling frequency 5 24 Index 5 SANbox 5600 Series Switch Management User s Guide XX QLOGIC ee port administrative state 5 11 A 81 buffer credits 5 15 configuration 5 10 A 64 configuration defaults A 49 configuration display A 107 counters A 80 displaying information 5 1 external test A 123 group A 29 initialize A 46 loopback test A 123 mode 5 2 online test A 123 operational information A 95 operational state 5 3 performance 5 19 A 95 A 115 performance tuning A 66 reset 5 16 selecting 2 28 speed 5 3 5 12 A 80 status 2 28 symbolic name 5 14 test 5 17 type 5 13 view 2 16 2 28 Port Information data window 4 12 5 8 Port Statistics data window 4 12 5 5 port device tree 3 45 power on self test log A 97 preferences Fabric View 5 23 SANsurfer Switch Manager 2 16 principal switch 4 21 processor 2 2 properties network 4 29 4 32 port 5 10 Ps command A 44 Index 6 Q Quit command A 45 R RADIUS See Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS server add 3 2 authentication order 3 6 configuration A 82 configuration display A 118 edit configuration 3 5 remove 3 4 reset A 47 RADIUS server configuration defaults A 52 read community 4 33 refresh 3 29 4 7 Registered State Change Notification 5 14 A 66 Remote Authentication Dial In User Service server 3 1 remote log configuration 4 31 enable A 88 host address A 88 re
171. count name a password authority and an expiration date H A switch can have a maximum of 15 user accounts B Account names are limited to 15 characters passwords must be 8 20 characters W Admin authority grants permission to use the Admin command to open an admin session from which all commands can be entered Without Admin authority you are limited to view only commands WB The expiration date is expressed in the number of days until the account expires 2000 maximum The switch will issue an expiration alarm every day for seven days prior to expiration 0 zero specifies that the account has no expiration date delete account name Deletes the account name given by account name from the switch edit Initiates an edit session that prompts you for the account name for which to change the expiration date and authority list Displays the list of users currently logged in and their session numbers Provides the same function as the Show Users command This keyword is available to all account names without an Admin session A 127 A Command Line Interface XX User Command QLOGIC AA NN Notes Authority level or password changes that you make to an account that is currently logged in do not take effect until that account logs in again Examples The following is an example of the User Accounts command SANbox xxxx admin 5 user accounts Current list of user accounts images admin authority False nev
172. d in Table A 5 Table A 6 and Table A 7 respectively The group name and group type attributes are read only fields common to all three tables Attribute Member Authentication Primary Hash Primary Secret Secondary Hash Secondary Secret Binding Table A 5 ISL Group Member Attributes Description Worldwide name of the switch that would attach to the switch A member cannot belong to more than one group Enables CHAP or disables None authentication using the Chal lenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP The default is None The preferred hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Pri mary Secret sent by the ISL member The hash functions are MD5 or SHA 1 If the ISL member does not support the Primary Hash the Switch will use the Secondary Hash Hexadecimal string that is encrypted by the Primary Hash for authentication with the ISL group member The string has the follow ing lengths depending on the Primary Hash function B MD5 hash 16 byte m SHA 1 hash 20 byte Hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Secondary Secret sent by the ISL group member Hash values are MD5 or SHA 1 The Secondary Hash is used when the Primary Hash is not available on the ISL group member The Primary Hash and the Secondary Hash cannot be the same Hex string that is encrypted by the Secondary Hash and sent for authentication The string has the following lengths depending on the Secondary Hash function
173. d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 21 00 00 e0 8b 02 41 2f wwn_23bd31 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00200 09 23 Db0 31 wwn 221416 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 22 14 16 wwn 2215c3 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 c2 50 06 04 82 bf d2 18 d2 10 00 00 00 c9 22 15 59097 02 B A 141 A Command Line Interface XX Zoning Command QLOGIC E C amp I PV Notes A 142 59097 02 B Glossary Access Control List Zone Access Control List zoning divides the fabric for purposes of controlling discovery and inbound traffic Active Zone Set The zone set that defines the current zoning for the fabric Active Firmware The firmware image on the switch that is in use Activity LED A port LED that indicates when frames are entering or leaving the port Administrative State State that determines the operating state of the port I O blade or switch The configured administrative state is stored in the switch configuration The configured administrative state can be temporarily overridden using the command line interface Alarm A message generated by the switch that specifically requests attention Alarms are generated by several switch processes Some alarms can be configured Alias A named set of ports or devices An alias is not a Zone and can not have a zone or another alias as a member AL PA Arbitrated Loop Physical Address 59097 02 B A
174. data file on your workstation with the switch name and date config_switch_169_ 10112003 for example A 4 59097 02 B XKX A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Working with Switch Configurations I The restore operation begins with FTP to upload the configuration file from the workstation to the switch then finishes with a Telnet session and the Config Restore command To upload the configuration file config switch 169 10112003 in this case open and FTP session with account name images and password images Transfer the file in binary mode with the Put command as shown ftp ip address user images password images ftp bin ftp put config switch 169 10112003 configdata Local file config switch 169 10112003 Remote file configdata ftp quit The restore process replaces all configuration information on the switch and afterwards the switch is automatically reset If the restore process changes the IP address all management sessions are terminated Use the Set Setup System command to return the IP configuration to the values you want Refer to the Set Setup Command on page A 82 To restore the switch open a Telnet session then enter the Config Restore command from within an Admin session as shown SANbox xxxx gt admin start SANbox xxxx admin 5 config restore The switch will be reset after restoring the configuration Please confirm y n n y 59097 02 B A 5 A Command Line Interface XX Commands QLOGIC
175. describing events that occur in the fabric Expansion Port E Port that connects to another FC SW 2 compliant switch Fabric Database The set of fabrics that have been opened during a SANsurfer Switch Manager session Fabric Management Switch The switch through which the fabric is managed Fabric Name User defined name associated with the file that contains user list data for the fabric Fabric Port An F Port Glossary 2 Fabric View File A file containing a set of fabrics that were opened and saved during a previous SANsurfer Switch Manager session Fan Fail LED An LED that indicates that a cooling fan in the switch is operating below standard Flash Memory Memory on the switch that contains the chassis control firmware Force PROM Mode See Maintenance Mode Frame Data unit consisting of a start of frame SOF delimiter header data payload CRC and an end of frame EOF delimiter FRU Field Replaceable Unit Heartbeat LED A chassis LED that indicates the status of the internal switch processor and the results of the Power On Self Test Inactive Firmware The firmware image on the switch that is not in use In band Management The ability to manage a switch through another switch over an inter switch link Initiator The device that initiates a data exchange with a target device 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC SANbox 5600 Series Switch Management User s Guide nn aaa
176. devices that can communicate with each other Devices within a zone can only communicate with other devices in the same zone A device may participate in more than one zone Membership in a zone can be defined by switch domain ID and port number device Fibre Channel address FCID or device World Wide Name WWN B WWN entries define zone membership by the World Wide Name of the attached device With this membership method you can move WWN member devices to different switch ports in different zones without having to edit the member entry as you would with a domain ID port number member Furthermore unlike FCID members WWN zone members are not affected by changes in the fabric that could change the Fibre Channel address of an attached device B FCID entries define zone membership by the Fibre Channel address of the attached device With this membership method you can replace a device on the same port without having to edit the member entry as you would with a WWN member W X Domain ID Port number entries define zone membership by switch domain ID and port number All devices attached to the specified port become members of the zone The specified port must be an F Port or an FL Port Two types of zones are supported m Soft zone W Hard zone Access Control List domain port member only or it will revert back to a soft zone when activated Soft zoning divides the fabric for purposes of controlling discovery Devices within the s
177. dialog select a switch in the topology display or open the faceplate display open the Switch menu and select Network Properties Network Properties SANsurfer Switch Manager World Wide Name 10 00 00 c0 dd 02 c0 54 First Port Address 030000 Operational State online Firmware Version 44 0 0 11 4 Symbolic Name 5w1 MAC Address D0 c0 dd 02 cc 55 IP Configuration Network Discovery static IP Address 10 20 68 194 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 10 20 68 1 CJ Enable Remote Logging syslog Loggin Figure 4 12 Network Properties Dialog 59097 02 B 4 29 4 Managing Switches Configuring a Switch XX QLOGIC ee 4 7 6 1 IP Configuration The IP configuration identifies the switch on the Ethernet network and determines which network discovery method to use Table 4 6 describes the IP configuration parameters Table 4 6 IP Configuration Parameters Parameter Description Network Discov ery IP Address Subnet mask Gateway Choose one of the following methods by which to assign the IP address m Static Uses the IP configuration parameters entered in the Switch Properties dialog m BootP Acquires the IP configuration from a BootP server E RARP Reverse Address Resolution Protocol Acquires the IP address from an RARP server An RARP request is broadcast with up to three retries each at 5 second intervals If no IP address i
178. ding semicolon and comma The default is Port n where n is the port number Arbitration loop fairness Enables True or disables False the switch s priority to arbitrate on the loop The default is False Enables True or disables False the scanning of the con nected device for FC 4 descriptor information during login The default is True Enables False or disables True the immediate transmis sion of RSCN messages when communication between a port and a device is interrupted If enabled the RSCN mes sage is delayed for 200 ms for locally attached devices and 400 ms for devices connected through other switches The default is False This parameter is ignored if OStreamGuard is enabled Send ARB FF True instead of IDLEs False on the loop The default is False Interoperability credit The number of buffer to buffer credits per port 0 means the default 16 is unchanged Changing interoperability credits is necessary only for E Ports that are connected to non FC SW 2 compliant switches Contact your authorized maintenance provider for assistance in using this feature Extended credits The number of port buffer credits that this port can acquire from donor ports The default is 0 Fabric address notification Enables True or disables False the communication of the FL Port address port name and node name to the logged in NL Port The default is True A 65 A Command Line Interface XX Set
179. disables False Secure Shell SSH connections to the switch SSH secures the remote con nection to the switch To establish a secure remote connec tion your workstation must use an SSH client The default is False GUIMgmtEnabled Enables True or disables False out of band manage ment of the switch with SANsurfer Switch Manager the SANsurfer Switch Manager Application Programming Inter face SNMP and CIM If this service is disabled the switch can only be managed inband or through the serial port The default is True SSLMgmtEnabled Enables True or disables False secure SSL connections for management applications including SANsurfer Switch Manager the SANsurfer Switch Manager web applet SANsurfer Switch Manager Application Programming Inter face and the CIM server The default is False m To enable secure SSL connections you must first syn chronize the date and time on the switch and worksta tion m This service must be enabled to authenticate users through a RADIUS server W Enabling SSL automatically creates a security certifi cate on the switch B To disable SSL when using a user authentication RADIUS server the RADIUS server authentication order must be local A 84 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Set Setup Command ls Table A 24 Switch Services Settings Continued Entry Description EmbeddedGUlEnabled Enables True or disables False the SANsurfer Switch M
180. display Open the Wizards menu and select Configuration Wizard Use the Configuration Wizard to configure a new switch in a fabric 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 4 Managing Switches Configuring a Switch I aaa 4 7 2 Switch Properties 4 7 2 1 Symbolic Name Switch1 Domain ID lock Enable Disable Administrative State online Broadcast Support Enable Disable Domain ID 61 In band Management Enable Disable FDMI HBA Entry Limit i000 FDMI To open the Switch Properties dialog either select a switch in the topology display or open the faceplate display for the switch you be configuring and then open the Switch menu and select Switch Properties You may also right click a switch graphic in the topology display or faceplate display and select Switch Properties from the popup menu Use the Switch Properties dialog to change the following switch configuration parameters Symbolic Name Switch Administrative States Domain ID and Domain ID Lock Fabric Device Management Interface Broadcast Support In band Management Switch Properties World Wide Name 10 00 00 00 dd 03 d4 dd First Port Address 610000 Operational State online Firmware Version V 4 2 0 5 1 Symbolic Name Switch MAC address 00 c0 dd 03 d4 de IP Address 10 20 68 197 Enable Disable ok close Hep Figure 4 9 Switch Properties Dialog Symbolic Name 59097 02 B The symbolic
181. e Asia Pacific Region Email Phone Numbers by Language Latin and South America Region Email Phone Numbers by Language QLogic Corporation 12984 Valley View Road Eden Prairie MN 55344 3657 USA www qlogic com support qlogic com support qlogic com tech training qlogic com support qlogic com 1 952 932 4040 1 952 932 4018 emeasupport qlogic com 353 1 6924960 English 353 1 6924961 Frangais 353 1 6924962 Deutsch 353 1 6924963 Espa ol 353 1 6924964 Portugu s 353 1 6924965 Italiano apacsupport qlogic com 63 2 885 6712 English 63 2 885 6713 Mandarin 63 2 885 6714 Japanese 63 2 885 6715 Korean calasupport qlogic com 52 55 5278 7016 English 52 55 5278 7017 Espanol 52 55 5278 7015 Portugu s 59097 02 B 59097 02 B Section 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager This section describes how to use the SANsurfer Switch Manager application and its menus The following topics are covered Workstation Requirements Installing the Management Application Starting SANsurfer Switch Manager Exiting SANsurfer Switch Manager Uninstalling SANsurfer Switch Manager Changing the Encryption Key for the Default Fabric View File Saving and Opening Fabric View Files Setting SANsurfer Switch Manager Preferences Using Online Help Viewing Software Version and Copyright Information SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface Using the Topology Display Using the Faceplate Disp
182. e switch archive must be compatible with the switch to be restored that is you can restore a SANbox 5600 Series switch only with an archive from a SANbox 5600 Series switch Refer to Archiving a Switch on page 4 37 for more information CAUTION The switch being restored should be physically disconnected from the fabric Restoring a switch in a fabric can severely disrupt the fabric After the restore process is complete the switch can be reconnected to the fabric To restore a switch do the following 1 Login to the fabric through the switch you want to restore You cannot restore a switch over an ISL 2 Open the Switch menu in the faceplate display and select Restore to display the Restore dialog shown in Figure 4 16 The Restore dialog offers a Full Restore and a Selective Restore tab EJ Restore Restore i CT ESSSSSSSS gt ID 418 He Archive File Browse Archive File Browse Full Restore Selective Restore Select settings to be restored from selected archive file Restore all settings from selected archive file vi Network Properties vi Switch Properties Ip Address C Domain Id Restore E v Port Properties Configured Zoning Configured Security Restore Fut Restore Selective Restore FullRestore Selective Restore Close Help close Help Radius Server Info
183. e Set Config Security command Refer to the Set Config Command on page A 64 0 zero specifies no binding list Displays a list of all groups and the security sets of which they are members This keyword is available without an Admin session members group Displays all members of the group given by group This keyword is available without an Admin session remove group member list Remove the port device worldwide name given by member from the group given by group Use a lt space gt to delimit multiple member names in member list rename group_ old group_new Renames the group given by group old to the group given by group new securitysets group Displays the list of security sets of which the group given by group is a member This keyword is available without an Admin session type group Displays the group type for the group given by group This keyword is available without an Admin session Notes Refer to the Securityset Command on page A 58 for information about managing groups in security sets 59097 02 B A 31 A Command Line Interface XX Group Command QLOGIC AA NY Examples The following is an example of the Group Add command SANbox xxxx admin security 5 group add Group 1 A list of attributes with formatting and default values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value with exception of the Group Member WWN field whi
184. e Switch operational state PrincipalSwitchRole Principal switch status True indicates that this switch is the principal switch BoardTemp 1 Degrees Celsius Internal switch temperature at circuit board sensor 1 SwitchDiagnosticsStatus Results of the power on self test SwitchTemperatureStatus Switch temperature status normal warn ing failure timezone Displays the current time zone setting topology Displays all connected devices users Displays a list of logged in users This is equivalent to the User List command version Displays an introductory set of information about operational attributes of the switch This keyword is equivalent to the About keyword 59097 02 B A 99 A Command Line Interface XX Show Command QLOGIC E UC b V9 hA Examples The following is an example of the Show Chassis command SANbox xxxx 5 show chassis Chassis Information BoardTemp 1 Degrees Celsius 36 FanStatus 1 Good FanStatus 2 Good FanDirection 1 BackToFront FanDirection 2 BackToFront PowerSupplyStatus 1 Good PowerSupplyStatus 2 Good HeartBeatCode 1 HeartBeatStatus Normal The following is an example of the Show Domains command SANbox xxxx 5 show domains Principal switch is remote 10 00 00 60 69 50 0b 6c Upstream Principal ISL is DUE Domain ID List Domain 97 0x61 WWN 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 71 ed Domain 98 0x62 WWN 10 00 00 60 df 22 2e 0c Domain 99 0x63 WWN 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 72 45
185. e Type dialog 5 Open the Zone Type pull down menu and select Soft or ACL m Soft zoning is the least restrictive type of zoning B ACL zoning is hard zoning and is enforced by hardware and defines access to a given port ACL zones need not include inter switch links 3 7 6 Managing Aliases An alias is a collection of objects that can be zoned together An alias is not a zone and cannot have a zone or another alias as a member NOTE Changes that you make to the zoning database are limited to the managed switch and do not propagate to the rest of the fabric To distribute changes to configured zone sets fabric wide you must edit the zoning databases on the individual switches You will not see aliases in the active zone set 3 7 6 1 Creating an Alias To create an alias do the following 1 Open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning dialog 2 Open the Edit menu and select Create Alias to open the Create Alias dialog 3 Entera name for the alias and click the OK button The alias name is displayed in the Zone Sets dialog An alias name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters Valid characters are 0 9 A Z a z S and 4 Click the OK button to save the alias name to the zoning database 3 56 59097 02 B XX LOGIC 3 Managing Fabrics Zoning a Fabric I aaa 3 7 6 2 Adding a Member to an Alias You can add a port device to an alias by domain ID and
186. e alias will not be removed from the active zone set until the active zone set is deactivated list Displays a list of all aliases This keyword does not require an admin session members alias Displays all members of the alias given by alias This keyword does not require an admin session remove alias member list Removes the ports devices given by member list from the alias given by alias Use a space to delimit ports devices in member list A port device in member list can have any of the following formats B X Domain ID and port number pair Domain ID Port Number Domain IDs can be 1 239 port numbers can be 0 255 W 6 character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address hex W 16 character hexadecimal worldwide port name WWPN for the device with the format XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX rename alias old alias new Renames the alias given by alias old to the alias given by alias new A 10 59097 02 B XKX A Command Line Interface QLOGIC CIM Command a CIM Command Manages CIM listener and subscription configurations on the switch Refer to the CIMListener Command on page A 13 for information about creating and modifying CIM listeners Refer to the CIMSubscription Command on page A 15 for information about creating and modifying CIM subscriptions Authority Admin session Syntax cim cancel clear edit limits save Keywords cancel Terminates the current CIM edit session withou
187. e the selected report to a text file Fabric Snapshot Analysis Snapshot Files Summary Differences Reports Added Removed Moved Changed Close Help Figure 3 9 Fabric Version Snapshot Analysis Dialog 3 22 59097 02 B XKX 3 Managing Fabrics QLOGIC Managing the Fabric Database ls 3 4 Managing the Fabric Database A fabric database contains the set of fabrics that you have added during a SANsurfer Switch Manager session Initially if you do not open an existing fabric or fabric view file the SANsurfer Switch Manager application opens with an empty fabric database 3 4 1 Adding a Fabric To add a fabric to the database do the following 1 Open the Fabric menu and select Add Fabric to open the Add a New Fabric dialog as shown in Figure 3 10 Add a New Fabric xi Add a New Fabric Fabric Name NameForFabric IP Address 10 20 30 40 Login Name MyLoginName Password Add Fabric Figure 3 10 Add a New Fabric Dialog 2 Enter a fabric name optional and the IP address of the switch through which to manage the fabric 3 Enter an account name and password The factory account name and password are admin and password The password is for the switch and is stored in the switch firmware Refer to Managing User Accounts on page 4 2 for information about creating user accounts 4 Click the
188. eces or SNMP Properties dialogs If SNMP is enabled default and the read and write community strings have not been changed from their defaults you risk unwanted access to the switch Refer to Enabling SNMP Configuration on page 3 20 for more information SNMP is enabled by default In band management is the ability to manage switches across inter switch links using SANsurfer Switch Manager SNMP management server or the application programming interface The switch comes from the factory with in band management enabled If you disable in band management on a particular switch you can no longer communicate with that switch by means other than a direct Ethernet or serial connection Refer to Enabling In band Management on page 3 20 for more information 59097 02 B 3 19 3 Managing Fabrics XX Tracking Fabric Firmware and Software Versions LOGIC AA NN 3 25 1 Enabling SNMP Configuration To enable SNMP configuration do the following 1 Onthe faceplate display open the Switch menu and select SNMP Properties to open the SNMP Properties dialog 2 Inthe SNMP Configuration area place a check mark in the SNMP Enabled check box 3 Click the OK button to save the change to the database 3 2 5 2 Enabling In band Management To enable In band Management do the following 1 On the faceplate display open the Switch menu and select Switch Properties to open the Switch Properties dialog 2 Click the In band Management Enable
189. econds between switches CAUTION Changes to the fabric may disrupt the NDCLA process Common administrative operations that change the fabric include W Zoning modifications W Adding moving or removing devices attached to the switch fabric This includes powering up or powering down attached devices 59097 02 B po 4 Managing Switches QLOGIC Resetting a Switch I m Adding moving or removing ISLs or other connections Management Interfaces After an NDCLA operation is complete management connections must be re initiated W SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions will re connect automatically m Telnet sessions must be restarted manually Applicable Code Versions E Future switch code releases will be upgraded non disruptively unless specifically indicated in its associated release notes W An NDCLA operation to previous switch code releases is not supported Table 4 3 Switch Resets Type Description Hot Reset Resets a switch without a power on self test This reset activates the pending firmware but does not disrupt switch traffic If errors are detected on a port during a hot reset the port is reset automat ically Reset without Resets a switch without a power on self test This reset activates POST the pending firmware and it is disruptive to switch traffic Hard Reset Resets a switch with a power on self test This reset activates the pending firmware and it is disruptive to switch traffic
190. ecurity button on the toolbar or open the Security menu and select Edit Security to open the Edit Security dialog 2 Choose one of the following methods to open the Create a Security Group dialog B In the graphic window click a security set and click the Security Group button in the toolbar W X Right click on a security set and select Create a Security Group from the popup menu 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 3 Managing Fabrics Securing a Fabric ls 3 2 4 5 3 Enter a security group name and select a security group type ISL Port or MS Remember only one security group type 1 ISL 1 Port 1 MS in each security set is allowed The naming conventions for security groups are B Must start with a letter B All alphanumeric chars aA ZZ 0 9 WB Thesymbols _ and are the only symbols allowed 4 Click the OK button to save the change Create Security Group Member Dialog 59097 02 B Use the Create Security Group Member dialog shown in Figure 3 7 to add a member to a security group Choose options from the Group Member or manually type in a hex value and Authentication pull down menus and enter values in the Secret and Binding ISL groups only fields Create a security group member Group Member WWN 100000c0dd02cc68 Authentication Chap Primary Hash MD5 32 HEX or 16 ASCII bytes Primary Secret Generate Secondary Hash SHA 1 40 HEX or 20 ASCII bytes
191. ecurity set The three types of security groups are H ISL default E Port authentication m MS Management Server CT authentication W Port F Port authentication Edit Security File Edit e mf Security Set Security Group Security Member Remove Security Sets SecuritySet ORPHAN SECURITY GROUP SET SecuritySet abc E SecurityGroup aaa ISL Figure 3 5 Edit Security Dialog 3 10 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 3 Managing Fabrics Securing a Fabric lls Use the File menu to Edit the security configuration on the switch Open or edit security files Save or rename security files Use the Edit menu to 3 2 4 2 Create security sets security groups and security group members Rename or remove a security group from a security set or a member from a security group Remove a group from all security sets Remove all security sets groups or members View properties for the selected security set group or group memberCreating a Security SetCreating a Security Set Creating a Security Set There is a maximum of 4 security sets To add a security set do the following is 59097 02 B On the faceplate display click the Security button on the toolbar or open the Security menu and select Edit Security to open the Edit Security dialog Choose one of the following methods to open the Create a Security Set dialog W Click the Security Set button in the toolbar W Right click in the
192. efault Fabric File Encryption Key field Re enter the same encryption key in the Re enter Encryption Key to Confirm field Click the OK button to save the current set of fabrics to the default fabric view file in the working directory Saving and Opening Fabric View Files A fabric view file is one or more fabrics saved to a file In addition to the SANsurfer Switch Manager default fabric view file you can save and open your own fabric view files To save a set of fabrics to a file do the following 59097 02 B 1 2 Open the File menu and select Save View As to open the Save View dialog Enter a name for the fabric view file or click the Browse button to select an existing file Files are saved in the working directory Enter a password When you attempt to open this fabric view file you will be prompted for this password If you leave the File Password field blank no password will be required when attempting to open this fabric view file Click the OK button to save the view 2 15 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager po Setting SANsurfer Switch Manager Preferences LOGIC VV G 2O X To open a fabric view file do the following 1 Open the File menu and select Open View File to open the Open View dialog 2 Entera name for the fabric view file or click the Browse button to select an existing file 3 Ifthe fabric view file was saved with a password enter the password and click the OK button
193. efresh the stack to update the faceplate display with current information for all switches in the stack m Select all ports on all switches in the stack m Remove a switch from a stack Choose this option after a switch no longer has a 10 Gbps link The switch icon is moved from the stack icon and becomes a single switch icon in the topology display 4 8 1 Syslog The Syslog dialog enables you to save the log information for the stack to a remote host that supports the syslog protocol Use the Syslog dialog to enable remote logging for the stack Refer to Remote Logging on page 4 31 for more information Select switch for initial configuration Capella vY Enable Remote Logging syslog Logging syslog Host IP Address 10 20 11 195 ox cose Hep Figure 4 15 Syslog Dialog 4 36 59097 02 B XKX 4 Managing Switches QLOGIC Archiving a Switch o 9 9 7 aaa 4 8 2 Select Source Dialog The Select Source dialog enables you to select the initial zoning configuration to be loaded into the Edit Zoning dialog when making zoning changes to all switches in a stack The Select Source dialog is only displayed if the zoning configuration on all switches in the stack is not identical To display the Select Source dialog select a switch stack icon in the fabric tree left pane open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning Select a switch in the Source Switch list and click the OK button to
194. entation provided with the redistribution and or in the software itself an acknowledgement equivalent to the following This product includes software developed by the JDOM Project http www jdom org Alternatively the acknowledgment may be graphical using the logos available at http www jdom org images logos THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE JDOM AUTHORS OR THE PROJECT CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the JDOM Project and was originally created by Brett McLaughlin lt brett jdom org gt and Jason Hunter lt jhunter jdom org gt For more information on the JDOM Project please see lt http www jdom org gt 1 2 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 1 Introduction Technical Support ls 1 4 Technical Support Customers should
195. enticate devices using the RADIUS server security database first If the RADIUS server is unavailable then use the local switch security database UserAuthOrder Authenticator priority for user accounts m Local Authenticate users using only the local security database This is the default W Radius Authenticate users using only the security data base on the RADIUS server W RadiusLocal Authenticate users using the RADIUS server security database first If the RADIUS server is unavailable then use the local switch security database TotalServers Number of RADIUS servers to configure during this session Setting TotalServers to 0 disables all RADIUS authentica tion The default is 0 ServerlPAddress IP address of the RADIUS server The default is 10 0 0 1 A 82 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Set Setup Command ls Table A 23 RADIUS Service Settings Continued Entry Description ServerUDPPort User Datagram Protocol UDP port number on the RADIUS server The default is 1812 DeviceAuthServer Enable True or disable False this server for device authentication The default is False UserAuthServer Enable True or disable False this server for user account authentication A user authentication RADIUS server requires a secure management connection SSL The default is True AccountingServer Enable True or disable False this server for auditing of activity during a user ses
196. eplate Display LOGIC AA NN Notes 2 30 59097 02 B Section 3 Managing Fabrics This section describes the following tasks that manage fabrics RADIUS Servers Securing a Fabric Tracking Fabric Firmware and Software Versions Managing the Fabric Database Displaying Fabric Information Working with Device Information and Nicknames Zoning a Fabric 3 1 RADIUS Servers 59097 02 B Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS provides a method to centralize the management of authentication passwords in larger networks It has a client server model where the server is the password repository and third party authentication point and the clients are all of the managed devices RADIUS can be configured for devices and or user accounts The RADIUS server dialogs are available only on a secure SSL fabric and on the entry switch out of band switch Refer to Connection Security on page 3 7 and System Services Dialog on page 4 27 for more information RADIUS is designed to authenticate users and devices using a challenge response protocol Basic implementations consist of a central RADIUS server containing a database of authorized users as well as authentication information A RADIUS client wishing to verify the authenticity of a user issues a challenge to the user and collects the response to the challenge This information is forwarded to the RADIUS server for authentication and the server responds with the results e
197. eplate display open the Security menu and select Deactivate Security Set 2 In the Deactivate dialog click the Yes button to confirm that you want to deactivate the active security set 3 18 59097 02 B XKX 3 Managing Fabrics QLOGIC Securing a Fabric o 9 9 97 aaa 3 2 4 13 Configured Security Data Window The Configured Security data window displays a graphical representation of all security sets groups and members in the database To open the Configured Security data window click the Configured Security tab below the data window in the faceplate display 3 2 4 14 Active Security Data Window The Active Security data window displays a graphical representation of the active security set its groups and members in the database To open the Active Security data window click the Active Security tab below the data window in the faceplate display 3 2 5 Fabric Services Fabric services security includes SNMP and In band management Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is the protocol governing network management and monitoring of network devices SNMP security consists of a read community string and a write community string that are basically the passwords that control read and write access to the switch The read community string public and write community string private are set at the factory to these well known defaults and should be changed if SNMP is enabled using the System Servi
198. er to SANsurfer Management Suite on page 2 4 for instructions on how to install and upgrade SANsurfer Management Suite 2 2 59097 02 B XX LOGIC 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager Installing the Management Application ls 2 2 1 SANsurfer Switch Manager 59097 02 B You can install SANsurfer Switch Manager on a Windows Linux Solaris or Mac OS X workstation To install the SANsurfer Switch Manager application from the SANsurfer Switch Manager Installation Disk do the following For a Windows platform 1 Close all programs currently running and insert the SANsurfer Switch Manager Installation Disk into the management workstation CD ROM drive 2 Inthe upper left corner of the product introduction screen click Management Software 3 Locate your platform in the table and click Install If the product introduction screen does not open in step 2 open the CD with Windows Explorer and run the installation program with the following path data files Management_Software Windows Windows_5 00 xx xx exe For a Linux platform Open the CD and run the installation program with the following path data files Management_Software Linux Linux_5 00 xx xx bin If there is no CD ROM icon do the following 1 Open an xterm or other terminal window 2 Mount the CD ROM From a shell prompt enter the following mount mnt cdrom 3 Change directory to the location of the install program cd mnt cdrom data files Management_Soft
199. er when displayed in the Date Time dialog the value is always in local time The difference between switch and workstation times must not exceed 24 hours or the switch management application can not connect To set the date and time on a switch do the following 1 Select a switch in the topology display and open the faceplate display 2 Open the Switch menu and select Set Date Time 3 Choose one of the following W Enter the year month day time and time zone in the Switch Date Time dialog then click OK The new date and time take effect immediately W Click the NTP Client Enabled checkbox to enable the switch to synchronize its time with an NTP server Enter the IP address of the NTP server Ethernet connection to NTP server is required Click the OK button to save the settings Resetting a Switch Resetting a switch reboots the switch using configuration parameters in memory Depending on the reset type a switch reset may or may not include a power on self test or it may or may not disrupt traffic Table 4 3 describes the types of switch resets During a hotreset operation fabric services will be unavailable for a short period 30 75 seconds depending on switch model Verify all administrative changes to the fabric if any are complete before performing an Nondisruptive Code Load and Activation NDCLA When upgrading firmware across a fabric using non disruptive activation upgrade one switch at a time and allow 75 s
200. er Management Suite by clicking the SANsurfer icon if installed on the desktop or from the Start menu In SMS Click the Switch tab in the left pane From the Help menu select About and make note of the version number Close SANsurfer Management Suite To ensure you are using the most recent version of SANsurfer Switch Manager visit the QLogic support web page and go to Drivers Software and Manuals a Select your switch model from the pull down menu Locate the description for SANsurfer Switch Manager for Windows under Management Software b Ifthe release version number 5 00 xx is greater than what is currently installed download the new version and proceed to step 9 Otherwise no upgrade is needed and the SMS installation is complete To start the installer open the zip file and run the SANsurferSwitchMgr Windows 5 00 xx exe file When prompted for an installation directory click the Choose button and select the same folder as the SANsurfer Management Suite installation in step 6 The default SMS installation directory is C Program Files QLogic Corporation SANsurfer Click the Next button When prompted for the location in which to create the program icons click the In an Existing Group radio button then specify the same group that was used for the SMS installation The default SMS group is QLogic Management Suite Click the Next button Click the Install button to the start the installation When the installation i
201. er expires admin admin authority True never expires chuckca admin authority False expires in x 50 days gregj admin authority True expires in lt 100 days fred admin authority True never expires The following is an example of the User Add command SANbox xxxx admin 5 user add Press q and the ENTER key to abort this command account name 1 15 chars userl account password 8 20 chars Sa KKK Fak eoe please confirm account password set account expiration in days 0 2000 O never 0 100 should this account have admin authority y n n y OK to add user account userl with admin authority and to expire in 100 days Please confirm y n n y The following is an example of the User Edit command SB211 192 admin 5 user edit Press q and the ENTER key to abort this command account name 1 15 chars userl set account expiration in days 0 2000 O never 0 should this account have admin authority y n n OK to modify user account userl with no admin authority and to expire in 0 days Please confirm y n n A 128 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC User Command I The following is an example of the User Delete command SANbox xxxx admin gt user del user3 The user account will be deleted Please confirm y n n y The following is an example of the User List command SANbox xxxx admin gt user list User Ethernet Addr Port Logged in Since admin OB
202. ersion 1 or 2 with which to format traps Enables or disables the trap If disabled traps are not configurable Specifies the IP address to which SNMP traps are sent A maximum of 5 trap addresses are supported The default address for trap 1 is 10 0 0 254 The default address for traps 2 5 is 0 0 0 0 The port number on which the trap is sent The default is 162 Specifies a severity level to assign to the trap Open the pull down menu and choose a level The Trap 1 Enabled check box on the SNMP Properties dialog must be enabled to access this pull down menu Trap severity levels include Unknown Emergency Alert Criti cal Error Warning Notify Info Debug and Mark Trap address other than 0 0 0 0 and trap port combinations must be unique For example if trap 1 and trap 2 have the same address then they must have different port values Similarly if trap 1 and 2 have the same port value they must have different addresses 4 34 59097 02 B XKX 4 Managing Switches QLOGIC Managing Switch Stacks ls 4 8 Managing Switch Stacks SANsurfer Switch Manager recognizes switches as a stack if they are connected by their high speed stacking ports The switch management application will auto detect switches connected by their 10 Gbps ports and display these stacked switches as a single stack entity in the topology and faceplate displays The graphic window upper right pane of the faceplate display displays one facepl
203. es received by the port Total number of primitive and non primitive port link errors Number of link reset primitives transmitted and received by the port Number of loop initialization primitive frames received Number of loop initialization primitive frames transmitted Number of offline primitives transmitted by the port Total number of frames received by the port Total number of words received by the port Total number of frames transmitted by the port Total number of words transmitted by the port Number of link reset primitives sent from this port to an attached port Total number of offline sequences transmitted and received by the port 5 7 5 Managing Ports Displaying Port Information XX QLOGIC AA NY 5 1 3 Port Information Data Window The Port Information data window displays detail information for the selected port To open the Port Information data window click the Port Info tab below the data window in the faceplate display Table 5 6 Port Information Data Window Entries Entry Description Port Address Administrative Port Type Operational Port Type Administrative Port State Operational Port State Configured Administrative Port State Logged In E Port Connection Status Port Fibre Channel address The administrative port type G GL F FL or Donor This value is persistent it will be maintained during a switch reset Dur ing port auto configura
204. es transmitted and received at a polling frequency of once per second Refer to Customizing Graphs on page 5 26 for information about changing what is plotted and how it is plotted 3 You can display graphs in the following ways W X Click on a switch entry handle and select one or more ports B Right click on a switch icon in the fabric tree and select Open Graph for All Ports on Switch or Open Graph for All Logged In Ports on Switch from the pull down menu 4 You can move graphs around individually by clicking and dragging or you can arrange them as a group Refer to Arranging Graphs in the Display on page 5 25 for more information To remove a graph click the graph Remove button To remove all graphs open the Window menu and select Close All To remove a fabric and its graphs select the fabric in the fabric tree then select Remove Fabric from the Fabric menu You can also right click on a fabric and select Remove Fabric for the popup menu Right clicking on a graph opens a popup menu from which you can change graph options print a graph or save the graph statistics to a file 5 24 59097 02 B po 5 Managing Ports QLOGIC Graphing Port Performance ls 5 6 7 1 Displaying Graphs for a Stack Graphs can be displayed for all ports on all switches in a stack or for only those ports on all switches that are logged in To display graphs for a stack of switches do the following 1 inthe left pane fabric tree right cl
205. esets Number of Link Resets issued by this port TxOfflineSeq Total number of Offline Sequences issued by this port post log Displays the Power On Self Test POST log which contains results from the most recently failed POST setup option Displays setup attributes for the system SNMP and the switch manufacturer Refer to the Show Setup Command on page A 118 steering domain id Displays the routes that data takes to the switch given by domain id If you omit domain id the system displays routes for all switches in the fabric support Executes a series of commands that display a complete description of the switch its configuration and operation The display can be captured from the screen and used for diagnosing problems This keyword is intended for use at the request of your authorized maintenance provider The commands that are executed include the following B Alias List Config List Date Group List History Ps Security List Limits History 59097 02 B A 97 A Command Line Interface Show Command XX QLOGIC AA NN A 98 W Securityset Active List Show About Alarm Backtrace Chassis Config Port Config Security Config Switch Config Threshold Dev Dev Settings Domains Donor Fabric Log Log Archive Log Settings Lsdb Mem Ns Perf Port Setup Mfg Setup Snmp Setup System Steering Switch Topology Users Uptime User Accounts Whoami Zoneset Active List switch
206. f accessing menu options The shortcut key combinations are not case sensitive For example to exit the application press Alt F then press X 2 20 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface A aaa 2 11 2 Tool Bar The tool bar consists of a row of graphical buttons that you can use to access SANsurfer Switch Manager functions as shown in Table 2 2 The tool bar buttons are an alternative method to using the menu bar The tool bar can be relocated in the display by clicking and dragging the handle at the left edge of the tool bar Table 2 2 Tool Bar Buttons Tool Bar Button Description Ly Add Fabric button adds a new fabric to the fabric view Add z Open View File button opens an existing fabric view file Open fa Save View As button saves the current fabric view to a file Save Q Refresh button updates the topology or faceplate display with cur Refresh rent information i Event Browser button opens the events browser Events 3 Edit Zoning button opens the Edit Zoning dialog available only in Zoning faceplate display e Edit Security button opens the Edit Security dialog faceplate dis Security play only Help Topics button opens the online help file Help ee The QLogic logo opens a link to the QLogic web site 59097 02 B 2 21 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager XKX SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface LOGIC AA NY 2
207. fer Switch Manager Using the Faceplate Display ls 2 13 2 2 Opening the Faceplate Popup Menu To open the popup menu right click on the faceplate image to present the following tasks Refresh the switch Select all ports Manage switch properties Manage network properties Manage SNMP properties Extended credits wizard Manage port properties Change the port symbolic name Run the port loopback tests Services Security Consistency Checklist If no ports are selected the port related tasks will be unavailable in the menu Right click a port to open the Port popup menu Hold down the Shift or Control key to select more than one port If multiple ports are selected right click one of the selected ports 2 13 3 Faceplate Data Windows The faceplate display provides the following data windows corresponding to the data window tabs 59097 02 B Devices displays information about devices hosts and storage targets connected to the switch Switch displays current switch configuration data Port Statistics displays performance data for the selected ports Port Information displays information for the selected ports Configured Zonesets displays all zone sets zones and zone membership in the zoning database Configured Security displays all security definitions currently saved in the database Active Security displays the active security set 2 29 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager XKX Using the Fac
208. file to the workstation SANbox xxxx 5 admin start SANbox xxxx admin 5 config backup SANbox xxxx admin 5 admin end SANbox xxxx 5 exit gt ftp symbolic name or ip address user images password images ftp bin ftp get configdata ftp quit The following is an example of how to upload a configuration backup file configdata from the workstation to the switch and then restore the configuration gt ftp symbolic name or ip address user images password images ftp bin ftp put configdata ftp quit SANbox xxxx gt admin start SANbox xxxx admin 4 config restore The switch will be reset after restoring the configuration Please confirm y n n y Alarm Msg day month date time year A1005 0021 SM Configuration is being restored this could take several minutes Alarm Msg day month date time year A1000 000A SM The switch will be reset in 3 seconds due to a config restore SANbox xxxx admin 5 Alarm Msg day month date time year A1000 0005 SM The switch is being reset Good bye 59097 02 B A 19 A Command Line Interface XX Create Command QLOGIC AA PV Create Command Creates support files for troubleshooting switch problems and certificates for secure communications for SANsurfer Switch Manager Authority Admin session Syntax create certificate support Keywords certificate Creates a security certificate on the switch The security certificate
209. g a Zone Set Copying a Zone to a Zone Set Removing a Zone from a Zone Set or from All Zone Sets Removing a Zone Set NOTE Changes that you make to the zoning database are limited to the managed switch and do not propagate to the rest of the fabric To distribute changes to configured zone sets fabric wide you must edit the zoning databases on the individual switches 3 7 4 1 Creating a Zone Set To create a zone set do the following 1 Open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning dialog 2 Open the Edit menu and select Create Zone Set to open the Create Zone Set dialog 3 Entera name for the zone set and click the OK button The new zone set name is displayed in the Zone Sets dialog A zone set name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters Valid characters are 0 9 A Z a z and 4 To create new zones in a zone set do one of the following B Right click a zone set and select Create A Zone from the popup menu In the Create a Zone dialog enter a name for the new zone and click the OK button The new zone name is displayed in the Zone Sets dialog B Copy an existing zone by dragging a zone into the new zone set Refer to Copying a Zone to a Zone Set on page 3 51 5 Click the Apply button to save changes to the zoning database 3 50 59097 02 B XKX 3 Managing Fabrics QLOGIC Zoning a Fabric TO 3 7 4 2 Activating and Deactivating a Zone Set You must
210. ges false never expires The Admin account is the only user that can manage all user accounts with the User Account Administration dialogs The Admin account can create remove or modify user accounts and change account passwords The Admin account can also view and modify the switch and its configuration with SANsurfer Switch Manager The Admin account can not be removed Users with Admin authority can view and modify the switch and its configuration using SANsurfer Switch Manager Users without Admin authority are limited to viewing switch status and configuration The Images account is used to exchange files with the switch using FTP The Images account can not be removed NOTE fthe same user account exists on a switch and its RADIUS server that user can login with either password but the authority and account expiration will always come from the switch database 4 2 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 4 Managing Switches Managing User Accounts aaa 4 1 1 Creating User Accounts To create a user account on a switch open the Switch menu in the faceplate display and select User Accounts This displays the User Account Administration dialog shown in Figure 4 1 A switch can have a maximum of 15 user accounts KA User Account Administration SANbox Manager xi Admin Authority Days to Expiration never expires never expires never expires never expires Add Account New Account Lo
211. gin Admin Authority Enabled New Password Verify Password Account Expiration Date Permanent account no expiration date O Account will expire in 365 days max of 2000 days Add Account Add Account Remove Account Change Password Modify Account Close Help Figure 4 1 User Account Administration Dialog Add Account 1 59097 02 B To open the User Account Administration dialogs open the Switch menu in the faceplate display and select User Accounts Click the Add Account tab to open the Add Account tab page Enter an account name in the New Account Login field Account names are limited to 15 characters If the account is to have the ability to modify switch configurations check the Admin Authority Enabled box Enter a password in the New Password field and enter it again in the Verify Password field A password must have a minimum of 8 characters and no more than 20 If this account is to be permanent with no expiration date click the Permanent Account radio button Otherwise click the Account Will Expire button and enter the number days in which the account will expire Click the Add Account button to add the newly defined account 4 Managing Switches XKX Managing User Accounts QLOGIC AA NY 4 1 2 Removing a User Account To remove a user account on a switch open the Switch menu in the faceplate display and select User Accounts Click the Re
212. graphic window and select New Security Set from the popup menu Enter a security set name The naming conventions for security sets are B Must start with a letter B All alphanumeric chars aA zZ 0 9 B The symbols and are the only symbols allowed Click the OK button to save the change 3 11 3 Managing Fabrics XKX Securing a Fabric QLOGIC AA NY 3 2 4 3 Create Security Group Dialog 3 2 4 4 Use the Create Security Group dialog shown in Figure 3 6 to add a security group to a security set The Create Security Group dialog is displayed after clicking the Security Group button on the toolbar or after you right click on a security set in the graphic window and select Create a Security Group from the popup menu Create a security group Security Group Name Security Group Type ISL m ok Cae He Figure 3 6 Create Security Group Dialog The naming conventions for all security groups are listed below B Must start with a letter m All alphanumeric chars aA zZ 0 9 B Thesymbols _ and are the only symbols allowed Creating a Security Group An empty no members security group in the active security set will prevent all connections for that security group type For example an empty ISL security group will cause the switch to refuse all logins from other switches To add a security group to a security set do the following 1 Onthe faceplate display click the S
213. gt admin start SANbox xxxx admin gt config edit SANbox xxxx admin config gt set config threshold A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list A 74 press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so ThresholdMonitoringEnabled True False False CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled True False True RisingTrigger decimal value 1 1000 25 FallingTrigger decimal value 0 1000 1 SampleWindow decimal value 1 1000 sec 10 DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled True False True RisingTrigger decimal value 1 1000 200 FallingTrigger decimal value 0 1000 0 SampleWindow decimal value 1 1000 sec 10 ISLMonitoringEnabled True False True RisingTrigger decimal value 1 1000 2 FallingTrigger decimal value 0 1000 0 SampleWindow decimal value 1 1000 sec 0 LoginMonitoringEnabled True False True RisingTrigger decimal value 1 1000 5 FallingTrigger decimal value 0 1000 SampleWindow decimal value 1 1000 sec 0 LogoutMonitoringEnabled True False True RisingTrigger decimal value 1 1000 5 FallingTrigger decimal value 0 1000 SampleWindow decimal value 1 1000 sec 0 LOSMonitoringEnabled True False True RisingTrigger decimal value 1 1000 100 FallingTrigger decimal value 0 1000 5 SampleWindow decimal value 1 1000 sec 10 Finished
214. h a User Accounts B Working with Switch Configurations B Commands A 1 Logging On to a Switch To log on to a switch using Telnet open a command line window on the workstation and enter the Telnet command followed by the switch IP address telnet ip address A Telnet window opens prompting you for a login Enter an account name and password To log on to a switch through the serial port configure the workstation port with the following settings Mm 9600 baud m 8 bit character H 1 stop bit B No parity Enter an account name and password when prompted 59097 02 B A A Command Line Interface XX User Accounts QLOGIC NENNEN 9V A 2 User Accounts Switches come from the factory with the following user account already defined Account name admin Password password Authority Admin This user account provides full access to the switch and its configuration After planning your fabric management needs and creating your own user accounts consider changing the password for this account B Refer to Commands on page A 6 for information about authority levels W Refer to the User Command on page A 127 for information about creating user accounts W Refer to Passwd Command on page A 42 for information about changing passwords NOTE A switch supports a combined maximum of 19 logins or sessions reserved as follows m 4logins or sessions for internal applications such as management server and SN
215. h is resetting to activate the firmware Firmware management tools enable you to install and activate new firmware During a hotreset operation fabric services will be unavailable for a short period 80 75 seconds depending on switch model To ensure that an NDCLA operation is successful verify that all administrative changes to the fabric if any are complete When you need to do NDCLA hotreset to multiple switches only perform the NDCLA hotreset on one switch at a time and allow a 75 second wait before performing the NDCLA hotreset operation on the next switch CAUTION Changes to the fabric may disrupt the NDCLA process Common administrative operations that change the fabric include W Zoning modifications W Adding moving or removing devices attached to the switch fabric This includes powering up or powering down attached devices W Adding moving or removing ISLs or other connections Management Interfaces After an NDCLA operation is complete management connections must be re initiated W SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions will re connect automatically B Telnet sessions must be restarted manually Applicable Code Versions E Future switch code releases will be upgraded non disruptively unless specifically indicated in its associated release notes W An NDCLA operation to previous switch code releases is not supported 4 44 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 4 Managing Switches Displaying Hardware Status I aaa
216. he Enter key to stop the display A 115 A Command Line Interface XX Show Perf Command QLOGIC EN Pp X P outframe port number Displays continuous performance data in frames second transmitted for the port group 0 15 or 16 19 that includes port number If you omit port number ports 0 15 are displayed Type q and press the Enter key to stop the display errors port number Displays continuous error counts for the port group 0 15 or 16 19 that includes port number If you omit port number ports 0 15 are displayed Type q and press the Enter key to stop the display Examples The following is an example of the Show Perf command SANbox xxxx 5 show perf Port Bytes s Bytes s Bytes s Frames s Frames s Frames s Number in out total in out total 0 7K 136M 136M 245 68K 68K 1 58K 0 58K 1K 0 1K 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 7K 7K 0 245 245 7 136M 58K 136M 68K 1K 70K 8 7K 136M 136M 245 68K 68K 9 58K 0 58K 1K 0 1K LO 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 la 0 0 0 0 0 0 k3 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 0 7K 7K 0 245 245 L5 136M 58K 136M 68K 1K 70K 16 47M 23K 47M 23K 726 24K 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 23K 47M 47M 726 23K 24K 19 0 0 0 0 0 0 A 116 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Show Perf Command ls The following is an example of the Show Perf Byte command SANbox xxxx gt show perf byte Displaying bytes sec total Press any key to stop display 0
217. he SNMP management server must be the same The default is public Trap Community Trap community password up to 32 characters that authorizes an SNMP agent to receive traps This is a write only field The value on the switch and the SNMP management server must be the same The default is public SNMP Proxy If enabled you can use SNMP to monitor and configure any switch in the fabric Location Specifies the name up to 64 characters for the switch location The default is undefined Authentication Enables or disables the reporting of SNMP authentication failures If Trap enabled a notification trap is sent when incorrect community string values are used The default value is False Write Commu Write community password up to 32 characters that authorizes an nity SNMP agent to write information to the switch This is a write only field The value on the switch and the SNMP management server must be the same The default is private 59097 02 B 4 33 4 Managing Switches Configuring a Switch XX QLOGIC ee 4 7 7 2 SNMP Trap Configuration The SNMP trap configuration defines how traps are set Choose from the tabs Trap1 Trap 5 to configure each trap Table 4 8 describes the SNMP configuration parameters Table 4 8 SNMP Trap Configuration Parameters Parameter Description Trap Version Trap 1 Enabled Trap Address Trap Port Trap Severity Specifies the SNMP v
218. he Security Clear command followed by the Security Save command the non volatile security database will be cleared from the switch NOTE The preferred method for clearing the security database from the switch is the Reset Security command Refer to the Reset Command on page A 46 59097 02 B XKX A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Security Command A edit Initiates a Security Edit session in which to make changes to the security database A Security Edit session enables you to use the Group and Securityset commands to create add and delete security sets groups and group members To close a Security Edit session and save changes enter the Security Save command To close a Security Edit session without saving changes enter the Security Cancel command history Displays history information about the security database and the active security set including the account name that made changes and when those changes were made This keyword does not require an Admin session limits Displays the current totals and the security database limits for the number of security sets groups members per group and total members This keyword does not require an Admin session list Displays all security sets groups and group members in the security database This keyword does not require an Admin session restore Reverts the changes to the security database that have been made during the current Security Edit session since the last Secu
219. hentication Order tab and verify that Device Authentication Order and User Authentication Order options are set to either Radius or Radius Local for RADIUS Authentication to be implemented 3 3 3 Managing Fabrics Xx RADIUS Servers QLOGIC AA NY 3 1 2 Removing a RADIUS Server When you remove a RADIUS server you disable the management of authentication usernames and passwords over the network for that server Radius Server Information UDP Port Server Type 1812 Device User Select server to remove Selected Server 10 20 11 8 aaa Figure 3 2 Remove Server To remove a RADIUS server do the following 1 Open the faceplate display open the Switch menu and select Radius Servers 2 In the Radius Server Information dialog shown in Figure 3 2 click the Remove Server tab 3 In server list at the top of the dialog select the server to be removed 4 Click the Remove Server button to remove the server and click the Close button to exit the dialog 3 4 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 3 Managing Fabrics RADIUS Servers ls 3 1 3 Editing RADIUS Server Information Editing information of a RADIUS server involves changing the configuration of a RADIUS server Radius Server Information UDP Port Server Type 1812 Device User Edit Server Info Device Authentication Server User Authentication Server Accounting Server IP Address UDP Port 1 65535
220. his command User Account johndoe IP Address t 10 20 33 130 Source Filename 5 0 00 11 mpc About to install image Do you want to continue y n y Connected to 10 20 33 130 10 20 33 130 220 localhost localdomain FTP server Version wu 2 6 1 18 ready 331 Password required for johndoe Password XXXXXXXXX 230 User johndoe logged in bin 200 Type set to I verbose Verbose mode off This may take several seconds The switch will now reset Connection closed by foreign host 59097 02 B A 25 A Command Line Interface XX Group Command QLOGIC AA NN Group Command Creates groups manages membership within the group and manages the membership of groups in security sets Authority Admin session and a Security Edit session Refer to the Security Command on page A 54 for information about starting a Security Edit session The List Members Securitysets and Type keywords are available without an Admin session Syntax group add group copy create group type delete group edit group member list members group remove group member_list rename group_old group_new securitysets group type group A 26 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC A Command Line Interface Group Command A aaa Keywords add group Initiates an editing session in which to specify a group member and its attributes for the existing group given by group ISL Port and MS member attributes are describe
221. ic File Encryption Key field enter the encryption key and click the Load View File button If you do not want to load the default performance view file click the Continue Without Loading button to open the SANsurfer Performance Viewer with no fabric displayed f amp Load Default View File An encryption key is required to decrypt information stored in the default performance view file Default File Encryption Key Load View File Continue Without Loading Figure 5 7 Load Default View File Dialog 5 6 3 Saving and Opening Performance View Files In addition to the default performance view file you can save and open your own performance view files The performance view file contains the set of fabrics graphs and graphing options To save a performance view file do the following 1 Openthe File menu and select Save View As to open the Save View dialog 2 Enter a name for the fabric file or click the Browse button to select an existing file Files are saved in the working directory 3 Enter a password When you attempt to open this fabric file you will be prompted for this password If you leave the File Password field blank no password is required To open a performance view file do the following 1 Open the File menu and select Open View File to open the Open View dialog 2 Enter a name for the fabric file or click the Browse button to select an existing file 5 22 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 5
222. ic Switch Port Zoning Wizards View Help Rh ea m 2 mp c c M the faceplate display W Port Views and Status B Working with Ports B Faceplate Data Windows Open Save Refresh Events Zoning Security Help Fabric 1 sw um SW2 5W3 SANsurfer Switch Manager Faceplate File Fabric Switch Port Zoning Wizards View Help Add Open Save Switch 9 Fabric1 7 a g m amp E g Refresh Events Zoning Security Help SW1 Em SW2 SW3 4 Firmware Version Inactive Firmware Version _ Pending Firmware Version _ PROM Boot Version MAC Address V1 1 0 6 0 Tue Apr 27 14 31 56 2004 _ Switch Type FC Switch First Port Address 6e0000 World Wide Name 10 00 00 c0 dd 03 d5 cb Serial Number 0426207850 Reason for Status Normal User Name admin Login Level _ Super user Super User True User Authentication Enabled True Vendor QLogic V5 0 0 13 2 Tue Dec 14 19 55 37 2004 N A does not apply to this switch V5 0 0 13 2 Tue Dec 14 19 55 37 2004 00 c0 dd 03 d5 cc CETT j emen Devices Switch Port stats Figure 2 11 Faceplate Display 59097 02 B 2 27 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager XKX Using the Faceplate Display LOGIC AA NY 2 13 1 Port Views and Status Port color and text provide information about the port and its operational state Green
223. ick on a Stack icon 2 Inthe popup menu select Open Graph For All Ports on Stack or Open Graph For All Logged In Ports on Stack 5 6 7 2 Arranging Graphs in the Display To arrange and size graphs in the display open the Window menu and select Cascade Tile or Close All m Cascade overlaps the graphs so that all graphs are at least partially visible B Tile arranges the graphs in non overlapping rows and columns Close All closes all graphs You can also click a graph on the Window menu to bring that graph to the front 59097 02 B 5 25 5 Managing Ports XX Graphing Port Performance QLOGIC ee 5 6 7 3 Customizing Graphs 5 26 You can customize the graph polling frequency what is plotted in the graphs and the graph color scheme To set the polling frequency for all graphs open the Graph menu and select Set Polling Frequency Enter an interval in seconds 0 60 in the dialog box and click the OK button To choose what is to be plotted open the Graph menu and select Modify Graph Options You can also right click on a graph and select Change Graph Options This opens the Default Graph Options dialog shown in Figure 5 9 amp Default Graph Options Select Data to Display on Graph Show Bytes Data on Graph Total Tx Bytes vi Total Bytes Total Rx Bytes _ Show Frames Data on Graph Total Errors vi Display Grid on Graph Select Background Color
224. iew File Encryption Key Re enter Encryption Key to Confirm ok cancel Heb Figure 2 3 Save Default Fabric View File Dialog The encryption key is used to encrypt the sensitive data in the default fabric view file Refer to Changing the Encryption Key for the Default Fabric View File on page 2 15 for information about changing this encryption key If an encryption key has been defined and the View File Auto Save and Load preferences settings are set to Enable the current fabric view is automatically saved to your default fabric view file upon exit future SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions To prevent SANsurfer Switch Manager from prompting you to save the default fabric view file between SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions set the View File Auto Save and Load preferences setting to Enable default Refer to Setting SANsurfer Switch Manager Preferences on page 2 16 for more information 2 12 59097 02 B XKX 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager QLOGIC Uninstalling SANsurfer Switch Manager A aaa In your next SANsurfer Switch Manager session the Load Default Fabric File dialog shown in Figure 2 4 prompts you to load the default fabric view file and to specify its encryption key if there is one In the Default Fabric File Encryption Key field enter the encryption key and click the Load View File button If you do not want to load the default fabric view file click the Continue Without Loading button to
225. iguration on a switch to a file Activating and deactivating a security set The security database is made up of all security sets on the switch The security database has the following limits B Maximum number of security sets is 4 B Maximum number of groups is 1000 B Maximum number of members in a group is 1000 B Maximum total number of group members is 1000 3 9 3 Managing Fabrics IX Securing a Fabric QLOGIC AA NY 3 2 4 1 Edit Security Dialog The Edit Security dialog shown in Figure 3 5 opens after clicking the Security button on the toolbar or selecting Edit Security from the Security menu The Security dialogs are available only on a secure SSL fabric and on the entry switch out of band switch The primary use of the Edit Security dialog is to edit the security configuration on the switch You can also open and edit a security configuration saved to a file Editing security files consists of renaming and removing security sets groups and members Use the Edit menu options or popup menu options to access Edit Security dialog options Select a security item in the graphic window and select an option in the Edit menu or right click on a security item in the graphic window and select an option from the popup menus The orphan security set contains the security groups and members that don t belong to a user defined security set Excluding the orphan security set you can only have 1 group type in a s
226. indication to the CIM client The event types are as follows B CreateComputerSystem A switch is added to the fabric This is the default ModifyComputerSystem A switch state change DeleteComputerSystem A switch is removed from the fabric CreateFCPort Not supported ModifyFCPort A Fibre Channel port state change W DeleteFCPort Not supported EnabledState Enable True or disable False the subscription The default is True Duration Subscription life span in seconds The subscription life span begins when the subscription is created Expired subscriptions do not send indications to the CIM client though they remain in the CIM data base Values can be 1 720000 0 indicates indefinite which is the default delete subscription name Deletes the subscription given by subscription name from the CIM database A Command Line Interface XX CIMSubscription Command QLOGIC AA NY edit Subscription name Opens an editing session in which you can modify the CIM subscription given by subscription name Refer to Table A 4 for a description of the CIM subscription configuration parameters Examples The following is an example of the CIMSubscription Create command SANbox xxxx admin cim 5 cimsubscription create subscription 1 A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish
227. ing Config dialog to prevent devices from finding other devices on all switches in the fabric until the new switch is configured To open the Zoning Config dialog open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning Config Plug in the inter switch links ISL but do not connect the devices 5 Configure the port types for the new switch using the Port Properties dialog The 1 2 4 Gbps ports can be G Port GL Port F Port FL Port or Donor The 10 Gbps ports can be a G Port or F Port 6 Connect the devices to the switch Make any necessary zoning changes using the Edit Zoning dialog To open the Edit Zoning dialog open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning If you changed the Default Visibility setting in the Zoning Config dialog from All to None change that setting back to All To open the Zoning Config dialog open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning Config 3 26 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 3 Managing Fabrics Managing the Fabric Database ls 3 4 8 Replacing a Failed Switch The archive restore works for all switches However the Restore menu item is not available for the in band switches You can only restore a switch out of band the fabric management switch There are certain parameters that are not archived and these are not restored by SANsurfer Switch Manager Refer to Archiving a Switch on page 4 37 and Restoring a Switch on page 4 38 for information about archive and restore Use the following procedure to rep
228. ing a Fabric ls 3 7 3 5 Restoring the Default Zoning Database Restoring the default zoning clears the switch of all zoning definitions CAUTION This command will deactivate the active zone set To restore the default zoning for a switch 1 Inthe faceplate display open the Zoning menu and select Restore Default Zoning 2 Click the OK button to confirm that you want to restore default zoning and save changes to the zoning database 3 7 3 6 Removing All Zoning Definitions To clear all zone and zone set definitions from the zoning database choose one of the following W Open the Edit menu and select Clear Zoning In the Removes All dialog click the Yes button to confirm that you want to delete all zones and zone sets m Right click the Zone Sets heading at the top of the Zone Sets tree and select Clear Zoning from the popup menu Click the Yes button to confirm that you want to delete all zone sets and zones 59097 02 B 3 49 3 Managing Fabrics XKX Zoning a Fabric QLOGIC E w 9 3 7 4 Managing Zone Sets Zoning a fabric involves creating a zone set creating zones as zone set members then adding devices as zone members The zoning database supports multiple zone sets to serve the different security and access needs of your storage area network but only one zone set can be active at one time Managing zone sets consists of the following tasks B Creating a Zone Set Activating and Deactivatin
229. ion 59097 02 B 4 27 4 Managing Switches XX Configuring a Switch QLOGIC yr m SSL Secure Sockets Layer Provides secure encrypted communications between the switch management application GUI and the switch SSL must be enabled for configuration of security and RADIUS servers with the switch management application GUI SSL certificates are generated on the switch with the switch date time and validated with the workstation s date time If the Switch and workstation date time are not in sync invalid certificates will be generated and prevent an SSL connection from being established between the switch and switch management application GUI To disable SSL when using a user authentication RADIUS server the RADIUS authentication order must first be set to Local WB X Telnet Command line interface Allows users to manage the switch through a Telnet command line interface session Disabling Telnet access to the switch is not recommended m SSH Secure SHell Provides secure encrypted Telnet command line interface sessions with the switch Note that you will have to have an SSH client running on your workstation in order to manage your switch with Telnet command line interface when SSH is enabled SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Allows management of the switch through third party applications that use SNMP B NTP Network Time Protocol Allows the switch to obtain its time and date settings from an NTP
230. ip time that an operation between two N Ports could require The default is 2000 milliseconds 4 26 59097 02 B XKX 4 Managing Switches QLOGIC Configuring a Switch TO 4 7 4 System Services Dialog The System Services dialog provides a central location for you to enable or disable any of the external user services such as Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Secure Sockets Layer SSL Secure SHell SSH embedded switch management application command line interface Network Time Protocol NTP and Common Information Model CIM To display the System Services dialog open the Switch menu and select Services System Services Services Select system services to be enabled Embedded GUI GUI Mgmt SSL FTP u Rl RI U SN U SN U A ml Management Server Close Help Figure 4 11 System Services Dialog Use caution when disabling the Embedded GUI GUI Mgmt Telnet SSL and SSH as it is possible to disable all access to the switch except through a serial connection m Embedded GUI Embedded Graphical User Interface Allows users to point a browser at the switch and run the embedded switch management application on that switch as an applet GUI Mgmt Allows out of band management of the switch from the switch management application GUI If disabled the switch can not be specified as the entry switch for a fabric in the GUI but can still be managed through an in band connect
231. is in a Windows group it can no longer be in any other group 59097 02 B 3 43 3 Managing Fabrics XKX Zoning a Fabric QLOGIC AA NY 3 7 3 Managing the Zoning Database Managing the zoning database consists of the following Editing the Zoning Database Configuring the Zoning Database Saving the Zoning Database to a File Restoring the Zoning Database from a File Restoring the Default Zoning Database Removing All Zoning Definitions 3 7 3 1 Editing the Zoning Database To edit the zoning database for a particular switch open the Zoning menu from the faceplate display and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning dialog shown in Figure 3 15 Changes can only be made to inactive zone sets which are stored in flash non volatile memory and retained after resetting a switch Edit Zoning SANsurfer Switch Manager File Edit e m Zone Set Alias Zone Sets ZoneSet ORPHAN ZONE SET 9 pa Sw194 Ki Domain 3 Port 0 ZoneSet s2 EJ Zone 21 ACD EJ Zone z2 ACL CO Zone z3 Soft Alias a1 Alias a2 Alias a3 Zone Sets Tree rt Domain 3 Port 1 ii Domain 3 Port 2 kk Domain 3 Port 3 BB Domain 3 Port 4 BB Domain 3 Port 5 86 Domain 3 Port 6 rt Domain 3 Port 7 lli Domain 3 Port s BE Domain 3 Port 3 BB Domain 3 Port 10 ai Domain 3 Port 11 BEB Domain 3 Port 12 omain 3 Port 13 First Port Address 030c00 VAN 21 01
232. is parameter is the master control for the Set Config Port command parameter MSEnable The default is False 59097 02 B A 85 A Command Line Interface Set Setup Command ee snmp XX QLOGIC Prompts you in a line by line fashion to change SNMP configuration settings Table A 25 describes the SNMP fields For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets Table A 25 SNMP Configuration Settings Trap 1 5 Address Trap 1 5 Port Trap 1 5 Severity Trap 1 5 Version Trap 1 5 Enabled ReadCommunity WriteCommunity Entry Description SNMPEnabled Enables True or disables False SNMP on the switch The default is True Contact Specifies the name of the person to be contacted to respond to trap events The name can be up to 64 characters excluding semicolon and comma The default is undefined Location Specifies the name of the switch location The name can be up to 64 characters excluding semicolon and comma The default is undefined Specifies the workstation IP address to which SNMP traps are sent The default address for trap 1 is 10 0 0 254 The default address for traps 2 5 is 0 0 0 0 Addresses other than 0 0 0 0 for all traps must be unique Specifies the workstation port to which SNMP traps are sent Valid workstation port numbers are 1 65535 The default is 162 Specifies the severit
233. is required to establish an SSL connection with a management application such as SANsurfer Switch Manager The certificate is valid 24 hours before the certificate creation date and expires 365 days after the creation date Should the current certificate become invalid use the Create Certificate command to create a new one NOTE To insure the creation of a valid certificate be sure that the switch and the workstation time and date are the same Refer to the following B Date Command on page A 23 for information about setting the time and date W Set Command on page A 61 Timezone keyword for information about setting the time zone on the switch and workstation W Set Setup Command on page A 82 System keyword for information about enabling the Network Time Protocol for synchronizing the time and date on the switch and workstation from an NTP server support Assembles all log files and switch memory data into a core dump file dump support tgz on the switch If your workstation has an FTP server you can proceed with the command prompts to send the file from the switch to a remote host Otherwise you can use FTP to download the support file from the switch to your workstation The support file is useful to technical support personnel for troubleshooting switch problems Use this command when directed by your authorized maintenance provider A 20 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Create Command nn aaa
234. itch problems The menu option is not accessible displayed for switches that don t support the download support file function To create a support file do the following 1 Onthe faceplate display open the Switch menu and select Download Support File 2 In the Download Support File dialog click the Browse button to define a location for the support file or type the path in the text field 3 Click the Start button to begin the process of creating and downloading the support file to your workstation Observe the status in the Status area 4 After the support file is saved to your workstation click the Close button to close the Download Support File dialog 4 13 Upgrading the Switch Using License Keys A port license key is a password that you can purchase from your switch distributor or authorized reseller to upgrade your switch License keys vary according to the features you purchase To display the Feature Licenses dialog open the Switch menu and select Features A port license key enables you to upgrade the switch to a 12 16 or 20 port switch The switch can come from the factory as an 8 12 16 or 20 port switch enabling ports 0 7 0 11 0 15 or 0 20 respectively NOTE Upgrading a switch using Port Licensing through an in band switch is not recommended because traffic is disrupted However SANsurfer Switch Manager does not prevent the user from doing so 4 42 59097 02 B XKX 4 Managing Switches QLOGI
235. ither an accept or reject The RADIUS client does not need to be configured with any user authentication information this all resides on the RADIUS server and can be managed centrally and separately from the clients In addition no passwords are exchanged between the RADIUS server and its clients Authentication of requests from a RADIUS client to the server and responses from the server to a client can also be authenticated This requires sharing a secret between the server and client The accounting RADIUS supports the auditing of the users and switch services such as Telnet FTP and switch management applications 3 1 3 Managing Fabrics RADIUS Servers XX QLOGIC AA NN 3 1 1 Adding a RADIUS Server When you add a RADIUS server you provide a method to centralize the management of authentication passwords over a network Radius Server Information UDP Port Server Type 1812 Device User Add Server Device Authentication Server User Authentication Server Accounting Server IP Address UDP Port 1 65535 Timeout 1 10 seconds Retries 0 3 Sign Packets Secret Add Server Add Server Remove Server Edit Server Modify Authentication Order Close Help Figure 3 1 Add Server To add a RADIUS server do the following 1 Open the faceplate display open the Switch menu and select Radius Servers In the Rad
236. ity Syntax Keywords A 46 Resets the switch configuration parameters If you omit the keyword the default is Reset Switch Admin session reset config config name factory port port number radius security services snmp switch default system zoning config config name Resets the configuration given by config name to the factory default values for switch port port threshold alarm and zoning configuration as described in Table A 9 through Table A 12 If Config name does not exist on the switch a configuration with that name will be created If you omit config name the active configuration is reset You must activate the configuration for the changes to take effect for switch port and port threshold alarm configuration default values factory Resets switch configuration port configuration port threshold alarm configuration zoning configuration SNMP configuration system configuration security configuration RADIUS configuration switch services configuration and zoning to the factory default values as described in Table A 9 through Table A 17 The switch configuration is activated automatically NOTE W Because this keyword changes network parameters the workstation could lose communication with the switch and release the Admin session W This keyword does not affect installed license keys port port number Reinitializes the port given by port number Ports are numbered beginning with O
237. ius Server Information dialog shown in Figure 3 1 click the Add Server tab Select the server type Device User Account In the IP Address field enter the remote IP address of the server In the UDP Port field enter the remote UDP port number of the Authentication RADIUS Server The RADIUS Accounting Server UDP port will always be the value of Device User Authentication Server UDP Port 1 In the Timeout field enter the timeout value in seconds minimum of 1 second maximum of 30 seconds This is the number of seconds the RADIUS client will wait for a response from the RADIUS server before retrying or giving up on a request 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 3 Managing Fabrics RADIUS Servers ls 59097 02 B 10 In the Retries field enter the the number of retries This is the maximum number of times the RADIUS client will retry a request sent to the primary RADIUS server Select the Sign Packet check box to enable the switch to include a digital signature Message Authenticator in all RADIUS access request packets sent to the RADIUS server A valid Message Authenticator attribute will be required in all RADIUS server responses In the Secret field enter the server secret A secret is required for all RADIUS servers The secret is used when generating and checking the Message Authenticator attribute Click the Add Server button to add the server and click the Close button to exit the dialog Click the Modify Aut
238. ive cancel clear edit history limits list restore save active Displays information for the active zone set including component zones and zone members This keyword does not require an Admin session cancel Closes the current Zoning Edit session Any unsaved changes are lost clear Clears all inactive zone sets from the volatile edit copy of the zoning database This keyword requires a zoning edit session This keyword does not affect the non volatile zoning database However if you enter the Zoning Clear command followed by the Zoning Save command the non volatile zoning database will be cleared from the switch NOTE The preferred method for clearing the zoning database from the switch is the Reset Zoning command edit Opens a Zoning Edit session 59097 02 B XKX A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Zoning Command aaa history Displays a history of zoning modifications This keyword does not require an Admin session History information includes the following Hi Time of the most recent zone set activation or deactivation and the user who performed it B Time of the most recent modifications to the zoning database and the user who made them WB Checksum for the zoning database limits Displays the number of zone sets zones aliases members per zone members per alias and total members in the zoning database This keyword also displays the switch zoning database limits excluding the active zone set
239. k ckckckockck SystemDescription SANbox 5600 Series FC Switch EthONetworkAddress 10 20 11 192 use set setup system to update MACAddress 00 c0 dd 00 71 ee WorldWideName 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 71 ed ChassisSerialNumber FAM033100024 SymbolicName SANbox xxxx ActiveSWVersion V5 0 X X XX XX ActiveTimestamp day month date time year DiagnosticsStatus Passed LicensedPorts 20 A 106 59097 02 B XX LOGIC A Command Line Interface Show Config Command aaa Show Config Command Authority Syntax Keywords 59097 02 B Displays switch port alarm threshold security and zoning for the current configuration None show config port port number security switch threshold zoning port port number Displays configuration parameters for the port number given by port number Ports are numbered beginning with O If port number is omitted all ports are specified security Displays the security database Autosave parameter value switch Displays configuration parameters for the switch threshold Displays alarm threshold parameters for the switch zoning Displays zoning configuration parameters for the switch A 107 A Command Line Interface XX Show Config Command QLOGIC AA NY Examples The following is an example of the Show Config Port command SANbox xxxx 5 show config port 3 Port Number 3 AdminState Offline LinkSpeed Auto PortType GL SymbolicName Port3 ALFairness False DeviceScan
240. keyword belonging to the command given by command If you omit keyword the system displays the available keywords for the specified command all Displays a list of all available commands including command variations Examples The following is an example of the Help Config command SANbox xxxx 5 help config config CONFIG OPTIONS The config command operates on configurations Usage config activate backup cancel copy delete edit list restore save The following is an example of the Help Config Edit command SANbox xxxx gt help config edit config edit CONFIG NAME This command initiates a configuration session and places the current session into config edit mode If CONFIG NAME is given and it exists it gets edited otherwise it gets created If it is not given the currently active configuration is edited Admin mode is required for this command Usage config edit CONFIG NAME 59097 02 B A 35 A Command Line Interface XX History Command QLOGIC EN History Command Displays a numbered list of the previously entered commands from which you can re execute selected commands Authority None Syntax history Notes Use the History command to provide context for the command m Enter Command string to re execute the most recent command that matches command string m Enter line number to re execute the corresponding command from the History display W Enter partial command string to re execu
241. l operation yellow to indicate operational with errors red to indicate a potential failure or non operational state and blue to indicate unknown unreachable or unmanageable Refer to Fabric Status on page 3 29 for more information about topology display icons 2 24 59097 02 B XX LOGIC 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager Using the Topology Display ls 2 12 2 Working with Switches and Links 2 12 2 1 Switch and link icons are selectable and moveable and serve as access points for other displays and menus You select switches and links to display information about them modify their configuration or delete them from the display Context sensitive popup menus are displayed when you right click on a switch or link icon or in the background of the topology display graphic window Selecting Switches and Links 2 12 2 2 Selected switch icons are highlighted in light blue Selected ISLs are displayed as a heavier line You can select switches and links in the following ways m To select a switch or a link click the icon or link W To select multiple switches or links hold down the Control key and select B To select all switches or links right click anywhere in the graphic window background Select Select All Switches or Select All Links from the popup menu To cancel a selection press and hold the Control key and select the item again To cancel all selections click in the graphic window background Arranging
242. l value 1 4294967295 100 FrameSize decimal value 36 2148 256 DataPattern 32 bit hex value or Default Default StopOnError True False False Do you want to start the test y n n 4 After all parameter values are defined press the Y key to start the test After the command executes a message on the screen will appear detailing the test results 59097 02 B A 125 A Command Line Interface XX Uptime Command QLOGIC EN Uptime Command Displays the elapsed up time since the switch was last reset and reset method A hot reset or non disruptive firmware activation does not reset the elapsed up time reported by this command Authority None Syntax uptime Examples The following is an example of the Uptime command SANbox xxxx 5 uptime Elapsed up time 0 day s 2 hour s 28 min s 44 sec s Reason last reset NormalReset A 126 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC A Command Line Interface User Command I aaa User Command Authority Syntax Keywords 59097 02 B Administers and displays user accounts Admin account name and an Admin session The Accounts and List keywords are available to all account names without an Admin session user accounts add delete account name edit list accounts Displays all user accounts that exist on the switch This keyword is available to all account names without an Admin session add Add a user account to the switch You will be prompted for an ac
243. lace a failed switch for which an archive is available 59097 02 B 1 At the failed switch a Turn off the power and disconnect the AC cords b Note port locations and remove the interconnection cables and SFPs c Remove the failed switch At the replacement switch a Mount the switch in the location where the failed switch was removed b Install the SFPs using the same ports as were used on the failed switch CAUTION Do not reconnect inter switch links target devices and initiator devices at this time Doing so could invalidate the fabric zoning configuration C Attach the AC cords and power up the switch Select the failed switch in the topology display Open the Switch menu and select Delete Restore the configuration from the failed switch to the replacement switch a Open a new fabric through the replacement switch b Open the faceplate display for the replacement switch Open the Switch menu and select Restore c In the Restore dialog enter the archive file from the failed switch or browse for the file d Clickthe Restore button Reset the replacement switch to activate the configuration formerly possessed by the failed switch including the domain ID and the zoning database Open the Switch menu and select Reset Switch Reconnect the inter switch links target devices and initiator devices to the replacement switch using the same ports as were used on the failed switch 3 27 3 Managing F
244. lay 2 1 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager XKX Workstation Requirements QLOGIC n n 2 1 Workstation Requirements The requirements for fabric management workstations running SANsurfer Switch Manager are described in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Workstation Requirements Operating System B Windows 2000 2003 and XP W Solaris 8 9 and 10 E Linux Red Hat EL 3 x B H S u S E Linux 9 0 Enterprise Mac OS X 10 3 Memory 256 MB or more Disk Space 150 MB per installation Processor 500 MHz or faster Hardware CD ROM drive RJ 45 Ethernet port RS 232 serial port optional Internet Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 0 and later Netscape Navigator 4 72 and later Mozilla 1 02 and later Java 2 Run Time Environment to support the web applet Telnet workstations require an RJ 45 Ethernet port or an RS 232 serial port and an operating system with a Telnet client 2 2 Installing the Management Application You can manage the switch using SANsurfer Switch Manager as a standalone application or as a part of SANsurfer Management Suite SANsurfer Management Suite is QLogic s integrated fabric management application managing both HBAs and switches f your switch was shipped with a SANsurfer Switch Manager Disk refer to SANsurfer Switch Manager on page 2 3 for instructions on how to install SANsurfer Switch Manager m f your switch was shipped with a SANsurfer Management Suite Disk ref
245. le elles A 13 CIM Subscription Configuration Parameters lille A 15 ISL Group Member Attributes llslslellselelleeeselerelree A 27 Port Group Member Attributes elles A 28 MS Group Member Attributes 5 223 e Re y RR RR EE E A 29 Group Member Attributes su Sama ka Bode Pdor UE NGAG NLA LANANG ee A 30 Switch Configuration Defaults 2 4 ee n RR NG A 48 Port Configuration Defaults xha nG nes e t eee Ra tm tem Eth te ng A 49 Port Threshold Alarm Configuration Defaults llli else A 50 Zoning Configuration Berault 2 7 9 Kama oes oe ee eo Pete ee tee hae A 51 SNMP Configuration Defaults 0 0 0c ee A 51 RADIUS Configuration Detaulis 2 2 424 haa ba mah ABA LALA bance heated A 52 Services Configuration Defaults llle A 52 System Configuration Defaults 44 Ro mp AA the rx ee A 53 Security Configuration Defaults e m wee Selene Rc Ip C ODE A 53 Set Contig Port Parameters iue om nem cR ER ye oa Rb EURO x E ed A 64 Security Configuration Parameters 0c eee eee eens A 67 Set Config Switch Parameters 0 00 cee tees A 67 Set Config Threshold Parameters 00 0 cece eee A 69 Set Config Zoning Parameters llle A 70 RADIUS Service Settings i etc ee Pre RE Een URP EET goals Rhee YN E ed A 82 Switch Services Settings d us dese wea n o RR Soe SE DR Ru Sd Ks A 84 SNMP Configuration Settings s Leu rfQeesidexuDe9 ee web ee bee ee ee
246. lect a Edit Security Group Member option In the Edit Security Group Member dialog enter a new Group Member WWN choose an option in the Authentication pull down menu and click the OK button to save the changes H Remove a Security Set Group or Member Select the item to remove open the Edit menu and select a Remove option In the Remove dialog click the OK button to remove that item from the security file and save the changes B Clear Security Select the Security Sets directory name open the Edit menu and select Clear Security In the Remove dialog click the OK button to remove all security sets and save the changes You can also right click on the Security Sets top level directory name and select Clear Security from the popup menu and click the OK button to remove all security sets 3 Click the Apply button to save the changes and keep the Edit Security dialog open To save changes and close the Edit Security dialog in one step click the OK button 4 Click the OK button to close the Edit Security dialog 3 16 59097 02 B XKX 3 Managing Fabrics QLOGIC Securing a Fabric A aaa 3 24 8 Viewing Properties of a Security Set Group or Member To view the properties of a security set group or member do the following 1 Onthe faceplate display and click the Security button on the toolbar or open the Security menu and select Edit Security to open the Edit Security dialog 2 Choose one of the following m
247. lect one or more switches in the topology display 2 Open the Switch menu and select Delete To delete a link do the following 1 Select one or more links in the topology display 2 Open the Switch menu and select Delete 59097 02 B 3 25 3 Managing Fabrics XX Managing the Fabric Database QLOGIC AA NY 3 4 7 Adding a New Switch to a Fabric If there are no special conditions to be configured for the new switch simply plug in the switch and the switch becomes functional with the default fabric configuration The default fabric configuration settings are B Fabric zoning is sent to the switch from the fabric W X All 1 2 4 Gbps ports will be GL Ports all 10 Gbps ports will be G Ports B The default IP address 10 0 0 1 is assigned to the switch without a gateway or boot protocol configured RARP BOOTP and DHCP If you are adding a new switch to a fabric and do not want to accept the default fabric configuration do the following 1 Ifthe switch is not new from the factory reset the switch to the factory configuration before adding the switch to the fabric by selecting Restore Factory Defaults in the Switch menu from the faceplate display 2 Ifyou want to manage the switch through the Ethernet port you must first configure the IP address using the Network Properties dialog or the Configuration Wizard 3 Configure any special switch settings Consider configuring the Default Visibility setting to None in the Zon
248. lete member group A 59 display 3 17 A 59 display active A 54 A 58 display members A 59 remove 3 16 rename 3 16 A 59 Securityset command A 58 SerDes level test 5 17 service listener A 13 services 4 27 services configuration defaults A 52 Set command A 61 Set Config command A 64 Set Log command A 76 Set Port command A 80 Set Setup command A 82 severity levels 3 31 SFP level test 5 17 SHA 1 authentication A 28 Show command A 92 Show Config command A 107 Show Log command A 111 Show Perf command A 115 Show Setup command A 118 Shutdown command A 122 Index 7 SANbox 5600 Series XKX Switch Management User s Guide QLOGIC AA NN Simple Network Management Protocol switch configuration 4 33 A 86 add 3 26 configuration display A 118 administrative state 4 20 A 62 defaults A 51 advanced properties 4 24 enable 3 20 4 33 configuration 4 18 A 67 proxy 4 33 configuration defaults A 48 reset A 47 configuration display A 107 service 4 28 A 85 delete 3 25 trap configuration 4 34 displaying information 4 7 soft zone 3 40 3 56 hard reset 4 17 A 34 static boot method 4 30 hot reset 4 17 status icon color 2 22 icons 3 29 steering A 97 location 4 33 subnet mask address 4 30 log A 88 subscription management service 4 27 A 84 create A 15 manufacturer information A 118 delete A 15 operational information A 98 display A 93 paging 4 15 support file 4 42 A 20 properties 4 19 replace 3 27 reset 4 16 A 126 reset without POS
249. lick the switch icon in the graphic window m To open the link popup menu in the topology display right click the link m To open the switch popup menu in the faceplate display right click the faceplate in the graphic window 2 12 3 Topology Data Windows The topology display provides the following data windows corresponding to the data window tabs B Devices displays information about devices hosts and storage targets connected to the switch Refer to Devices Data Window on page 3 34 for more information M Active Zoneset displays the active zone set for the fabric including zones and their member ports Refer to Active Zone Set Data Window on page 3 35 for more information about this data window Refer to Zoning a Fabric on page 3 39 for information about zone sets and zones W Switch displays current network and switch configuration data for the selected switches Refer to Switch Data Window on page 4 8 for more information m Link displays information about the inter switch links Refer to Link Data Window on page 3 36 to for more information 2 26 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager Using the Faceplate Display ls 2 13 Using the Faceplate Display The faceplate display shown in Figure 2 11 displays the switch name and operational state and port status Consider the following functional elements of Add Switch 9 Faceplate File Fabr
250. log enter the name of the file to open and enter a file password if a password was entered when this fabric view file was saved 3 Click the OK button 3 24 59097 02 B po 3 Managing Fabrics QLOGIC Managing the Fabric Database o 9 9 7 7 Jana 3 4 4 Saving a Fabric View File To save a fabric view file do the following 1 Open the File menu and select Save View As 2 In the Save View dialog enter a new file name 3 Entera file password if necessary 4 Click the OK button 3 4 5 Rediscovering a Fabric After making changes to or deleting switches from a fabric view it may be helpful to again view the actual fabric configuration The rediscover fabric option clears out the current fabric information being displayed and rediscovers all switch information To rediscover a fabric open the Fabric menu and select Rediscover Fabric The rediscover function is more comprehensive than the refresh function 3 4 6 Deleting Switches and Links The SANsurfer Switch Manager application does not automatically delete switches or links that have failed or have been physically removed from the fabric In these cases you can delete switches and links to bring the display up to date If you delete a switch or a link that is still active the SANsurfer Switch Manager application will restore it automatically You can also refresh the display To delete a switch from the topology display do the following 1 Se
251. mand on page A 61 for information about changing the port administrative state While the test is running the remaining ports on the switch remain fully operational Admin session test port port number test type cancel status port port number test type Tests the port given by port number using the test given by test type If you omit test type Internal is used test type can have the following values internal Tests the SerDes for all port speeds independent of the capabilities of the transceiver This is the default The port must be in diagnostics mode to perform this test NOTE An internal test on a 10 Gbps port verifies that a complete path exists but does not send a test frame external Tests both the SerDes and transceiver for all port speeds that are supported by the transceiver The port must be in diagnostics mode to perform this test and a loopback plug must be installed in the transceiver NOTE An external test on a 10 Gbps port verifies that a complete path exists but does not send a test frame online Tests communications between the port and its device node or device loop at the operating port speed The port being tested must be online and connected to a remote device The port passes if the test frame that was sent by the ASIC matches the frame that is received This test does not disrupt communication on the port A 123 A Command Line Interface XX Test Command QLOGIC A
252. mary Hash is not avail able on the Port group member The Primary Hash and the Second ary Hash cannot be the same Secondary Hex string that is encrypted by the Secondary Hash and sent for Secret authentication The string has the following lengths depending on the Secondary Hash function W MD5 hash 16 byte m SHA 1 hash 20 byte A 28 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC A Command Line Interface Group Command o 9 9 9 7 S aaa Table A 7 MS Group Member Attributes Attribute Description Member CTAuthentication Hash Secret Port worldwide name for the N Port device that would attach to the switch Common Transport CT authentication Enables True or dis ables False authentication for MS group members The default is False The hash function to use to decipher the encrypted Secret sent by the MS group member Hash values are MD5 or SHA 1 Hexadecimal string that is encrypted by the Hash function for authentication with MS group members The string has the fol lowing lengths depending on the Hash function B MD5 hash 16 byte B SHA 1 hash 20 byte copy group source group destination Creates a new group named group destination and copies the membership into it from the group given by group source create group type Creates a group with the name given by group with the type given by type A group name must begin with a letter and be
253. me the baseline was set End Time The last time the statistics were updated on the display Total Time Total time period from start time to end time Al Init Number of times the port entered the initialization state AL Init Error Number of times the port entered initialization and the initial ization failed Increments count when port has a sync loss Bad Frames Number of frames that were truncated due to a loss of sync or the frame didn t end with an EOF Class 2 Frames In Number of class 2 frames received by this port Class 2 Frames Out Number of class 2 frames transmitted by this port Class 2 Words In Number of class 2 words received by this port Class 2 Words Out Number of class 2 words transmitted by this port Class 3 Frames In Number of class 3 frames received by this port Class 3 Frames Out Number of class 3 frames transmitted by this port 5 5 5 Managing Ports Displaying Port Information XX LOGIC AA NN Table 5 5 Port Statistics Data Window Entries Continued 5 6 Entry Description Class 3 Toss Class 3 Words In Class 3 Words Out Decode Errors Ep Connects FBusy Flow Errors FReject Invalid CRC Invalid Destination Address Link Failures LIP AL PD AL PS LIP f7 AL PS LIP f7 f7 Number of class 3 frames that were discarded by this port A frame can be discarded because of detection of a missing frame based on SEQ CNT detection of an E
254. meter Enables True or disables False the generation DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled of alarms for each of the following events ISLMonitoringEnabled mA B CRC errors LoginMonitoringEnabled M Decode errors LogoutMonitoringEnabled 2 m ISL connection count LOSMonitoringEnabled m Device login errors m Device logout errors B Loss of signal errors Rising Trigger The event count above which a rising trigger alarm is logged The switch will not generate another rising trigger alarm for that event until the count descends below the falling trigger and again exceeds the rising trigger Falling Trigger The event count below which a falling trigger alarm is logged The switch will not generate another falling trigger alarm for that event until the count exceeds the rising trigger and descends again below the falling trigger Sample Window The period of time in seconds in which to count events 59097 02 B A 69 A Command Line Interface XX Set Config Command QLOGIC LL X 9 4 zoning Initiates an editing session in which to change switch zoning attributes The system displays each parameter one line at a time and prompts you for a value For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets Table A 22 Set Config Zoning Parameters Parameter Description InteropAutoSave Available only when the InteropMode parameter is St
255. min session prevents other accounts from making changes at the same time either through Telnet or SANsurfer Switch Manager You must also open a Config Edit session with the Config Edit command and indicate which configuration you want to modify If you do not specify a configuration name the active configuration is assumed The Config Edit session provides access to the Set Config commands with which you make modifications to the port switch port threshold alarm or zoning configuration components as shown SANbox xxxx gt admin start SANbox xxxx admin gt config edit default The config named default is being edited SANbox xxxx admin config gt set config port SANbox xxxx admin config set config switch gt SANbox xxxx admin config gt set config threshold gt SANbox xxxx admin config set config zoning The Config Save command saves the changes you made during the Config Edit session In this case changes to the configuration named Default are being saved to a new configuration named config_ 10132003 However the new configuration does not take effect until you activate it with the Config Activate command SANbox xxxx admin config gt config save config 10132003 SANbox xxxx admin gt config activate config 10132003 SANbox xxxx admin gt admin end The Admin End command releases the Admin session for other administrators when you are done making changes to the switch A
256. mmand Line Interface QLOGIC Show Command o 9 7 aaa pagebreak Displays the current pagebreak setting The pagebreak setting limits the display of information to 20 lines On or allows the continuous display of information without a break Off perf option Displays performance information for all ports Refer to the Show Perf Command on page A 115 port port number Displays operational information for the port given by port number Ports are numbered beginning with O If port number is omitted information is displayed for all ports Table A 27 describes the port parameters Table A 27 Show Port Parameters Entry Description Alinit Incremented each time the port begins AL initialization AlinitError Number of times the port entered initialization and the initializa tion failed Bad Frames Number of frames that have framing errors ClassXFramesln Number of class x frames received by this port ClassXFramesOut Number of class x frames sent by this port ClassXWordsln Number of class x words received by this port ClassXWordsOut Number of class x words sent by this port ClassXToss Number of times an SOFi3 or SOFn3 frame is tossed from TBUF DecodeError Number of decode errors detected EpConnects Number of times an E Port connected through ISL negotiation FBusy Number of times the switch sent a F BSY because Class 2 frame could not be delivered within ED TOV time Number of class 2 and class 3 fabric busy
257. move Account tab in the dialog to present the display shown in Figure 4 2 Select the account login name from the list of accounts at the top of the dialog and click the Remove Account button User Account Administration SANbox Manager x Admin Authority Days to Expiration never expires never expires never expires never expires Remove Account Select user account to be removed Account selected for removal ho selection Remove Account Remove Account Change Password Close Help Figure 4 2 User Account Administration Dialog Remove Account 59097 02 B XKX 4 Managing Switches LOGIC Managing User Accounts S aaa 4 1 3 Changing a User Account Password To change the password for an account on a switch open the Switch menu in the faceplate display and select User Accounts Click the Change Password tab in the dialog to present the display shown in Figure 4 3 Select the account login name from the list of accounts at the top of the dialog then enter the old password the new password and verify the new password in the corresponding fields Click the Change Password button Any user can change their password for their account but only the Admin account name can change the password for another user s account If the administrator does not know the user s original password the administrator must remove the account and add the account User Account Administration SANbox
258. name subscription list Adds the set of subscriptions given by subscription list to the listener given by listener name Use a space to delimit subscription names in subscription list create listener name Prompts you in a line by line fashion to create a CIM listener with the name given by listener name listener name can have up to 32 characters 0 9 A Z a z and The CIM listener configuration parameters are described in Table A 3 Table A 3 CIM Listener Configuration Parameters Parameter Description Name Listener name Type Listener type B Permanent Send indications to the CIM client whether a connection can be established or not This is the default B Transient Sends indications to the CIM client but ceases if a connection cannot be established after 60 minutes URL IP address of the CIM client and the port number to which to send indications The default is 10 0 0 1 5000 delete listener name Deletes the listener given by listener name from the CIM database A Command Line Interface XX CIMListener Command QLOGIC AA NN Examples edit listener name Opens an editing session in which you can modify the CIM listener given by listener name Refer to Table A 3 for a description of the CIM listener configuration parameters The following is an example of the CIMListener Create command SANbox xxxx admin cim 5 cimlistener create listener 1 A list of
259. nces you want 4 Click the OK button to save the changes 2 9 Using Online Help Online help is available for the SANsurfer Switch Manager application and its functions The two ways to open the online help file are open the Help menu and select Help Topics or click the Help button in the tool bar You can also display context sensitive help for all SANsurfer Switch Manager dialogs by choosing the Help button in the dialog 210 Viewing Software Version and Copyright Information To view SANsurfer Switch Manager software version and copyright information open the Help menu and select About 59097 02 B 2 17 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager XKX SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface LOGIC AA NY 211 SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface The SANsurfer Switch Manager application uses two basic displays to manage the fabric and individual switches the topology display and the faceplate display The topology display shows all switches that are able to communicate and all connections between switches The faceplate display shows the front of a single switch and its ports Both displays share some common elements as shown in Figure 2 6 Menu Tool Bar Bar Topology sANsurfer Switch Manager Display UE LM Add Open Save Refresh Events Help QLOGIC Switch 9 Fabric Nom Fan poo pan nawa noon IC B em SW uem SW3 Graphic Fabric VAROOW
260. nd SANbox xxxx gt show topology Unique ID Key A ALPA D Domain ID P Port ID Port Local Local Remote Remote Unique Number Type PortWWN Type NodeWWN ID 5 F 20 08 00260 dd 00 bdrec N 20 00 00 00 c9 22 1e 93 010500 P 10 E 20 0a 00 c0 dd 00 bd ec E 10 00 00 c0 dd 00 80 21 4 0x4 D A 104 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Show Command ls The following is an example of the Show Topology command for port 1 SANbox xxxx gt show topology 1 Local Link Information PortNumber 1 PortID 650100 PortWWN 20 01 00 60 dd 00 91 411 PortType F Remote Link Information Device 0 odeWWN 50 80 02 00 00 06 d5 38 PortType NL Description NULL IPAddress 0 0 0 0 Device 1 odeWWN 20 00 00 20 37 2b 08 c9 PortType NL Description NULL IPAddress 0 0 0 0 Device 2 Description NULL IPAddress 0 0 0 0 Device 3 NodeWWN 20 00 00 20 37 2b 05 c9 PortType NL Description NULL IPAddress 0 0 0 0 59097 02 B A 105 A Command Line Interface XX Show Command QLOGIC AA M P V b b The following is an example of the Show Version command SANbox xxxx 5 show version Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck ck Sk kk ck ck ck kk ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck ck Ck ck Ck ck Ck Ck ck Ck ck kk ck ckckckck e Command Line Interface SHell CLISH d Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck ck Ck ck Ck Ck ck kk k
261. ndow To open the Switch data window select one or more switches in the topology display or open the faceplate display and click the Switch tab below the data window Table 4 2 describes the Switch data window entries Table 4 2 Switch Data Window Entries Entry Description First Port Address Switch Fibre Channel address World Wide Name Switch World Wide Name Serial Number Number assigned to each chassis Required for license keys Reason for Status Additional status information User Name Account name Login Level Authority level Super User Super user privileges enabled disabled UserAuthentication Enforcement of account names and authority always Enabled True Vendor Switch manufacturer Firmware Version Active firmware version Inactive Firmware Version Inactive firmware version Pending Firmware Version Firmware version that will be activated at the next reset PROM Boot Version PROM boot version 59097 02 B po 4 Managing Switches QLOGIC Displaying Switch Information T OO a Table 4 2 Switch Data Window Entries Continued Entry Description MAC Address Media Access Control address IP Address Internet Protocol address Subnet Mask Gateway SNMP Enabled Negotiated Domain ID Configured Domain ID Domain ID Lock Number of Ports Switch Type Operational State Administrative State Configured Admin State R A TOV E D TOV Interop Mode Legacy Address Format Interop Au
262. new Renames the zone set given by zone set old to the name given by zone set new You can rename the active zone set zones zone set Displays all zones that are components of the zone set given by zone set This keyword does not require an Admin session Notes B Azone set must be active for its definitions to be applied to the fabric m Only one zone set can be active at one time B A zone can be a component of more than one zone set Examples The following is an example of the Zoneset Active command SANbox xxxx 5 zoneset active ActiveZoneSet Bets LastActivatedBy admin OB session6 LastActivatedOn day month date time year The following is an example of the Zoneset List command SANbox xxxx 5 zoneset list Current List of ZoneSets A 136 59097 02 B XX A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Zoneset Command aaa The following is an example of the Zoneset Zones command SANbox xxxx 5 zoneset zones ssss Current List of Zones for ZoneSet ssss zonel zone2 zone3 59097 02 B A 137 A Command Line Interface XX Zoning Command QLOGIC AA NN Zoning Command Authority Syntax Keywords A 138 Opens a Zoning Edit session in which to create and manage zone sets and zones Refer to the Zone Command on page A 131 and the Zoneset Command on page A 135 Admin session except for the Active History Limits and List keywords The Clear keyword also requires a zoning edit session zoning act
263. nfigurations on page A 4 NOTE M fthe restore process changes the IP address all management sessions are terminated Use the Set Setup System command to return the IP configuration to the values you want Refer to the Set Setup Command on page A 82 W Configuration archive files created with the SANsurfer Switch Manager Archive function are not compatible with the Config Restore command save config name Saves changes made during a configuration edit session in the configuration given by config name If you omit config name the value for config name you chose for the most recent Config Edit command is used config name can be up to 31 characters excluding semicolon and comma The switch supports up to 10 configurations including the default configuration Notes If you edit the active configuration changes will be held in suspense until you reactivate the configuration or activate another configuration Examples The following shows an example of how to open and close a Config Edit session SANbox xxxx 5 admin start SANbox xxxx admin 4 config edit The config named default is being edited SANbox xxxx admin config 5 config cancel Configuration mode will be canceled Please confirm y n n y SANbox xxxx admin 4 admin end A 18 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Config Command aaa The following is an example of how to create a backup file configdata and download the
264. ng 1 Open the faceplate display open the Switch menu and select Radius Servers 2 In the Radius Server Information dialog shown in Figure 3 4 click the Modify Authentication Order tab 3 Inserver list at the top of the dialog select the server to be modified 4 Make changes to the Device Authentication Order or User Authentication Order pull down menus Select Local Radius or Radius Local 5 Click the Modify Order button to save the changes and click the Close button to exit the dialog 3 6 59097 02 B XKX 3 Managing Fabrics QLOGIC Securing a Fabric I aaa 3 2 Securing a Fabric Fabric security consists of the following B Connection Security User Account Security Security Consistency Checklist Device Security Fabric Services 3 2 1 Connection Security Connection security provides an encrypted data path for switch management methods The switch supports the Secure Shell SSH protocol for the command line interface and the Secure Socket Layer SSL protocol for management applications such as SANsurfer Switch Manager and Common Information Module CIM The SSL handshake process between the workstation and the switch involves the exchanging of certificates These certificates contain the public and private keys that define the encryption The switch certificate is valid for one year beginning with its creation date and time The workstation validates the switch certificate by comparing the workst
265. ng Dialog Tool Bar Buttons and Icons Tool Bar Button Description fi Create Zone Set button create a new zone set Zone Set 59097 02 B 3 45 3 Managing Fabrics XKX Zoning a Fabric QLOGIC AA NY Table 3 4 Edit Zoning Dialog Tool Bar Buttons and Icons Continued Tool Bar Button Description E Create Zone button create a new zone Zone EY Create Alias button create another name for a set of objects Alias aif Add Member button adds selected port device to a zone Insert A Remove Member button delete the selected zone from a zone mm set or delete the selected port device from a zone ck Switch port icon not logged in it Switch port icon logged in Ef NL Port loop device icon logged in to fabric NL Port loop device icon not logged in to fabric E N Port device icon logged in to fabric N Port device icon not logged in to fabric 3 46 59097 02 B XKX 3 Managing Fabrics QLOGIC Zoning a Fabric o OLLL TT T T U LUCERE 3 7 3 2 Configuring the Zoning Database Use the Zoning Config dialog to change the Auto Save Default Visibility and Discard Inactive configuration parameters In the faceplate display open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning Config to open the Zoning Config dialog shown in Figure 3 16 After making changes click the OK button to put the new values into effect Zoning Config Interop Auto Save v Default Visibility
266. ng or connecting ISLs and switch configuration changes Q No port in the fabric is in the diagnostic state L No zoning changes are being made in the fabric CL Nochanges are being made to attached devices including powering up powering down disconnecting connecting and HBA configuration changes W Ports that are stable when the non disruptive activation begins then change states will be reset When the non disruptive activation is complete SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions reconnect automatically However Telnet sessions must be restarted manually B This command clears the event log and all counters 59097 02 B A 37 A Command Line Interface XX Image Command QLOGIC ee Image Command Authority Syntax Keywords A 38 Manages and installs switch firmware Admin session image cleanup fetch account name ip address file source file destination install list unpack file cleanup Removes all firmware image files from the switch All firmware image files are removed automatically each time the switch is reset fetch account name ip address file source file destination Retrieves image file given by file source and stores it on the switch with the file name given by file destination The image file is retrieved from the FTP server with the IP address given by ip address and an account name given by account name If an account name needs a password to access the FTP server
267. nitoring Interface Enables True or disables False the monitoring of target and initiator device information The default is True FDMIEntries The number of device entries to maintain in the FDMI DefaultDomainID DomainIDLock SymbolicName R A TOV E D TOV PrincipalPriority ConfigDescription InteropMode LegacyAddressFormat database Enter a number from 0 1000 The default is 1000 Default domain ID The default is 1 Prevents True or allows False dynamic reassign ment of the domain ID The default is False Descriptive name for the switch The name can be up to 32 characters excluding semicolon and comma The default is SANbox xxxx Resource Allocation Timeout Value The number of milliseconds the switch waits to allow two ports to allocate enough resources to establish a link The default is 10000 Error Detect Timeout Value The number of millisec onds a port is to wait for errors to clear The default is 2000 The priority used in the FC SW 2 principal switch selection algorithm 1 is high 255 is low The default is 254 Switch configuration description The configuration description can be up to 32 characters excluding semicolon and comma The default is Config Default Propagates just the active zone set throughout the fabric Standard FC SW 2 compliant or the entire zoning database Interop 1 non compliant The default is Standard Available only when
268. ntains a member specified by Domain ID 1 and Port 1 Fabric B ZN1 contains a member specified by Domain ID 1 and Port 2 In this case the merge will fail because the two zones have the same name but different membership 59097 02 B XKX 3 Managing Fabrics QLOGIC Zoning a Fabric o a 3 7 7 2 Zone Merge Failure Recovery When a zone merge failure occurs the conflict that caused the failure must be resolved You can correct a failure due to a zone conflict by deactivating one of the active zone sets or by editing the conflicting zones so that their membership is the same You can deactivate the active zone set on one fabric if the active zone set on the other fabric accurately defines your zoning needs If not you must edit the zone memberships and reactivate the zone sets After correcting the zone membership reset the isolated ports to allow the fabrics to join NOTE f you deactivate the active zone set in one fabric and the Interop Auto Save parameter is enabled the active zone set from the second fabric will propagate to the first fabric and replace all zones with matching names in the configured zone sets If the zone sets to merge have the same Zone A that only differ in the type of zone soft vs ACL the zone sets will merge If this is a 2 switch fabric Switch 1 will state that Zone A is soft and Switch 2 will state that Zone A is ACL Refer to Managing Zones on page 3 52 for information about adding and removing
269. of up to three groups with no more than one of each group type The security configuration is made up of all security sets on the switch In addition to authorization the switch can be configured to require authentication to validate the identity of the connecting switch device or host Authentication can be performed locally using the switch security database or remotely using a Remote Dial In User Service RADIUS server With a RADIUS server the security database for the entire fabric resides on the server In this way the security database can be managed centrally rather than on each switch You can configure up to five RADIUS servers to provide failover You can configure the RADIUS server to authenticate just the switch or both the switch and the initiator device if the device supports authentication When using a RADIUS server every switch in the fabric must have a network connection A RADIUS server can also be configured to authenticate user accounts Consider the devices switches and management agents and evaluate the need for authorization and authentication Also consider whether the security database is to distributed on the switches or centralized on a RADIUS server and how many servers to configure Managing device security involves the following tasks Creating security sets groups and members Editing a security configuration on a switch Viewing properties of a security set group or member Archiving a security conf
270. ommand issued Waiting for response No response from 10 20 10 100 Unreachable 59097 02 B A 43 A Command Line Interface XX Ps Command QLOGIC AA NN Ps Command Displays current system process information Authority None Syntax ps Examples The following is an example of the Ps command SANbox xxxx gt ps PID PPID CPU TIME ELAPSED COMMAND 338 327 0 0 00 00 00 3 01 18 35 cus 339 327 0 0 00 00 01 3 01 18 35 ens 340 327 0 0 00 00 21 3 01 18 35 dlog 341 327 Dii 00205433 3JFOL118 35 ds 342 327 0 2 00 11 29 3 01 18 35 mgmtApp 343 327 0 0 00 00 04 3 01 18 35 fc2 344 327 0 0 00 02 16 3 01 18 35 nserver 345 327 0 0 00 02 44 3 01 18 35 mserver 346 327 0 8 00 35 12 3 01 18 35 util 347 327 0 0 00 00 29 3 01 18 35 snmpservicepath 348 327 0 0 00 02 46 3 01 18 34 eport 349 327 0 0 00 00 21 3 01 18 34 PortApp 350 327 5 6 04 08 24 3 01 18 34 port mon 351 327 0 0 00 01 38 3 01 18 34 zoning 352 327 0 0 00 00 01 3 01 18 34 diagApp 404 327 0 0 00 00 04 3 01 18 27 snmpd 405 327 0 0 00 00 02 3 01 18 27 snmpmain 406 405 0 0 00 00 00 3 01 18 26 snmpmain A 44 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Quit Command o C eO Aj vQV qEEEEREEEN Quit Command Closes the Telnet session Authority None Syntax quit exit or logout Notes You can also enter Control D to close the Telnet session 59097 02 B A 45 A Command Line Interface XX Reset Command QLOGIC EN kk 4 Reset Command Author
271. onditions change the fabric forwards this information to the management workstation where it is reflected in the various displays 2 23 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager XKX Using the Topology Display LOGIC ERE 7777 A 1X 2 12 Using the Topology Display The topology display shown in Figure 2 10 receives information from the selected fabric and displays its topology Switches and inter switch links ISLs appear in the graphic window and use color to indicate status Consider the following topology display features W Switch and Link Status B Working with Switches and Links B Topology Data Windows sAnsurfer Switch Manager ol File Fabric Switch Wizards View Help P e m XX Add Open Save Refresh Events Help QLOGIC Switch 9 Fabric 1 aasa ao um Sw Normal Em SW2 SW3 Targetinitia Switch Address Type WP Unknown Swit 130181 NL Port 20 00 00 20 37 73 13 69 21 00 00 20 37 Unknown 130182 NL Port 20 00 00 20 37 73 12 9b 21 00 00 20 37 Unknown 130184 NL Port 20 00 00 20 37 73 05 26 21 00 00 20 37 Initiator 130d00 N Port 20 01 00 80 8b 27 a7 bc 21 01 00 60 8b KI Figure 2 10 Topology Display 2 12 1 Switch and Link Status Switch icon shape and color provide information about the switch and its operational state Lines represent links between switches The topology display uses green to indicate norma
272. one set tree select the zone set In the graphic window select the port to add to the zone Open the Edit menu and select Add Members m Select a port by port number Fibre Channel address or World Wide Name in the Port Device tree and drag it into the zone m Select a port by port number Fibre Channel address or World Wide Name in the Port Device tree Right click the zone and select Add Zone Members from the popup menu 6 Click the Apply button to save changes to the zoning database 59097 02 B 3 53 3 Managing Fabrics Zoning a Fabric XX QLOGIC AA NY 3 7 5 2 Adding Zone Members You can zone a port device by switch domain ID and port number device port Fibre Channel address or the device port WWN Adding a port device to a zone affects every zone set in which that zone is a member To add ports devices to a zone do the following 1 Open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning dialog 2 Choose one of the following methods to add the port device Select a port device in the Port Device tree and drag it into the zone To select multiple ports devices press and hold the Control key while selecting Select a port device in the Port Device tree To select multiple ports devices press the Control key while selecting Select a zone set in the left pane Open the Edit menu and select Add Members Select a port device in the Port Device tree To select multiple ports devices pres
273. op s ability to remain in the open state indefi nitely True reduces the amount of arbitration on a loop when there is only one device on the loop The default is False lOStreamGuard O Stream Guard Enables or disables the suppression of RSCN messages lOStreamGuard can have the following values W Enable Suppresses the reception of RSCN messages from other ports for which lOStreamGuard is enabled W Disable Allows free transmission and reception of RSCN messages W Auto Suppresses the reception of RSCN messages when the port is connected to an initiator device with a QLogic HBA For older QLogic HBAs such as the QLA2200 the DeviceScanEnabled parameter must also be enabled The default is Auto A 66 59097 02 B XKX A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Set Config Command A aaa Table A 18 Set Config Port Parameters Continued Parameter Description PDISCPingEnable Enables True or disables False the transmission of ping 1 2 4 Gbps ports only messages from the switch to all devices on a loop port The default is True security Initiates an editing session in which to change the security settings The system displays each parameter one line at a time and prompts you for a value For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets Enter q or Q to end the editing session Table A 19 describes the Set Config Security p
274. open the SANsurfer Switch Manager with no fabric displayed Load Default Fabric File x An encryption key is required to decrypt information stored in the default fabric view file Default Fabric View File Encryption Key Load View File Continue Without Loading Help Figure 2 4 Load Default Fabric File Dialog 2 5 Uninstalling SANsurfer Switch Manager The method you use to uninstall SANsurfer Switch Manager depends on how you installed it W lfyouinstalled SANsurfer Switch Manager as part of SANsurfer Management Suite you must uninstall SANsurfer Management Suite Refer to SMS Uninstall on page 2 14 W Ifyou installed SANsurfer Switch Manager as a standalone program you must uninstall SANsurfer Switch Manager directly Refer to Standalone Uninstall on page 2 14 59097 02 B 2 13 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager xX Uninstalling SANsurfer Switch Manager QLOGIC E PU p Oo 9 V 2 5 1 SMS Uninstall A program to uninstall SANsurfer Management Suite was included as part of the SANsurfer Management Suite installation process Use this method only if you installed SANsurfer Switch Manager as part of SANsurfer Management Suite The UninstallData folder in the installation directory contains the uninstall program SANsurferUninstaller The default installation directories are m For Windows C Program Files QLogic_Corporation SANsurfer W For Linux opt QLogi
275. ort Information Port information is available primarily in the faceplate display shown in Figure 5 1 The faceplate display data windows provide information and statistics for switches and ports Use the topology display to view status information on fabrics switches and links between switches Faceplate File Fabric Switch Port Zoning Wizards View Help g a mE m a m Add Open Save Refresh Events Zoning Security Help Switch Fabric1 SW Em SW2 Em Sw3 Port Address 020300 Admin Port Type 1GL Port Oper Port Type E Port Admin Port State Online Oper Port State Online Configured Admin Port State Online Logged In Logged In E Port Connection Status Connected E Port Isolation Reason None Figure 5 1 Faceplate Display Port Information 59097 02 B B4 5 Managing Ports Displaying Port Information XX QLOGIC n X 3 V 5 1 1 Monitoring Port Status The faceplate display provides the following port related information B Port type B Port operational state B Port speed B Port media To display port number and status information for a port position the cursor over a port on the faceplate display The status information changes depending on the View menu option selected 5 1 1 1 Displaying Port Types To display port type status from the faceplate display open the View menu and select View Port Types Table 5 1 lists
276. ort number If you omit port number port 0 is used For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets Enter q to end the configuration Table A 18 describes the port parameters Table A 18 Set Config Port Parameters Parameter Description AdminState Port administrative state W Online Activates and prepares the port to send data This is the default W Offline Prevents the port from receiving signal and accepting a device login W Diagnostics Prepares the port for testing and prevents the port from accepting a device login W Down Disables the port by removing power from the port lasers 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC A Command Line Interface Set Config Command o 9 9 97 aaa Table A 18 Set Config Port Parameters Continued 59097 02 B Parameter Description LinkSpeed Transmission speed W 1 2 4 Gbps Ports 1 Gbps 2 Gbps 4 Gbps or Auto The default is Auto W 10 Gbps Ports 10 Gbps PortType Port type SymbolicPortName ALFairness 1 2 4 Gbps ports only DeviceScanEnabled ForceOfflineRSCN ARB FF 1 2 4 Gbps ports only InteropCredit ExtCredit 1 2 4 Gbps ports only FANEnable 1 2 4 Gbps ports only W 1 2 4 Gbps Ports GL G F FL Donor The default is GL W 10 Gbps Ports G Descriptive name for the port The name can be up to 32 characters exclu
277. ow The Port Information data window displays port detail information for the selected ports To open the Port Statistics data window click the Port Info tab below the data window in the faceplate display Refer to Table 5 6 for a description of the Port Information data window entries 59097 02 B XKX 4 Managing Switches LOGIC Displaying Switch Information o 9 9 97 l 4 2 5 Configured Zonesets Data Windows The Configured Zonesets data window displays all zone sets zones aliases and zone membership in the zoning database shown in Figure 4 6 To open the Configured Zonesets data window click the Configured Zonesets tab below the data window in the faceplate display To view the active zone set in the Active Zonesets data window open the topology display and click the Active Zonesets data window tab The Configured Zonesets data window uses display conventions for expanding and contracting entries that are similar to the fabric tree An entry handle located to the left of an entry in the tree indicates that the entry can be expanded Click this handle or double click the following entries to expand or collapse them WB Azone set entry expands to show its member zones m Azone entry expands to show its members by device port World Wide Name or device port Fibre Channel address m The alias entry expands to show its entries SANsurfer Switch Manager Faceplate File Fabric Switch Port Zoning Wizards View Help BR
278. ox xxxx 5 security limits Security Attribute Maximum Current Name MaxSecuritySets 4 1 MaxGroups 16 2 MaxTotalMembers 1000 19 MaxMembersPerGroup 1000 4 group1 15 group2 The following is an example of the Security List command SANbox xxxx admin security gt security list SB211 192 5 security list Active Security Information SecuritySet Group GroupMember No active securityset defined Configured Security Information SecuritySet Group GroupMember groupl ISL 10 00 00 00 00 10 21 16 Authentication Chap Primary Hash MD5 Primary Secret ROAR A KA Secondary Hash SHA 1 Secondary Secret RRRAKKKRE Binding 0 10 00 00 00 00 10 21 17 Authentication Chap Primary Hash MD5 Primary Secret Aa ANILAO Secondary Hash SHA 1 Secondary Secret OS KORR A KE Binding 0 59097 02 B A 57 A Command Line Interface XX Securityset Command QLOGIC AA NY Securityset Command Authority Syntax Keywords A 58 Manages security sets in the security database Admin session and a Security Edit session Refer to the Security Command on page A 54 for information about starting a Security Edit session The Active Groups and List keywords are available without an Admin session You must close the Security Edit session before using the Activate and Deactivate keywords securityset activate security set active add security set group list copy security set source security set destination create security set
279. poration SANsurfer Switch Manager m For Solaris usr opt QLogic Corporation SANsurfer Switch Manager B For Mac OS X Users qlogic Applications QLogic Corporation SANsurfer Switch Manager 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager Changing the Encryption Key for the Default Fabric View File A aaa 2 6 To uninstall the SANsurfer Switch Manager application do the following For Windows browse for the uninstall program file or the shortcut link that points to the uninstall program file The uninstall program shortcut is in the same folder as the program shortcut Start menu program group on desktop or user specified that is used to start the SANsurfer Switch Manager application Double click the uninstall program file or shortcut link and follow the instructions to uninstall the SANsurfer Switch Manager application For Linux Solaris or Mac OS X execute the link to Uninstall_SANsurfer_Switch_Manager If no links were created during the installation enter the Uninstall SANsurfer Switch Manager command from the following directory UninstallerData Uninstall SANsurfer Switch Manager Changing the Encryption Key for the Default Fabric View File To change the encryption key for the SANsurfer Switch Manager default fabric view file do the following 2 7 1 Open the File menu and select Save Default Fabric View File to open the Save Default Fabric View File dialog Enter an encryption key in the D
280. port capture of the switch Critical event An event that indicates a potential failure Critical log messages are events that warrant notice by the user By default these log messages will be posted to the screen Critical log messages do not have alarm status as they require no immediate attention from a user or service representative Warning event An event that indicates errors or other conditions that may require attention to maintain maximum performance Warning mes sages will not be posted to the screen unless the log is configured to do so Warning messages are not disruptive and therefore do not meet the criteria of Critical The user need not be informed asynchronously Informative An unclassified event that provides supporting informa tion NOTE 59097 02 B Events Alarms Critical Warning and Informative generated by the application are not saved on the switch They are permanently discarded when you close a SANsurfer Switch Manager session but you can save these events to a file on the workstation before you close SANsurfer Switch Manager and read it later with a text editor or browser Events generated by the switch are stored on switch and will be retrieved when the application is restarted Some alarms are configurable Refer to Configuring Port Threshold Alarms on page 4 14 3 31 3 Managing Fabrics XX Displaying Fabric Information QLOGIC LL _ K O 3 5 2 1 Filtering
281. port number outbyte port number frame port number inframe port number outframe port number errors port number byte port number Displays continuous performance data in total bytes second transmitted and received for the port group 0 15 or 16 19 that includes port number If you omit port number ports 0 15 are displayed Type q and press the Enter key to stop the display inbyte port number Displays continuous performance data in bytes second received for the port group 0 15 or 16 19 that includes port number If you omit port number ports 0 15 are displayed Type q and press the Enter key to stop the display outbyte port number Displays continuous performance data in bytes second transmitted for the set of 16 ports 0 15 or 16 19 that includes port number If you omit port number ports 0 15 are displayed Type q and press the Enter key to stop the display frame port number Displays continuous performance data in total frames second transmitted and received for the set of 16 ports 0 15 or 16 19 that includes port number If you omit port number ports 0 15 are displayed Type q and press the Enter key to stop the display inframe port number Displays continuous performance data in frames second received for the port group 0 15 or 16 19 that includes port number If you omit port number ports 0 15 are displayed Type q and press t
282. r m MaxZonesinZoneSets is 2000 The maximum number of zone linkages to zonesets that can be configured on the switch This will be enforced during the configuration of zoning and during a zoning database merge from the fabric Every time a zone is added to a zoneset this constitutes a linkage Bl MaxMembersPerZone is 2000 The maximum number of zone members that can be added to any zone on the switch This will be enforced during the configuration of zoning and during a zoning database merge from the fabric Aliases are considered zone members when added to a zone B MaxMembersPerAlias is 2000 The maximum number of zone members that can be added to any alias on the switch This will be enforced during the configuration of zoning and during a zoning database merge from the fabric 3 7 2 Using the Zoning Wizard The Zoning Wizard is a series of dialogs that leads you through the process of zoning a fabric To open the Zoning Wizard open the Wizards menu in the faceplate display and select Zoning Wizard The Zoning Wizard helps you with the two most typical reasons for zoning W Zoning Windows servers storage W Assign storage to servers To solve these problems there must be at least one target and at least one initiator in the name server Windows servers do not share devices well but sometimes they must share devices such as a tape drive The wizard helps you define which devices are sharable and which ones are not Once a device
283. r Management Suite start page click the SANbox Switch Software button On the SANbox Switch Software page scroll to the SANbox 5600 Series Series area 2 7 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager XKX Installing the Management Application LOGIC ee In the Operating System column click the Solaris SPARC link 5 Click the SANsurfer Management Software link to open the Save As dialog 6 Enter a path name to save the sansurfer solaris install bin file and click the Save button 7 Open a terminal window for the directory in which the sansurfer_solaris_install bin file was saved and enter the following chmod x sansurfer_solaris_install bin 8 Execute the install program and follow the installation instructions sansurfer solaris install bin 9 When the installation is complete start SANsurfer Management Suite using the SANsurfer file in the installation directory Click the Switch tab from the left pane to open SANsurfer Switch Manager From the Help menu select About and make note of the release version number Close SANsurfer Management Suite 10 To ensure that you are using the most recent version of SANsurfer Switch Manager visit the QLogic support web page and go to Drivers Software and Manuals a Select your switch model from the pull down menu Locate the description for SANsurfer Switch Manager for Linux under Management Software b Ifthe release version number 5 00 xx is greater than what is c
284. rbitrated Loop A Fibre Channel topology where ports use arbitration to establish a point to point circuit Arbitrated Loop Physical Address AL PA A unique one byte value assigned during loop initialization to each NL Portona loop ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit Auto Save Zoning parameter that determines whether changes to the active zone set that a switch receives from other switches in the fabric will be saved to permanent memory on that switch BootP A type of network server Buffer Credit A measure of port buffer capacity equal to one frame Cascade Topology A fabric in which the switches are connected in series If you connect the last switch back to the first switch you create a cascade with a loop topology Class 2 Service A service which multiplexes frames at frame boundaries to or from one or more N_ Ports wit h acknowledgment provided Glossary 1 SANbox 5600 Series Switch Management User s Guide XX LOGIC AA NN Class 3 Service A service which multiplexes frames at frame boundaries to or from one or more N Ports without acknowledgment Configured Zone Sets The zone sets stored on a switch excluding the active zone set Default Visibility Zoning parameter that determines the level of communication among ports devices when there is no active zone set Domain ID User defined number that identifies the switch in the fabric Event Log Log of messages
285. rent value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list lot press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so Configuring Port Number 16 AdminState 1 Online 2 Offline 3 Diagnostics 4 Down Online LinkSpeed 10 10Gb s 10Gb s PortType G FE G SymPortName string max 32 chars 10G 16 DeviceScanEnable True False True ForceOfflineRSCN True False False AutoPerfTuning True False Fales LCFEnable True False False MFSEnable True False False VIEnable True False False MSEnable True False True IOStreamGuard Enable Disable Auto Disabled Finished configuring attributes This configuration must be saved see config save command and activated see config activate command before it can take effect To discard this configuration use the config cancel command SANbox xxxx admin config 5 A 72 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Set Config Command o 9 9 7 aaa The following is an example of the Set Config Security command SANbox xxxx gt admin start SANbox xxxx admin 5 config edit SANbox xxxx admin config 5 set config security A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list lot press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so FabricBindingEnabled True F
286. ress Ethernet Network IP Mask Ethernet Gateway Address Admin Timeout Inactivity Timeout LocalLogEnabled RemotelogEnabled RemoteLogHostAddress NTPClientEnabled NTPServerAddress EmbeddedGUlEnabled Static 10 0 0 1 255 0 0 0 10 0 0 254 30 minutes 0 True False 10 0 0 254 False 10 0 0 254 True Enter the Show Config Security command to display security configuration values Table A 17 Security Configuration Defaults Parameter Default AutoSave True FabricBindingEnabled True 59097 02 B A 53 A Command Line Interface XX Security Command QLOGIC z Security Command Authority Syntax Keywords A 54 Opens a Security Edit session in which to manage the security database on a switch Refer to the Group Command on page A 26 and the Securityset Command on page A 58 Admin session The keywords Active History Limits and List are available without an Admin session security active cancel clear edit history limits list restore save active Displays the active security set its groups and group members This keyword does not require an Admin session cancel Closes a Security Edit session without saving changes Use the Edit keyword to open a Security Edit session clear Clears all inactive security sets from the volatile edit copy of the security database This keyword does not affect the non volatile security database However if you enter t
287. rify port is back online enter the following command and press the Enter key The contents of the AdminState field should display be Online show port x A 124 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Test Command ls The online loopback node to node test requires that port be online and connected to a remote device To run the online loopback test do the following 1 To start an admin session enter the following command and press the Enter key admin start 2 Torun the online loopback test enter the following command and press the Enter key test port x online 3 Aseries of test parameters are displayed on the screen Press the Enter key to accept each default parameter value or type a new value for each parameter and press the Enter key The TestLength parameter is the number of frames sent the FrameSize 256 byte maximum in some cases parameter is the number of bytes in each frame and the DataPattern parameter is the pattern in the payload Before running the test make sure that the device attached to the port can handle the test parameters SANbox xxxx admin gt test port x online A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the default value If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so TestLength decima
288. rity Save command was entered save Saves the changes that have been made to the security database during a Security Edit session Changes you make to any security set will not take effect until you activate that security set Refer to the Securityset Command on page A 58 for information about activating a security set 59097 02 B A 55 A Command Line Interface XX Security Command QLOGIC AA NN Examples The following is an example of the Security Active command SANbox xxxx 5 security active Active Security Information SecuritySet Group GroupMember groupl ISL 10 00 00 00 00 10 21 16 Authentication Chap Primary Hash MD5 Primary Secret KKEKKK EK Secondary Hash SHA 1 Secondary Secret KAKKKKKK Binding 0 10 00 00 00 00 10 21 17 Authentication Chap Primary Hash MD5 Primary Secret KKK KEK Secondary Hash SHA 1 Secondary Secret KAKKKKKK Binding 0 The following is an example of the Security History command SB211 192 5 security history Active Database Information SecuritySetLastActivated DeactivatedBy Remote SecuritySetLastActivated DeactivatedOn day month date time year Database Checksum 00000000 Inactive Database Information ConfigurationLastEditedBy admin IB sessionll ConfigurationLastEditedOn day month date time year Database Checksum 00007558 A 56 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Security Command aaa The following is an example of the Security Limits command SANb
289. rts devices in member list A zone can have a maximum of 2000 members member list can have any of the following formats B X Domain ID and port number pair Domain ID Port Number Domain IDs can be 1 239 port numbers can be 0 255 W 6 character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address hex W 16 character hexadecimal worldwide port name WWPN with the format XX20CXX20CXXXOCXOCXX m Alias name The application verifies that the members format is correct but does not validate that such a member exists copy Zone source Zone destination Creates a new zone named zone destination and copies the membership into it from the zone given by zone source create Zone Creates a zone with the name given by zone An zone name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters Valid characters are 0 9 A Z a z S and The zoning database supports a maximum of 2000 zones A 131 A Command Line Interface XX Zone Command QLOGIC AA NN delete zone Deletes the specified zone given by zone from the zoning database If the zone is a component of the active zone set the zone will not be removed from the active zone set until the active zone set is deactivated list Displays a list of all zones and the zone sets of which they are components This keyword does not require an Admin session members zone Displays all members of the zone given by zone This keyword does not require an
290. s complete click the Done button In the SMS install directory enter the following command to execute the chglax bat file If prompted to overwrite an existing file enter Y to do so chglax bat Restart SANsurfer Switch Manager from SANsurfer Management suite as you did in step 7 and confirm that the new version is running 2 5 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager xX Installing the Management Application QLOGIC AA NN 2 2 2 2 SMS Installation for Linux Close all programs currently running and insert the SANsurfer Management Suite Installation Disk into the management workstation CD ROM drive 1 If a file browser dialog opens showing icons for the contents of the CD ROM double click the Start_Here htm file to open the SANsurfer Management Suite start page If a file browser does not open double click the CD ROM icon to open the browser If there is no CD ROM icon do the following a Open an xterm or other terminal window b Mount the CD ROM From a shell prompt enter the following command mount mnt cdrom C Execute your web browser to view the Start Here htm document using one of the following commands mozilla file mnt cdrom Start Here htm Or netscape file mnt cdrom Start_Here htm d The SANsurfer Management Suite start page opens in your browser On the SANsurfer Management Suite start page click the SANbox Switch Software button On the SANbox Switch Software page scroll to the SANbox 5600 Series
291. s A 86 System Configuration Settings llle A 87 Show Port Parameler maa mana ka 4a e RERO Ptr RESI SRL ba dee Ex E A 95 Switch Operational Parameters 0 000 ee A 98 Zoning Database Limits 2 err am ERE TERR E ee eS bea y Rene es A 139 59097 02 B Page xii Section 1 Introduction This manual describes the switch management tools which include the SANsurfer Switch Manager application version 5 00 and the Command Line Interface CLI for the SANbox 5600 Series Fibre Channel switches firmware version 5 0 The SANbox 5600 Series switches are 20 port non blocking Fibre Channel switches This manual defines the features components and performance characteristics of the SANbox 5600 Series switches The SANsurfer Switch Manager application is the primary focus of this manual which is organized as follows a Section 1 describes the intended audience for this manual related materials and technical support W Section 2 describes how to use SANsurfer Switch Manager its menus and its displays Section 3 describes fabric management tasks Section 4 describes switch management tasks Section 5 describes port and device management tasks Appendix A describes the command line interface gt HHH E glossary of terms and an index are also provided 1 1 Intended Audience This manual introduces the switch management products and explains their installation and use It is intended for users responsible for inst
292. s Guide ls 3 2 5 3 2 5 1 3 2 5 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 4 5 3 4 6 3 4 7 3 4 8 3 5 3 5 1 3 5 2 3 5 2 1 3 5 2 2 3 5 2 3 3 5 3 3 5 4 3 5 5 3 6 3 6 1 3 6 2 3 6 3 3 6 3 1 3 6 3 2 3 6 3 3 3 6 3 4 3 6 3 5 3 7 59097 02 B Fabric Services paha bka nsa eae 3 19 Enabling SNMP Configuration lille 3 20 Enabling In band Management iussus 3 20 Tracking Fabric Firmware and Software Versions 3 20 Saving a Version Snapshot es re ERR RO ti BEN MES 3 21 Viewing and Comparing Version Snapshots 3 21 Exporting Version Snapshots to a File Aa 3 22 Managing the Fabric Database 000 cece eee 3 23 ACGING a ablic uuu peut qtu det ats PAPA NAA ass NI ES 3 23 Removing a Fabric x RR DE eu YR Rin br 3 24 Opening a Fabric VIEW FIG oe Ra RH Wi aed oR Bayaan 3 24 Saving a Fabric View File llle 3 25 Rediscovering a Fabric 1 ese behets dered ka ADB NA ES 3 25 Deleting Switches and Links 0020 e eee eee eee 3 25 Adding a New Switch to a Fabric 0 000 cee eee eee 3 26 Replacing a Failed Switch ud o ex er bee EY as 3 27 Displaying Fabric Information reus th etal eee bea E es 3 28 Fabric SIaluS s ss po ert Dott ved thawed ie urs ee 3 29 Displaying the Event Browser 0c eee eee eee 3 30 Filtering the Event Browser 2 000 e eee eee 3 3
293. s The following is an example of the Image Install command SANbox xxxx admin gt image install Warning Installing new firmware requires a switch reset Continuing with this action will terminate all management sessions including any Telnet sessions When the firmware activation is complete you may log in to the switch again Do you want to continue y n y Press q and the ENTER key to abort this command User Account johndoe IP Address 10 220 33 130 Source Filename 5 0 00 11 mpc About to install image Do you want to continue y n y Connected to 10 20 33 130 10 20 33 130 220 localhost localdomain FTP server Version wu 2 6 1 18 ready 331 Password required for johndoe Password XXXXXXXXX 230 User johndoe logged in bin 200 Type set to I verbose Verbose mode off This may take several seconds The switch will now reset Connection closed by foreign host A 40 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface LOGIC Lip Command ls Lip Command Reinitializes the specified loop port Authority Admin session Syntax lip port_number Keywords port number The number of the port to be reinitialized Ports are numbered beginning with O Examples The following is an example of the Lip command SANbox xxxx admin gt lip 2 59097 02 B A 41 A Command Line Interface XX Passwd Command QLOGIC EN PG X 3a Passwd Command Authority Syntax Keywords Examples Changes
294. s command SANbox xxxx 5 show setup services System Services TelnetEnabled True SSHEnabled False GUIMgmtEnabled True SSLMgmtEnabled False EmbeddedGUIEnabled True SNMPEnabled True NTPEnabled True CIMEnabled True FTPEnabled True ManagementServerEnabled True The following is an example of the Show Setup RADIUS command SANbox xxxx 5 show setup radius Radius Information DeviceAuthOrder RadiusLocal UserAuthOrder RadiusLocal TotalServers 1 Server 1 ServerIPAddress 10 20 11 8 ServerUDPPort 1812 DeviceAuthServer False UserAuthServer True AccountingServer False Timeout 2 Retries 0 SignPackets False Secret dox ok ee 59097 02 B A 119 A Command Line Interface XX Show Setup Command QLOGIC E wq X L The following is an example of the Show Setup Snmp command SANbox xxxx 5 show setup snmp SNMP Information SNMPEnabled True Contact sysContact undefined Location N 107 System Test Lab Description SANbox 5602 FC Switch TraplAddress 10 0 0 254 TraplPort 162 TraplSeverity warning TraplVersion 2 TraplEnabled False Trap2Address 0 0 0 0 Trap2Port 162 Trap2Severity warning Trap2Version 2 Trap2Enabled False Trap3Address 0 0 0 0 Trap3Port 162 Trap3Severity warning Trap3Version 2 Trap3Enabled False Trap4Address 0 0 0 0 Trap4Port 162 Trap4Severity warning Trap4Version 2 Trap4Enabled False Trap5Address 0 0 0 0 TrapbPort 162 Trap5Severity warning Trap5Version 2
295. s dialog two ways Choose one of the following methods to edit a nickname m Inthe topology or faceplate display open the File menu and select Nicknames to open the Nicknames dialog The device entries are listed in table format UU Click on a device entry in the table Open the Edit menu and select Edit Nickname to open the Edit Nicknames dialog Edit the nickname in the text field Click the OK button to save the changes U Double click a cell in the Nicknames or WWN columns and edit the nickname in the text field Click the OK button to save the changes W Inthe topology or faceplate display click the Devices tab to display the Devices data window Double click a cell in the Nickname column to open the Edit Nickname dialog Edit the nickname in the text field Click the OK button to save the changes Refer to Devices Data Window on page 3 34 for more information 3 6 3 3 Deleting a Nickname To delete a device port nickname do the following 1 Open the File menu and select Nicknames to open the Nicknames dialog 2 Click a device in the table Open the Edit menu and select Delete Nickname 3 Click the Save button to save the changes 3 6 3 4 Exporting Nicknames to a File You can save nicknames to a file This is useful for distributing nicknames to other management workstations To save nicknames to an XML file do the following 1 Open the File menu and select Nicknames to open the Nicknames dialog 2 Open the File
296. s full bandwidth service over the following distances m 26kilometers at 1 Gbps 0 6 credits per Km m 13 kilometers at 2 Gbps 1 2 credits per Km W 6kilometers at 4 Gbps 2 4 credits km Longer distances can be spanned at full bandwidth by borrowing credits from designated 1 2 4 Gbps donor ports thus pooling the buffer capacities This is called credit extension Each donor port contributes 15 credits to the pool from which the recipient ports can draw The recipient port also loses one credit in the process For example you can configure a 1 2 4 Gbps recipient port to borrow 15 credits from one donor port for a total of 30 credits 15415230 This will support communication over the following approximate distances B 50 Km at 1 Gbps 30 0 6 m 25 Km at 2 Gbps 301 2 B 12km at 4 Gbps 30 2 4 Only 1 2 4 Gbps ports can donate or borrow credits To extend credits open the Wizards menu and select Ext Credit Wizard The Extended Credit Wizard leads you through the following process to extend credits based on transmission distance requirements 1 Extended Distance Explains the concepts and principles of extending port credits Click the Next button 2 Extended Distance Requirements Specify speed and distance requirements for each port then click Next 3 Designate Donor Ports Select available ports and click 55 to move the port into the Selected Donor Port column shown in Figure 5 3 Match the number of ports needed with the number
297. s in Nicknames xml which is found in your working directory In addition to creating editing and deleting nicknames you can also export the nicknames to a file which can then be imported into the Nicknames xml file on other workstations 3 6 3 1 Creating a Nickname To create a device port nickname do the following 1 Open the File menu and select Nicknames to open the Nicknames dialog 2 Choose one of the following methods to enter a nickname A nickname must start with a letter and can have up to 64 characters Valid characters include alphanumeric characters aA zZ 0 9 and special symbols W Click on a device in the table Open the Edit menu and select Create Nickname to open the Add Nickname dialog In the Add Nickname dialog enter a nickname and WWN and click the OK button Double click a cell in the Nicknames column and enter a new nickname in the text field Click the Save button to save the changes and exit the Nicknames dialog You can also create a nickname by double clicking a cell in the Nickname column of the Devices data window Refer to Devices Data Window on page 3 34 59097 02 B 3 37 3 Managing Fabrics XKX Working with Device Information and Nicknames LOGIC AA NY 3 6 3 2 Editing a Nickname A nickname must start with a letter and can have up to 64 characters Valid characters include alphanumeric characters aA zZ 0 9 and special symbols _ You can access the Edit Nickname
298. s keyword active Displays the name of the active zone set This keyword does not require Admin session add zone set zone list Adds a list of zones and aliases given by zone list to the zone set given by zone set Use a space to delimit zone and alias names in zone list copy zone set source zone set destination Creates a new zone set named zone set destination and copies into it the zones from the zone set given by zone set source create zone set Creates the zone set with the name given by zone set A zone set name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters Valid characters are 0 9 A Z a z and The zoning database supports a maximum of 256 zone sets A 135 A Command Line Interface XX Zoneset Command QLOGIC AA NN deactivate Deactivates the active zone set Close the Zoning Edit session before using this keyword delete zone set Deletes the zone set given by zone set If the specified zone set is active the command is suspended until the zone set is deactivated list Displays a list of all zone sets This keyword does not require an Admin session remove zone set zone list Removes a list of zones given by zone list from the zone set given by Zone set Use a space to delimit zone names in zone list If zone set is the active zone set the zone will not be removed until the zone set has been deactivated rename zone set old zone set
299. s obtained the switch reverts to the previously config ured IP address W DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Acquires the IP configuration from a DHCP server If no satisfactory lease is obtained the DHCP client attempts to use the previously config ured lease If the previous lease cannot be used no IP address will be assigned to this switch in order to avoid an IP address conflict The DHCP server must then be made available If a BootP RARP or DHCP server is not available the switch will attempt to use a previously assigned valid lease If no lease was ever assigned the switch will attempt to use the previously assigned static IP address Internet Protocol IP address for the Ethernet port The default value is 10 0 0 1 Subnet mask address for the Ethernet port The default value is 255 0 0 0 IP gateway address The default value is 10 0 0 254 4 30 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 4 Managing Switches Configuring a Switch ls 4 7 6 2 Remote Logging 4 7 6 3 NTP Client 59097 02 B The Remote Logging syslog feature enables saving of the log information to a remote host that supports the syslog protocol When enabled the log entries are sent to the syslog host at the IP address that you specify in the Logging Host IP Address field Log entries are saved in the internal switch log whether this feature is enabled or not To save log information to a remote host you must edit the syslog conf
300. s of Microsoft Corporation Netscape Navigator and Mozilla are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation Red Hat is a registered trademark of Red Hat Software Inc All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Document Revision History Release Revision A September 2005 Firmware Version 5 0 SANsurfer Switch Manager version 5 00 Update Revision B December 22 2006 Revision B Changes Document Sections Affected Update logos and page formats All Update Contact Information 1 4 3 2000 2006 QLogic Corporation All Rights Reserved Worldwide First Published August 2004 QLogic Corporation 26650 Aliso Viejo Parkway Aliso Viejo CA 92656 800 662 4471 or 949 389 6000 Page ii 59097 02 B Section 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 1 4 2 1 4 3 Section 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 5 1 2 5 2 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 11 1 2 11 1 1 2 11 1 2 2 11 1 3 2 11 2 2 11 3 2 11 4 2 11 5 59097 02 B Table of Contents Introduction Intended Audlernce s 1e om s A bu X VR hv aah otl Related Materials llle JDOM LICenses core eee eR etie et us Pain Re RR EXE Technical SUBDOFT s se cioe rete REO de Sue ee tees e ANG 76a sedie et It o added BL Ra Gd Mee dde Hun e PEE Baa LG AGANG PAPA Mack eh ae os Contact Information 0 0 0 0 0 ees Using SANsurfer Switch
301. s on the switch can communicate with all ports devices on switches that also have default visibility enabled When Default Visibility is disabled NONE none of the ports devices on that switch can communicate with any other port device in the fabric 3 7 3 2 3 Discard Inactive The Discard Inactive parameter automatically removes inactive zones and zone sets when a zoneset is activated or deactivated from a remote switch 3 7 3 3 Saving the Zoning Database to a File You can save the zoning database to an XML file You can later reload this zoning database on the same switch or another switch To save a zoning database to a file do the following 1 Inthe faceplate display open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning 2 In the Edit Zoning dialog open the File menu and select Save As 3 In the Save dialog enter a file name for the database file 4 Click the Save button to save the zoning file 3 7 3 4 Restoring the Zoning Database from a File CAUTION Restoring the zoning database from a file will replace the current zoning database on the switch Do the following to restore the zoning database from a file to a switch 1 In the faceplate display open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning window 2 Open the File menu and select Open File A popup window will prompt you to select an XML zoning database file 3 Selecta file and click Open 3 48 59097 02 B po 3 Managing Fabrics QLOGIC Zon
302. s the Control key while selecting Select a zone set in the left pane Click the Insert button If the port device you want to add is not in the Port Device tree you can add it by doing the following a b C d Right click the selected zone Open the Edit menu and select Create Members Choose the WWN Domain Port or First Port Address radio button Enter the hexadecimal value for the port device according to the radio button selection 16 digits for a WWN member 4 digits for a Domain Port member DDPP or a 6 digit Fibre Channel Address for a First Port Address member DDPPAA where D domain ID P port number and A ALPA 3 Click the OK button to add the member and save the change NOTE 3 54 Domain ID conflicts can result in automatic reassignment of switch domain IDs These reassignments are not reflected in zones that use domain ID port number pair to define their membership Be sure to reconfigure zones that are affected by a domain ID change 59097 02 B po 3 Managing Fabrics QLOGIC Zoning a Fabric TO 3 7 5 3 Renaming a Zone or a Zone Set To rename a zone do the following 1 Inthe Zone Sets tree of the Edit Zoning dialog click the zone zone set to be renamed 2 Open the Edit menu and select Rename 3 Inthe Rename Zone Rename Zone Set dialog enter a new name for the zone zone set 4 Click the OK button 3 7 5 4 Removing a Zone Member Removing a zone member will affect every zone and
303. save default visibility remain unchanged 59097 02 B A 47 A Command Line Interface Reset Command XX QLOGIC AA NY Notes A 48 The following tables specify the various factory default settings Enter the Show Config Switch command to display switch configuration values Table A 9 Switch Configuration Defaults Parameter Admin State Broadcast Enabled InbandEnabled FDMIEnabled FDMIEntries DefaultDomain ID Domain ID Lock Symbolic Name R A TOV E D TOV Principal Priority Configuration Description InteropMode LegacyAddressFormat Online True True True 1000 1 Ox Hex False SANbox xxxx 10000 2000 254 Config Default Standard False Default 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Reset Command nn aaa Enter the Show Config Port command to display port configuration values Table A 10 Port Configuration Defaults Parameter 1 2 4 Gbps Port Defaults 10 Gbps Port Defaults Admin State Online Online Link Speed Auto 10 Gbps Port Type GL G Symbolic Name Portn where n is the port 10G n where n is the port number number ALFairness False N A DeviceScanEnabled True True ForceOfflineRSCN False False ARB_FF False N A InteropCredit 0 0 ExtCredit 0 N A FANEnable True N A AutoPerfTuning True True LCFEnable False False MFSEnable False False MSEnable True False NoClose False N A lOStreamGuard Auto Auto VIEnable False False PDISCPingEnable True N A
304. sede soft zone boundaries Membership can be defined only by domain ID and port number ACL zoning supports all port types To make it easier to add a group of ports or devices to one or more zones you can create an alias An alias is a named set of ports or devices that are grouped together for convenience Unlike zones aliases impose no communication restrictions between its members You can add an alias to one or more zones However you cannot add a zone to an alias nor can an alias be a member of another alias A zone set is a named group of zones A zone can be a member of more than one zone set Each switch in the fabric maintains its own zoning database containing one or more zone sets This zoning database resides in non volatile or permanent memory and is therefore retained after a reset Refer to Configured Zonesets Data Windows on page 4 13 for information about displaying the zoning database The orphan zone set is created by the application automatically to hold the zones which are not in any set The orphan zone set cannot be removed and is not saved on the switch To apply zoning to a fabric choose a zone set and activate it When you activate a zone set the switch distributes that zone set and its zones excluding aliases to every switch in the fabric This zone set is known as the active zone set Refer to Active Zone Set Data Window on page 3 35 for information about displaying the active zone set 3 41 3
305. sends a test frame from the ASIC through the SerDes chip through the SFP transceiver fitted with an external loopback plug and back to the ASIC for the selected ports The port passes the test if the test frame that was sent by the ASIC matches the test frame that was received This test requires that the port be in diagnostics mode and therefore disrupts communication 5 17 5 Managing Ports XKX Testing Ports QLOGIC AA NY u Node to Node Online The Node to Node test verifies communications between the port and its device node or device loop The port being tested must be online and connected to a remote device The port passes the test if the frame that was sent by the ASIC matches the frame that was received This test does not disrupt communication on the selected port This test requires that the port be online and therefore does not disrupt communication To run the internal external or online port loopback test on a port do the following 1 Inthe faceplate display select the port to be tested 2 Open the Port menu and select Port Loopback Test to open the Port Loopback Test dialog 3 Inthe Test Selection area click the radio button for the type of loopback test to be run Internal External or Online If you choose the internal or external test SANsurfer Switch Manager will prompt you to confirm that the port state needs to be changed to the diagnostic state Click the OK button and SANsurfer Switch Man
306. sessionl 10 20 68 108 1031 day month date time year admin OB session2 10 20 68 108 1034 day month date time year snmp OB session3 Unknown day month date time year snmp IB session4 Unknown day month date time year admin OB session5 Unknown day month date time year 59097 02 B A 129 A Command Line Interface XX Whoami Command QLOGIC EN Pp V BPA G Whoami Command Displays the account name session number and switch domain ID for the Telnet session Authority None Syntax whoami Examples The following is an example of the Whoami command SANbox xxxx 5 whoami User name admin session2 Switch name SANbOX XXXX Switch domain ID 21 0x15 A 130 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC A Command Line Interface Zone Command ls Zone Command Authority Syntax Keywords 59097 02 B Manages zones and zone membership on a switch Admin session and a Zoning Edit session Refer to the Zoning Command on page A 138 for information about starting a Zoning Edit session The List Members and Zonesets keywords are available without an Admin session zone add zone member list copy zone source zone destination create zone delete zone list members zone remove zone member list rename zone old zone new type zone zone type zonesets zone add zone member list Specifies one or more ports devices given by members to add to the zone named zone Use a space to delimit aliases and po
307. set with POST 4 17 without POST 4 17 Reset command A 46 Resource Allocation Timeout 4 26 restore configuration 4 38 Reverse Address Resolution Protocol 4 30 S SANsurfer Management Suite Linux install 2 6 Solaris install 2 7 uninstall 2 14 Windows install 2 4 59097 02 B XX LOGIC SANbox 5600 Series Switch Management User s Guide I SANsurfer Performance Viewer arrange graphs 5 25 customize graphs 5 26 display graphs 5 24 preferences 5 23 start 5 20 SANsurfer Switch Manager default fabric file 2 12 exit 2 12 Linux install 2 3 Mac OS X install 2 4 preferences 2 16 5 23 Solaris install 2 3 start 2 9 uninstall 2 13 2 14 user interface 2 18 version 2 17 web applet A 85 A 88 Windows install 2 3 scan device 5 14 secret A 28 Secure Shell description 3 7 service 4 28 A 84 Secure Socket Layer certificate A 20 description 3 7 service 4 28 A 84 switch time A 23 security certificate 3 7 configuration 3 17 A 67 configuration defaults A 53 configuration display A 107 connection 3 7 consistency checklist 3 8 database A 47 device 3 9 fabric 3 7 user account 3 8 Security command A 54 59097 02 B security database clear 3 16 A 54 display A 55 display history A 55 limits A 55 security edit session cancel A 54 initiate A 55 revert changes A 55 save changes A 55 security set activate 3 18 A 58 add member group A 58 copy A 58 create 3 11 A 59 deactivate 3 18 A 59 delete A 59 de
308. sing Trigger 25 Falling Trigger 1 Sample Window sec 10 ox cma Ww Figure 4 7 Port Threshold Alarm Configuration Dialog Check the Enable All Port Threshold Alarms check box to enable monitoring for all the individual alarm types that are enabled The Enable All Port Threshold Alarms check box is the master control for the individual alarms For example the switch will monitor CRC errors only if both the CRC Error Monitoring box and the Enable All Port Threshold Alarms check box are checked Select an event type from the Port Threshold Alarm pull down menu Choose from the following options m CRC error monitoring Decode error monitoring ISL monitoring Login monitoring Logout monitoring Loss of signal monitoring Check the Enable box to make the alarm eligible for use 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 4 Managing Switches Paging a Switch ls 5 Enter a value for the rising trigger A rising trigger alarm is generated when the event count per interval exceeds the rising trigger The switch will not generate another rising trigger alarm for that event until the count descends below the falling trigger and rises again above the rising trigger Consider the example in Figure 4 8 6 Enter a value for the falling trigger A falling trigger alarm is generated when the event count per interval descends below the falling trigger NOTE The switch will down a port if a rising trigger al
309. sion When enabled user activity is audited whether UserAuthServer is enabled or not The default is False The accounting server UDP port number is the ServerUDPPort value plus 1 default 1813 Timeout Number of seconds to wait to receive a response from the RADIUS server before timing out The default is 2 Retries Number of retries after the first attempt to establish commu nication with the RADIUS server fails The default is 0 SignPackets Enable True or disable False the use of sign packets to protect the RADIUS server packet integrity The default is False Secret 32 byte hex string or 16 byte ASCII string used as a pass word for authentication purposes between the switch and the RADIUS server 59097 02 B A 83 A Command Line Interface XX Set Setup Command QLOGIC O O O services Prompts you in a line by line fashion to enable or disable switch services Table A 24 describes the switch service parameters For each parameter enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets NOTE Use caution when disabling TelnetEnabled and GUIMgmtEnabled it is possible to disable all Ethernet access to the switch Table A 24 Switch Services Settings Entry Description TelnetEnabled Enables True or disables False the ability to manage the switch over a Telnet connection Disabling this service is not recommended The default is True SSHEnabled Enables True or
310. t Fabric View File Fabric Tracker User Accounts Port Symbolic Name Preferences Show Event Browser Set Date Time Reset Port Nicknames Switch Properties Port Loopback Test Exit Advanced Switch Properties Services Security Consistency Checklist Network Properties SNMP Properties i Toggle Beacon Port Threshold Alarm Configuration Load Firmware Reset Switch gt Restore Factory Defaults Features Radius Servers Download Support File Zoning Wizards view Help Edit Security Edit Zoning Configuration Wizard Refresh F5 Help Topics Edit Security Config Edit Zoning Config Ext Credit Wizard V View Port Types About Activate Security Set Activate Zone Set Zoning Wizard O View Port States Deactivate Security Set Deactivate Zone Set T View Port Speeds Restore Default Zoning i View Port Media Figure 2 8 Faceplate Display Menu The keyboard shortcut keys vary by display type topology display and faceplate display In addition to the menu bar both the topology and faceplate displays have context sensitive menus that pop up when you right click in the graphic window Refer to Opening the Faceplate and Topology Display Popup Menus on page 2 26 for more information about these popup menus 2 11 1 3 Shortcut Keys Shortcut key combinations available in both the topology and faceplate displays provide an alternative method o
311. t are more important than the informative level events Info Monitors informative warning and critical events The informative level describes routine events associated with a normal fabric This is the default severity level None Monitors none of the severity levels port port list Specifies one or more ports to monitor for events Choose one of the following values port list Specifies port or ports to monitor Use a space to delimit values in the list Ports are numbered beginning with O All Specifies all ports None Disables monitoring on all ports restore Restores and saves the port component and level settings to the default values A 78 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Set Log Command o 9 9 7 aaa save Saves the log settings for the component severity level port and display level These settings remain in effect after a switch reset The log settings can be viewed using the Show Log Settings command To export log entries to a file use the Set Log Archive command start Starts the logging of events based on the Port Component and Level keywords assigned to the current configuration The logging continues until you enter the Set Log Stop command stop Stops logging of events Notes In addition to critical warn and informative severity levels the highest event severity level is alarm The alarm level describes events that are disruptive to
312. t saving changes that were made clear Clears all CIM listener and subscription configurations from the switch edit Opens a CIM edit session limits Displays the maximum allowed number of CIM listeners subscriptions and subscriptions per listener This keyword does not require an Admin session nor a CIM edit session save Saves all changes made during the current CIM edit session Examples The following is an example of the CIM Edit command SANbox xxxx admin 5 cim edit SANbox xxxx admin cim 5 cimlistener create CIM listener 1 SANbox xxxx admin cim 4 cim save 59097 02 B m A Command Line Interface XX CIM Command QLOGIC AA NN The following is an example of the CIM Limits command SANbox xxxx 5 cim limits Cim Attribute Maximum MaxListeners 32 MaxSubscriptions 50 MaxSubscriptionsPerListener 6 A 12 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC A Command Line Interface CIMListener Command ls CIMListener Command Authority Syntax Keywords 59097 02 B Configures CIM indication service listeners and adds subscriptions to listeners Refer to the CIMSubscription Command on page A 15 for information about configuring subscriptions Admin session and a CIM Edit session Refer to the CIM Command on page A 11 for information about opening a CIM edit session cimlistener add listener name subscription list create listener name delete listener name edit listener name add listener
313. t windowpane right click on the top zonesets entry a zone set a zone or a zone member In the popup menu select Properties L In the zone set tree left windowpane select the top zonesets entry a zone set a zone or a zone member Open the Edit menu and select Properties 3 View the zoning limits and properties information in the Properties dialog 4 Click the OK button to close the Properties dialog The zoning limits for switches with 5 02 firmware are m MaxZoneSets is 256 The maximum number of zone sets that can be configured on the switch This will be enforced during the configuration of zoning and during a zoning database merge from the fabric B MaxZones is 2000 The maximum number of zones that can be configured on the switch This will be enforced during the configuration of zoning and during a zoning database merge from the fabric 59097 02 B po 3 Managing Fabrics QLOGIC Zoning a Fabric TO m MaxAliases is 2500 The maximum number of aliases that can be configured on the switch This will be enforced during the configuration of zoning and during a zoning database merge from the fabric E MaxTotalMembers is 10 000 The maximum number of total zone and alias members that can be configured on the switch This will be enforced during the configuration of zoning and during a zoning database merge from the fabric Aliases are considered zone members since they can be added to a zone just like a normal zone membe
314. ta Inactive port operational state is offline but administrative state is online Isolated E Port has lost its connection Refer to Port Information Data Window on page 5 8 for information about why the E Port has isolated Offline port is active can receive signal but cannot accept a device login Diagnostics port is in diagnostics mode in preparation for testing Down the port is disabled power is removed from the lasers and can t be logged in 5 1 1 3 Displaying Port Speeds To display the speed of each port in the faceplate display open the View menu and select View Port Speeds Table 5 3 lists the possible port speeds Table 5 3 Port Speeds State Description Au 1Gb 2Gb 4Gb 10Gb Auto detect 1 Gbps transmission speed 2 Gbps transmission speed 4 Gbps transmission speed 10 Gbps transmission speed 59097 02 B 5 3 5 Managing Ports XX Displaying Port Information QLOGIC AA NY 5 1 1 4 Displaying Transceiver Media Status To display transceiver media status open the View menu and select View Port Media Table 5 4 lists the port media states and their meanings Table 5 4 Port Transceiver Media View Media Icon Description ity Optical SFP Online Green i Optical SFP Offline Gray Fl Copper SFP Online Green L Copper SFP Offline Gray amm XPAK Interface Online Green XPAK Interface Offline Gray
315. ta eed cg RO Dae dM SED 4 38 4 11 Restoring the Factory Default Configuration 00000005 4 40 59097 02 B Page vii SANbox 5600 Series Switch Management User s Guide 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 Section 5 5 1 5 1 1 5 1 1 1 5 1 1 2 5 1 1 3 5 1 1 4 5 1 2 5 1 3 5 2 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 2 3 5 2 4 5 2 5 5 2 6 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 6 1 5 6 2 5 6 3 5 6 4 5 6 5 5 6 6 5 6 7 5 6 7 1 5 6 7 2 5 6 7 3 5 6 7 4 5 6 7 5 5 6 8 5 6 9 XX LOGIC aaa PP Downloading a Support Ket eco a RE Na nad Nian An nG 4 42 Upgrading the Switch Using License Keys 00 0 a 4 42 Installing Firmware s assed ABE b awa pe PR LR ee alee wove HAL eee 4 44 Displaying Hardware Status lille 4 45 Managing Ports Displaying Port Information 4 eo n RR Rm ea ees 5 1 Monitoring Port Status Kao ma aoc ERE tls Res mO Mb pad 5 2 Displaying Port Types sisse eoe ER ERRORES 5 2 Displaying Port Operational States 5 3 Displaying Port Speeds 0 00 a 5 3 Displaying Transceiver Media Status 5 4 Port Statistics Data Window 7 1 2 2a a paaa na RG ei een xxn 5 5 Port Information Data Window llle 5 8 Configuring POFrts eod ex er Sa ense BBS EE ha RO WERE Na 5 10 Changing Port Administrative States 5 11 Changing Port Speeds iue v EAR ta died dee doe aw ed 5 12 Changing Port TypBS ix zcead She SERES VEREOR bad CREE 5 13 I O Stream Guard Gu
316. tch Monitors switch management events Zoning Monitors zoning conflict events display filter Specifies the log events to automatically display on the screen according to the event severity levels given by filter filter can be one of the following values Critical Critical severity level events The critical level describes events that are generally disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric but require no action Warn Warning severity level events The warning level describes events that are generally not disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric but are more important than the informative level events Info Informative severity level events The informative level describes routine events associated with a normal fabric 59097 02 B A 77 A Command Line Interface XX Set Log Command QLOGIC AA P None Specifies no severity levels for display on the screen level filter Specifies the severity level given by filter to use in monitoring and logging events for the specified components or ports filter can be one of the following values Critical Monitors critical events The critical level describes events that are generally disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric but require no action Warn Monitors warning and critical events The warning level describes events that are generally not disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric bu
317. te a command that matches the command string a Enter to re execute the most recent command Examples The following is an example of the History command SANbox xxxx gt history 1 show switch 2 date 3 help set 4 history SANbox xxxx gt 3 help set set SET OPTIONS There are many attributes that can be set Type help with one of the following to get more information Usage set alarm beacon config log pagebreak port setup switch A 36 59097 02 B XKX A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Hotreset Command o 9 97 aaa Hotreset Command Resets the switch for the purpose of activating the pending firmware without disrupting traffic This command terminates all management sessions saves all configuration information and clears the event log After the pending firmware is activated the configuration is recovered This process takes less than 80 seconds To save the event log to a file before resetting refer to the Set Log Command on page A 76 Authority Admin session Syntax hotreset Notes W You can load and activate version 5 0 x firmware on an operating switch without disrupting data traffic or having to re initialize attached devices under the following conditions 0 The current firmware version is a 4 0 4 1 4 2 or 5 x version that precedes the upgrade version DL No changes are being made to switches in the fabric including powering up powering down disconnecti
318. ted on all online N Ports and NL Ports within the hard zone If the originator of the broadcast frame is not in a hard zone the frame is retransmitted on online N Ports and NL Ports that are not in a hard zone The default setting is disabled In band Management 59097 02 B In band management is the ability to manage switches across inter switch links using SANsurfer Switch Manager SNMP management server or the application programming interface The switch comes from the factory with in band management enabled If you disable in band management on a particular switch you can no longer communicate with that switch by means other than a direct Ethernet or serial connection 4 23 4 Managing Switches Xx Configuring a Switch QLOGIC E 4 7 3 Advanced Switch Properties The Advanced Switch Properties dialog enables you to set the timeout values Interop Mode and Legacy Address Format settings The Advanced Switch Properties dialog is available for only the entry switch because an in band switch can not be taken offline The switch will automatically be taken offline temporarily and will be restored to its original state after the changes are completed To open the Advanced Switch Properties dialog open the Switch menu and select Advanced Switch Properties After making changes click the OK button to put the new values into effect Use the Advanced Switch Properties di
319. the default performance view file Refer to Changing the Default Performance View File Encryption Key on page 5 23 for information about defining and changing this encryption key In the Save Default Performance View File dialog enter an encryption key in the Default Performance File Encryption Key field Re enter the encryption key in the Re enter Encryption Key to Confirm field Click the OK button to save the current set of fabrics to the default performance view file in the working directory To prevent SANsurfer Performance Viewer from prompting you to save the default performance view file between sessions set the Auto Load and Save Graphing Environment setting to Enable default Refer to Setting SANsurfer Performance Viewer Preferences on page 5 23 for more information amp Save Default Performance View File SANsurfer Perfo An encryption key is required to encrypt information to be stored in a default performance view file when you exit the application Default File Encryption Key Re enter Encryption Key to Confirm mes aw Figure 5 6 Save Default Performance View File Dialog 59097 02 B 5 21 5 Managing Ports XX Graphing Port Performance QLOGIC AA NY In your next SANsurfer Performance Viewer session the Load Default View File dialog shown in Figure 5 7 prompts you to load the default performance view file and to specify its encryption key if there is one In the Default Fabr
320. the system will prompt you for it install Downloads firmware from a remote host to the switch installs the firmware then resets the switch without a power on self test to activate the firmware This reset is disruptive The command prompts you for the following H IP address of the remote host WB Anaccount name and password on the remote host m Pathname for the firmware image file list Displays the list of image files that reside on the switch unpack file Installs the firmware file given by file After unpacking the file a message appears confirming successful unpacking The switch must be reset for the new firmware to take effect Enter the Hotreset command to attempt a non disruptive activation 59097 02 B po A Command Line Interface QLOGIC Image Command ls Notes To provide consistent performance throughout the fabric ensure that all switches are running the same version of firmware To perform a non disruptive firmware installation and activation do the following 1 Connect to the switch through the Ethernet port or the serial port 2 Move to the folder or directory on the workstation that contains the new firmware image file 3 Establish communications with the switch using the File Transfer Protocol FTP Enter one of the following on the command line gt ftp XXX XXX XXX XXX or gt ftp switchname where xxx xxx xxx xxx is the switch IP address and switchname is the switch name associated with the IP
321. tion it will be used to determine which operational port states are allowed The port type that is currently active This will be set during port auto configuration based on the administrative port type The port state Online Offline Diagnos tics or Down which has been set by the user This state may be different from the configured administrative state if the user has not saved it in the switch configura tion This state is used at the time it is set to try to set the port operational state This value is not persistent and will be lost on a switch reset The port state that is currently active This value may be different from the adminis trative port state for example due to an error condition The port state Online Offline Diagnos tics or Down which is saved in the switch configuration either by the user or at the factory This value is persistent it will be maintained during a switch reset and will be used after a reset to set the port opera tional state Indicates whether logged in or not E Port connection status Status can be None Connecting Connected or Isolated 5 8 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 5 Managing Ports Displaying Port Information ls 59097 02 B Table 5 6 Port Information Data Window Entries Continued Entry Description E Port Isolation Reason MFS Mode O Stream Guard Administrative Port Speed Operational Port Speed Max Credits Device Scan
322. to download the support file to your workstation When prompted to send the support file to another machine decline then close the Telnet session Open an FTP session on the switch and log in with the account name images and password images Transfer the dump support tgz file in binary mode with the Get command SANbox xxxx admin 5 create support Log Msg Creating the support file this will take several seconds FTP the dump support file to another machine y n n SANbox xxxx admin 5 quit ftp switch ip address user images password images ftp gt bin ftp gt get dump_support tgz xxxxx bytes sent in xx secs ftp gt quit The following is an example of the Create Certificate command SANbox xxxx admin gt create certificate The current date and time is day mon date hh mm ss UTC yyyy This is the time used to stamp onto the certificate Is the date and time correct y n n y Certificate generation successful A 22 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC A Command Line Interface Date Command A Date Command Authority Syntax Keywords Notes Examples 59097 02 B This command displays or sets the system date and time To set the date and time the information string must be provided in this format MMDDhhmmCCYY The new date and time takes effect immediately Admin session except to display the date date MMDDhhmmCCYY MMDDhhmmCCY Y Specifies the date this requires an admin session If
323. to Save Mask that determines the IP address subnet Gateway address SNMP enabled or disabled The domain ID currently being used by the fabric The domain ID defined by network administrator Domain ID lock status Prevents True or permits False dynamic domain ID reassignment Number of ports activated on the switch Switch model Switch operational state Online Offline Diagnostic Down Current switch administrative state Switch administrative state that is stored in the switch configuration Resource allocation timeout value Error detect timeout value Zoning merge status When a zone set is activated on an FC SW 2 compliant switch only the active zone set is propagated to all switches in the fabric When a zone set is activated on a non FC SW 2 compliant switch the active zone set and all inactive zone sets the entire zon ing database are stored in permanent memory The Interop Mode setting must be the same on all switches in the fabric otherwise the inter switch links will not connect Legacy port addressing status Enabled only for interoper ability with non FC SW 2 compliant switches Zoning auto save status Saves zoning updates in tempo rary memory and the zoning database True or only in temporary memory False 4 9 4 Managing Switches Displaying Switch Information XX QLOGIC ee Table 4 2 Switch Data Window Entries Continued Entry Description Zoning Default
324. to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press q or Q and the ENTER key to do so FilterID values Create ComputerSystem Modify ComputerSystem Create FCPort 1 2 3 Delete ComputerSystem 4 5 Modify FCPort 6 Delete FCPort Name subscription 1 FilterID see allowed options above Create ComputerSystem EnabledState True False True Duration decimal value 0 720000 secs O forever 0 Finished configuring attributes This configuration must be saved with the cim save command before it can take effect or to discard this configuration use the cim cancel command A 16 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC A Command Line Interface Config Command A ll Config Command Authority Syntax Keywords 59097 02 B Manages the Fibre Channel configurations on a switch For information about setting the port and switch configurations refer to the Set Config Command on page A 64 Admin session for all keywords except List config activate config name backup cancel copy config source config destination delete config name edit config name list restore save config name activate config name Activates the configuration given by config name If you omit config name the currently active configuration is used Only one configuration can be active at a time backup Creates a file named configdata which contains the system configuration information
325. to the switch If FDMI is enabled on a switch the switch stores the HBA information in its FDMI database Disabling FDMI on a switch clears the FDMI database If you disable FDMI on a switch then re enable it you must reset the ports to cause the HBAs to log in again and thus forward HBA information to the switch To view detailed FDMI information for a device open the topology display click the Devices tab and click the Information i button in the Details column of the Devices data window The Detailed Devices Display dialog displays the specific information for that device Refer to Devices Data Window on page 3 34 for more information 4 22 59097 02 B XX LOGIC 4 Managing Switches Configuring a Switch I aaa 4 7 2 5 Broadcast Support 4 7 2 6 Broadcast is supported on the switch and allows for TCP IP support Broadcast is implemented using the proposed standard specified in Multi Switch Broadcast for FC SW 3 T11 Presentation Number T11 02 031v0 Fabric Shortest Path First FSPF is used to set up a fabric spanning tree used in transmission of broadcast frames Broadcast frames are retransmitted on all ISLs indicated in the spanning tree and all online N_Ports and NL_Ports Broadcast zoning is supported with Access Control List ACL hard zones When a broadcast frame is received these hard zones are enforced at the N Ports and NL Ports If the originator of the broadcast is in a hard zone the frame is retransmit
326. try Description Media Part Number The part number assigned to the SFP Media Revision Transceiver hardware version 5 2 Configuring Ports The port settings or characteristics for 1 2 4 Gbps and 10 Gbps ports are configured using the Port Properties dialogs shown in Figure 5 2 To open the corresponding type of Port Properties dialog select one or more ports open the Port menu and select Port Properties or Port Properties 10G Port Properties k Port Properties Symbolic Name 5141 Symbolic Name Sw1 Selected Port Port 3 Selected Port Port 17 Port States online offline diagnostics O down Port States online offline diagnostics down Port Speed auto detect 01Gb 2Gb O4Gb Port type O F port Port type F port FL port G port G port GL port VO Stream Guard O Auto Enable Disable WARNING RSCN suppression must be used for initiator ports only VO Stream Guard Auto C Enable Disable WARNING RSCN suppression must be used for initiator ports only Device Scan C Enable Disable Device Scan Enable Disable o Close Help or cose tom Figure 5 2 Port Properties Dialog The 1 2 4 Gbps and 10 Gbps Port Properties dialogs display the switch name and the selected ports Use the Port Properties dialogs to change the following parameters H Port state Port speed 1 2 4 Gbps ports only Port type I O Stream Guard
327. urce alias_destination create alias delete alias list members alias remove alias member list rename alias_old alias_new add alias member list Specifies one or more ports devices given by member list to add to the alias named alias Use a lt space gt to delimit ports devices in member list An alias can have a maximum of 2000 members A port device in member_list can have any of the following formats W X Domain ID and port number pair Domain ID Port Number Domain IDs can be 1 239 port numbers can be 0 255 m 6 character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address hex WB 16 character hexadecimal worldwide port name WWPN with the format XXIXXIXXIXXIXXIXXIXXIXX The application verifies that the alias format is correct but does not validate that such a port device exists copy alias source alias destination Creates a new alias named alias destination and copies the membership into it from the alias given by alias source create alias Creates an alias with the name given by alias An alias name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters Valid characters are 0 9 A Z a z S and The zoning database supports a maximum of 256 aliases A Command Line Interface XX Alias Command QLOGIC EN PVpVp O C 4 delete alias Deletes the specified alias given by alias from the zoning database If the alias is a member of the active zone set th
328. urity Restores all security sets in the switch database Radius Server Restores all RADIUS Server information defined in the switch database 5 If you select the Configured Zoning or Full Restore option and the file contains zone sets a dialog prompts you to activate one of those zone sets Click the Yes button and select a zone set from the drop down menu in the Select Zone Set to be Activated dialog 6 Click the OK button and view the results in the top pane of the Restore dialog 59097 02 B 4 39 4 Managing Switches Restoring the Factory Default Configuration XX QLOGIC ee 4 11 Restoring the Factory Default Configuration You can restore the switch and port configuration settings to the factory default values To restore the factory configuration on a switch open the Switch menu and select Restore Factory Defaults Table 4 9 lists the factory default switch 4 40 configuration settings Restoring the switch to the factory default configuration does not restore the account name and password settings The most current port license will remain in effect To restore user accounts you must select the Reset User Accounts to Default option in the maintenance menu Refer to Recovering a Switch in the Installation Guide for your switch for information about maintenance mode and the maintenance menu Table 4 9 Factory Default Configuration Settings Setting Symbolic Name Administrative State Domain I
329. urrently installed on your workstation down load the new version Otherwise no upgrade is needed 11 Open the tar file and save the SANsurferSwitchMgr QLGCsol 5 00 xx bin file in a folder and make the file executable chmod tx sansurferswitchmgr OLGCsol 5 00 xx 12 Install the new SANsurfer Switch Manager package pkgadd d sansurferswitchmgr OLGCsol 5 00 xx 13 Change directories to the package location cd usr opt QLGCsol bin 14 Locate and execute the file sbm over sms sh sbm over sms sh 15 When prompted for the SMS installation directory enter d if SMS was installed in it s default directory opt QLogic Corporation SANsurfer Otherwise enter the path name for the SMS installation directory The script will copy the necessary files to the specified installation directory 16 Restart SANsurfer Switch Manager from SANsurfer Management suite as you did in step 9 and confirm that the new version is running 2 8 59097 02 B po 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager QLOGIC Starting SANsurfer Switch Manager aaa 2 3 Starting SANsurfer Switch Manager You can start SANsurfer Switch Manager as a standalone application or from SANsurfer Management Suite NOTE After the switch is operational you can also open the SANsurfer Switch Manager web applet by entering the switch IP address in an internet browser If your workstation does not have the Java 2 Run Time Environment program you will be prompted to download it
330. us Secure Shell status If enabled an encrypted data path is provided for command line interface sessions Secure Sockets Layer status If enabled encryption for switch management application and CIM sessions is pro vided Common Information Model status The CIM agent is based on the SNIA Storage Management Initiative Speci fication SMI S which is the standard for SAN manage ment in a heterogeneous environment FTP status Management server status 4 11 4 Managing Switches XKX Displaying Switch Information QLOGIC z z 4 2 3 Port Statistics Data Window 4 2 4 The Port Statistics data window displays port performance data for the selected ports To open the Port Statistics data window click the Port Stats tab below the data window in the faceplate display Refer to Table 5 6 for a description of the Port Statistics data window entries The Statistics pull down menu is available on the Port Statistics data window and provides different ways to view detailed port information Click the down arrow to open the pull down menu Open the pull down menu and select Absolute to view the total count of statistics since the last switch reset Select Rate to view the number of statistics counted per second over the polling period Select Baseline to view the total count of statistics since the last time the baseline was set Click the Clear Baseline button to set the current baseline Port Information Data Wind
331. ware Linux 4 Execute the install program and follow the installation instructions Linux_5 00 xx xx bin For a Solaris platform 1 Open a terminal window If the disk isn t already mounted enter the following command volcheck 2 Enter following command to move to the directory on the CD that contains the executable cd cdrom cdrom0 data files Management_Software solaris 3 Execute the install program and follow the installation instructions Solaris 5 00 xx xx bin 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager XKX Installing the Management Application QLOGIC ee For a Mac OS X platform 1 Open the CD and move to the following folder data files Management Software MacOSX 2 Double click the applicaton zip file MacOSX 5 00 xx xxx zip This will place the install program on your desktop 3 Locate the Install program icon on your desktop execute it and follow the installation instructions 2 2 2 SANsurfer Management Suite The following instructions describe how to install SANsurfer Management Suite and upgrade SANsurfer Switch Manager You can install SANsurfer Management Suite SMS on a Windows Linux or Solaris workstation Choose the instructions for your workstation m SMS Installation for Windows m SMS Installation for Linux m SMS Installation for Solaris 2 2 21 SMS Installation for Windows Close all programs currently running and insert the SANsurfer Management Suite Installation Disk into the management workstation
332. way address 4 30 A 87 generic port 5 2 5 13 global graph type 5 28 graph print 5 28 rescale 5 28 stack performance 5 25 statistics 5 28 type 5 28 graphic window 2 23 Index 3 SANbox 5600 Series Switch Management User s Guide XX LOGIC AA NN group add member 3 15 A 27 copy A 29 create 3 12 A 29 display 3 17 display member 3 17 edit member attributes 3 16 A 30 list A 31 list members A 31 Management Server A 29 remove 3 16 remove member 3 16 A 31 rename 3 16 A 31 type A 29 A 31 Group command A 26 GUI management service 4 27 H hard reset 4 17 Hardreset command A 34 hardware status 4 45 Heartbeat LED 4 45 help 2 17 Help command A 35 History command A 36 host bus adapter A 94 hot reset 4 17 Hotreset command A 37 I O Stream Guard 5 14 A 66 Image command A 38 in band management description 4 23 enable 3 20 indication service listener A 13 Initial Start Dialog 2 16 Input Power LED 4 45 internal test A 123 Index 4 internal test 5 17 internet browser 2 2 interoperability 4 25 IP address 4 30 configuration 4 30 IP address A 87 ISL group A 29 ISL monitoring 4 14 L layout 2 25 legacy address format 4 25 license key 4 42 A 24 link delete 3 25 selecting 2 25 status 2 24 Link control frame preference routing A 66 Link data window 3 36 link state database A 94 Lip command A 41 listener add A 13 Common Information Model A 93 create A 13 delete A 13 log archive
333. wing options W Enable Suppresses the reception of RSCN messages from other ports for which I O Stream Guard is enabled W X Disable Allows free transmission and reception of RSCN messages W Auto Suppresses the reception of RSCN messages when the port is connected to an initiator device with a QLogic HBA For older QLogic HBAs such as the QLA2200 Device Scan must be enabled The default is Auto Refer to Device Scan on page 5 14 5 2 5 Device Scan The Device Scan feature queries the connected device during login for FC 4 descriptor information Disable this parameter only if the scan creates a conflict with the connected device 5 2 6 Changing Port Symbolic Name To change the symbolic name of a port from the faceplate display do the following 1 Open the faceplate display and select a port 2 Open the Port menu and select Port Symbolic Name 3 Inthe Port Symbolic Name dialog choose one of the following m Enter a new name for the port in the Set Port Symbolic Name field The symbolic name can have up to 32 characters WB Check the Restore Default Port Symbolic Name check box to restore the default name 4 Click the OK button 5 14 59097 02 B XKX 5 Managing Ports QLOGIC Using the Extended Credits Wizard ls 5 3 Using the Extended Credits Wizard Each 1 2 4 Gbps port is supported by a data buffer with a 16 credit capacity that is 16 maximum sized frames For fiber optic cables this enable
334. wise no upgrade is needed and the SMS installation is complete From the tar gz file extract the SANsurferSwitchMgr_Linux_5 00 xx bin file and make the file executable chmod x sansurferswitchmgr_linux_5 02 xx bin Execute the install program and follow the installation instructions sansurferswitchmgr_linux_5 02 xx bin When prompted for an installation directory click the Choose button and select the same folder as the SANsurfer Management Suite installation in step 9 The default SMS installation directory is opt QLogic_Corporation SANsurfer Enter the following script command from the installation directory chglax Start SANsurfer Switch Manager from SANsurfer Management suite as you did in step 9 and confirm that the new version is running SMS Installation for Solaris To install the SANsurfer Switch Manager application on Solaris from the SANsurfer Management Suite CD ROM do the following 59097 02 B 1 Insert the SANsurfer Management Suite Disk into the management workstation CD ROM drive If the SANsurfer Management Suite start page does not open in your default browser do the following a Right click the Workspace Menu b Select File then select File Manager c In File Manager double click the CD ROM folder and then double click the Sansurfer folder d In the Sansurfer folder double click the Start Here htm file to open the SANsurfer Management Suite start page in your default browser On the SANsurfe
335. wn Fabric Change GF00 0005 Added Fabric 10 20 92 205 A Tue May 18 10 11 25 CDT 200 Unknown Fabric Change 8F00 0007 Discovered Switch Tue May 18 10 11 26 CD Normal Fabric Status 8F00 0007 Discovered Switch A Tue May 18 10 11 26 CD Unknown 5 Fabric Change 800 0009 Discovered Link Tue May 18 10 11 25 CDT 200 Normal Fabric Status 8F00 000C Normal A D D Q D D Tue May 18 10 11 26 C Unknown S Fabric Status 8F00 000C Warning Tue May 18 10 11 26 C ormal Fabric Status 8F00 000C Normal Tue May 18 10 11 26C Unknown 5 Link Status 8F00 000E Critical UA Tue May 18 011 26C Unknown 5 Fabric Change 8F00 0009 Discovered Link 1 1 Ki no Se Se Gm S a 5 ff RH NI ho 1 nN Figure 3 11 Events Browser 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 3 Managing Fabrics Displaying Fabric Information Severity is indicated in the severity column using icons as described in Table 3 2 Icon Severity Table 3 2 Severity Levels Description O QO AN No icon Alarm An Alarm is a serviceable event This means that attention by the user or field service is required Alarms are posted asynchronously to the screen and cannot be turned off If the alarm denotes that a sys tem error has occurred the customer and or field representative will generally be directed to provide a show sup
336. y Description LocalLogEnabled Enables True or disables False the saving of log infor mation on the switch The default is True RemoteLogEnabled Enables True or disables False the recording of the switch event log on a remote host that supports the sys log protocol The default is False RemoteLogHostAddress The IP address of the host that will receive the switch NTPClientEnabled NTPServerAddress EmbeddedGUlEnabled event log information if remote logging is enabled The default is 10 0 0 254 Enables True or disables False the Network Time Pro tocol NTP client on the switch This client enables the switch to synchronize its time with an NTP server This feature supports NTP version 4 and is compatible with version 3 An Ethernet connection to the server is required and you must first set an initial time and date on the switch The synchronized time becomes effective immediately The default is False The IP address of the NTP server from which the NTP cli ent acquires the time and date The default is 10 0 0 254 Enables True or disables False the SANsurfer Switch Manager Web applet Changing this parameter to False while the applet is running will terminate the applet The default is True 59097 02 B A Command Line Interface Set Setup Command XX QLOGIC ls Examples The following is an example of the Set Setup RADIUS command SANbox xxxx admin gt set setup radius
337. y and faceplate displays for any fabric or switch m To open the topology display from the fabric tree click a fabric entry W To open the faceplate display from the fabric tree click a switch entry 2 22 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC 2 Using SANsurfer Switch Manager SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface ls 2 11 4 Graphic Window The graphic window shown in Figure 2 6 presents graphic information about fabrics and switches such as the fabric topology and the switch faceplate The window height can be adjusted by clicking and dragging the window border that it shares with the data window 2 11 5 Data Window and Tabs 2 11 6 The data window presents a table of data and statistics associated with the selected tab Use the scroll bar to browse through the data The window length can be adjusted by clicking and dragging the border that it shares with the graphic window Adjust the column width by moving the pointer over the column heading border shared by two columns until a right left arrow graphic is displayed Click and drag the arrow to the desired width The data window tabs present options for the type of information to display in the data window These options vary depending on the display Working Status Indicator 59097 02 B The working status indicator located in the lower right corner of the SANsurfer Switch Manager window shows when the management workstation is exchanging information with the fabric As c
338. y level to use when monitoring trap events The default is Warning Specifies the SNMP version 1 or 2 to use in formatting traps The default is 2 Specifies whether traps event information are enabled or dis abled default Read community password that authorizes an SNMP agent to read information from the switch This is a write only field The value on the switch and the SNMP management server must be the same The read community password can be up to 32 characters excluding semicolon and comma The default is public Write community password that authorizes an SNMP agent to write information to the switch This is a write only field The value on the switch and the SNMP management server must be the same The write community password can be up to 32 characters excluding semicolon and comma The default is private 59097 02 B XX QLOGIC ls A Command Line Interface Set Setup Command Table A 25 SNMP Configuration Settings Continued Entry Description TrapCommunity AuthFailureTrap ProxyEnabled Trap community password that authorizes an SNMP agent to receive traps This is a write only field The value on the switch and the SNMP management server must be the same The trap community password can be up to 32 characters excluding semicolon and comma The default is public Enables True or disables False the generation of traps in
339. y opens automatically in the SANsurfer Performance Viewer topology display On Windows platforms you will need to manually open the fabric in the SANsurfer Performance Viewer topology display NOTE On the Solaris platforms if you launch the SANsurfer Performance Viewer application from the SANsurfer Switch Manager application and SANsurfer Performance Viewer can not connect to the fabric for example if you have reached the maximum number of SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions on the entry switch then SANsurfer Performance Viewer opens with a blue fabric icon displayed in the fabric tree The reason for status displayed after the fabric name in the fabric tree will indicate the reason for failure to connect 5 20 59097 02 B XKX 5 Managing Ports QLOGIC Graphing Port Performance ls 5 6 2 Exiting SANsurfer Performance Viewer To exit a SANsurfer Performance Viewer session open the File menu and select Exit The current fabric view is automatically saved to your default performance view file upon exit if you have defined an encryption key The key is encrypted and saved with your default performance view file A performance view file contains the set of fabrics that have been added and the graphs that have been opened during a SANsurfer Performance Viewer session If you have not yet defined an encryption key the Save Default Performance View File dialog shown in Figure 5 6 prompts you to save the current performance view file as
340. y tab page shows a brief description of the changes that have occurred between the older snapshot and the newer one Use the Summary tab page quickly view what has changed Viewing and Comparing Version Snapshots 59097 02 B The Differences tab page shows a side by side comparison of two snapshots The timestamp of each snapshot is displayed above the scroll area showing that snapshot The background color of the older snapshot is darker than the background of the newer snapshot The arrow icon between the snapshot selectors always points from the older snapshot to the newer one If the two snapshots have the same timestamp the arrow will not be displayed The scroll bars are synchronized to view the same portion of each snapshot file simultaneously Click and drag the separator bar between the two panes to resize each pane At the top of the separator bar between the two panes click the left right arrows to close the corresponding pane The left right arrows move to one side 3 21 3 Managing Fabrics XKX Tracking Fabric Firmware and Software Versions LOGIC AA NY 3 3 3 Exporting Version Snapshots to a File The Reports tab page enables you to select one of several reports to save to a text file The are two types of reports The Summary report type shows the same format displayed on the Summary tab page without the color highlighting The Detail report type shows a detailed breakdown of the differences Use the Export button to sav
341. ync 2 Class3FramesIn 999 PrimSeqErrors 0 Class3FramesOut 540 RxLinkResets 1 Class3Toss 0 RxOfflineSeq 0 Class3WordsIn 29516 TotalErrors 628777 Class3WordsOut 8406 TotalLinkResets 6 DecodeErrors 628775 TotalLIPsRecvd 5 EpConnects 3 TotalLIPsXmitd 7 FBusy 0 TotalOfflineSeq 5 FlowErrors 0 TotalRxFrames 999 FReject 0 TotalRxWords 29516 InvalidCRC 0 TotalTxFrames 540 InvalidDestAddr 0 TotalTxWords 8406 LIP AL PD AL PS 0 TxLinkResets 5 LIP F7 AL PS 0 TxOfflineSeq 5 LIP F7 F7 5 59097 02 B A 103 A Command Line Interface Show Command XX LOGIC AA NN The following is an example of the Show Switch command SANbox xxxx gt show switch Switch Information SymbolicName SwitchWWN SwitchType BootVersion CreditPool DomainID FirstPortAddress FlashSize MBytes LogLevel MaxPorts NumberOfResets ReasonForLastReset ActivelmageVersion build date PendingImageVersion build date ActiveConfiguration AdminState AdminModeActive BeaconOnStatus OperationalState PrincipalSwitchRole BoardTemp 1 Degrees Celsius SwitchDiagnosticsStatus SwitchTemperatureStatus sw 108 100000c0dd00bc56 SANbox 5600 Series Vx x X x 0 day month date time year 0 19 0x13 130000 128 Critical 20 15 PowerUp Vx x x 0 2 day month date time year Vx x x 0 17 default day month date time year Online False False Online False 32 Passed ormal The following is an example of the Show Topology comma
342. zone members Refer to Resetting a Port on page 5 16 for information about resetting a port 59097 02 B 3 59 3 Managing Fabrics XX Zoning a Fabric QLOGIC E Notes 3 60 59097 02 B 59097 02 B This section describes the following tasks that manage switches in the fabric Section 4 Managing Switches Managing User Accounts Displaying Switch Information Configuring Port Threshold Alarms Paging a Switch Setting the Date Time and Enabling NTP Client Resetting a Switch Configuring a Switch Managing Switch Stacks Archiving a Switch Restoring a Switch Restoring the Factory Default Configuration Downloading a Support File Installing Firmware Upgrading the Switch Using License Keys Displaying Hardware Status 4 1 4 Managing Switches XX Managing User Accounts QLOGIC AA NN 4 1 Managing User Accounts Only the Admin account can manage user accounts with the User Account Administration dialogs However any user can modify their own password To open the User Account Administration dialogs open the Switch menu in the faceplate display and select User Accounts A user account consists of the following m Account name or login BH Password W Authority level m Expiration date Switches come from the factory with the following user accounts Table 4 1 Factory User Accounts Account Name Password Admin Authority Expiration admin admin true never expires images ima
343. zone set in which that zone is a member To remove a member from a zone 1 Inthe Edit Zoning dialog select the zone member to be removed 2 Open the Edit menu and select Remove 3 Click the OK button to save changes and close the Edit Zoning dialog 3 7 5 5 Removing a Zone from a Zone Set The orphan zone set is created by the application automatically to hold the zones which are not in any set The orphan zone set cannot be removed and is not saved on the switch To remove a zone from a zone set do the following 1 Inthe Edit Zoning dialog select the zone to be removed The selected zone will be removed from that zone set only 2 Open the Edit menu and select Remove 3 Click the OK button to save changes and close the Edit Zoning dialog 3 7 5 6 Removing a Zone from All Zone Sets To remove a zone from all zone sets do the following 1 Inthe Edit Zoning dialog select the zone to be removed 2 Open the Edit menu and select Remove Zone from All Sets 3 Click the OK button to save changes and close the Edit Zoning dialog 59097 02 B 3 55 3 Managing Fabrics XX Zoning a Fabric QLOGIC E OO 4 OO 9 3 7 5 7 Changing Zone Types To change a zone type do the following 1 In the faceplate display select the switch with the zone type to change 2 Click the Zoning button to open the Edit Zoning dialog 3 Inthe Zone Sets tree select the zone to change 4 Open the Edit menu and select Set Zone Type to open the Set Zon

Q-Logic 5600 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents